Sbo 20 [PDF]

Zitiervorschau

Technical Documentation

Servicing Procedure Catalog

SBO 20/24 - N° 12410 HSK

© SIDEL

Thaïlande

Publication date : 13/11/2009 SIDEL "BLOWING & COATING DIVISION" - Avenue de la patrouille de France - Octeville sur mer - BP 204 - 76 053 Le Havre Cedex FRANCE Tel : 00 33 (0)2.32.85.86.87 - Fax : 00.33 (0)2.32.85.81.00 - Email : [email protected]

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Revision history

REVISION HISTORY The information contained within this document is the property of SIDEL. Except in the case of authorizations expressly accorded granted by means of a contract, no part of this document may be copied or disclosed without the prior written agreement of SIDEL m

Creation and revision Date 13/11/2009

© SIDEL

Creation

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1/2

© SIDEL

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Revision history

2/2

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Contents

GENERAL PRESENTATION USER PROCEDURE MECHANICAL OPERATION PROCEDURE ELECTRICAL OPERATION PROCEDURE

Part A Part B Part C Part D

CONTENTS GENERAL PRESENTATION General presentation

Part A

.............................................................................................................................................

USER PROCEDURE Safety procedure

1

Part B ..............................................................................................................................................

Operating procedure

........................................................................................................................................

Production process procedure

.........................................................................................................................

MECHANICAL OPERATION PROCEDURE Inspecting / cleaning procedure Removal / Refit procedure Adjustment procedure Greasing procedure

BPU Part C

.......................................................................................................................

BNM

...............................................................................................................................

BDM

.....................................................................................................................................

BRM

.........................................................................................................................................

BGM

ELECTRICAL OPERATION PROCEDURE Inspecting / cleaning procedure Removal / Refit procedure

Part D

.......................................................................................................................

BNE

...............................................................................................................................

BDE

......................................................................................................................................

BRE

© SIDEL

Adjustment procedure

BSU BCU

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1/2

© SIDEL

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Contents

2/2

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part A

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

GENERAL PRESENTATION USER PROCEDURE MECHANICAL OPERATION PROCEDURE ELECTRICAL OPERATION PROCEDURE

Part A Part B Part C Part D

TABLE OF CONTENTS GENERAL PRESENTATION Foreword

1

............................................................................................................................................................

General Information

............................................................................................................................................

Using the Servicing Procedure Catalog Procedure classification

..............................................................................................................

.............................................................................................................................

Information contained in the procedure bars List of procedure bars

1.3.2 1.3.3

..................................................................................................................

1.3.4

.................................................................................................................................

1.3.5

...............................................................................................................

1.3.5.1

..............................................................................................................................

1.3.5.2

Final status of the machine Writing conventions

1.3 1.3.1

.............................................................................................

Initial status of the machine Basic precautions

1.2

................................................................................................................................

Contents of the procedure files Using the procedures

1.1

...............................................................................................................

1.3.5.3

.................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................

1.4

© SIDEL

Documents supplied with the machine

1.3.6

Publication date : 13/11/2009

A - 1/2

Part A

© SIDEL

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

A - 2/2

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part A

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / General presentation

1 GENERAL PRESENTATION 1.1

Foreword Before using a procedure, first read the User Manual.

1.2

General Information

The Servicing Procedure Catalog includes the following: - safety measures and precautions, - operating modes for preventive maintenance operations at levels 1, 2 and 3, - main actions relating to the operation or the setting up of the machine.

1.3

Using the Servicing Procedure Catalog

1.3.1 Procedure classification The procedures are classed in 5 categories: - Safety procedure, - operating procedure, - process (machine setting) procedure, - mechanical operation procedure, - electrical operation procedure. 1.3.2

Information contained in the procedure bars 1

2

3

5

4

1-PIC071-01-xx.svg

Operation pictogram (1) The pictogram specifies the procedure type and is a visual reference which makes the Catalog easier to follow. m

Pictogram

Signifies Safety procedure

Operating procedure

Production process procedure Inspecting / cleaning procedure Removal / Refit procedure Adjustment procedure

© SIDEL

Greasing procedure

Procedure level(2) For operating and setting procedures the level of the procedure corresponds to the required user profile. m

Publication date : 13/11/2009

A - 1 - 1/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / General presentation

Part A

For safety and servicing procedures the level of the procedure corresponds to the qualifications required of the techncians. Procedure title (3) Summary of the procedure. m

Procedure reference (4) Procedure references are coded as follows: - The first letter indicates the division within "SIDEL" to which the procedure belongs; "Blowing", "Coating", "Filling" ... - The second letter indicates the type of procedure; Operating, Process, Cleaning, Removal, Adjustment or Greasing. - The third letter indicates the area of the procedure; Operation, Mechanical or Electrical. - The 3 figures indicate the reference number of the procedure. m

Reference and number of pages (5) The first figure indicates the page number. The second figure indicates the number of pages in the procedure file. m

1.3.3

List of procedure bars

1.3.4 Contents of the procedure files The procedures contain the following information: - the part of the machine at which the procedure will take place, - specific safety precautions relating to the procedure, - specific conditions relating to the procedure (machine status), - equipment and materials required for the procedure (spare parts, specific tools, lubricants etc.), - procedures to be followed, - actions at the end of the operation.

A - 1 - 2/4

Publication date : 13/11/2009

© SIDEL

1-PIC070-01-02.svg

Part A 1.3.5

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / General presentation

Using the procedures

1.3.5.1 Initial status of the machine All servicing procedures (except operating procedures) assume that the machine has been correctly installed, stopped normally (no faults) and has been connected to all required utilities (high and low pressure air, water, electricity etc.). If this is not the case, you should first ensure that the machine meets these requirements. All power supplies to the machine (except those required by and specified in the servicing procedure) must be shut off. 1.3.5.2 Basic precautions Before using any of the procedure sheets, first refer to the User manual for the following: - to follow the safety precautions, - to ensure that all personnel involved possess the required profile and qualifications, - to ensure that the correct lubricants and/or cleaning agents are used. Before starting, make you that you have read the entire procedure, in order to: - identify the part of the machine at which the procedure needs to be carried out, - ensure that all power and utility supplies not required for the procedure have been cut, - follow all safety precautions specific to the procedure, - obtain other procedure files as required, - identify and obtain equipment required for the procedure. Always follow each step of the procedure in order. Unless otherwise indicated, tighten all threaded parts to the torques corresponding to their diameter and type, please refer to chapter "Bolt tightening torques" chapter located in the "Appendix" section of the User manual. 1.3.5.3 Final status of the machine When you have completed a procedure, always check the following: - that the area where the procedure has been carried out is clean, - that no tools or foreign objects have been left behind, - that the machine has been returned to production set up, - that the machine does not pose any potential danger to the personnel and their surroundings. 1.3.6

Writing conventions

Symbols Important sections of text will be accompanied by the following symbols: m

Strictly prohibited. Obligatory before carrying out a procedure. Warning, advice, recommendation or possible consequences of an action. Remark or observation on the results of an operation.

© SIDEL

Additional information located in a sub-chapter or another chapter in this manual or another manual.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

A - 1 - 3/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / General presentation

m

Part A

Symbols and writing conventions Symbol or convention

Signifies Step number in the procedure file Indicates a condition that must be met in order to carry out an action (Test - Check Indirect action) The location of the operation Number reference: identifies an assembly, a sub-assembly or a part Color code: identifies and/or locates an assembly, a sub-assembly or a part in an illustration Alpha-numerical reference: identifies an assembly, a sub-assembly or a part Indicates the result of a step in the procedure Highlight key words or phrases to make reading easier Indicate supplementary information relating to this word in the current manual's glossary Indicates a reference to another procedure or chapter

1.4

Documents supplied with the machine

Presentation Manual. Operator Manual. Servicing Procedure Catalog (inspection / cleaning, removal / refit, setting, lubrication, etc.). Spare-parts catalog "Machine" (assembly drawings and part-list nomenclature). Spare-parts catalog specific to articles to be produced, otherwise known as "Personalized" or "Custom" parts(assembly drawings and part-list nomenclature). - Back-up copy of the PCC (DVD-ROM) application.

© SIDEL

-

A - 1 - 4/4

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

GENERAL PRESENTATION USER PROCEDURE MECHANICAL OPERATION PROCEDURE ELECTRICAL OPERATION PROCEDURE

Part A Part B Part C Part D

TABLE OF CONTENTS SAFETY PROCEDURE

BSU

Safety: opening/closing molds

..................................................................................................................

Safety: blocking the manual rotation system

............................................................................................

Safety: mechanical blocking/unblocking of the machine Pneumatic circuit safety checks

BSU-003

................................................................................................................

BSU-004

......................................................................................................

Checking the door safeties in JOG mode

.................................................................................................

OPERATING PROCEDURE

BSU-006

.........................................................................................

BCU-001

..............................................................................................

BCU-002

..................................................................................................................

BCU-003

..................................................................................................................................

BCU-004

Turning on the main machine power circuit Turning on the preform feeder Turning on the machine utilities

................................................................................................................

Running the machine in "Automatic" mode

BCU-005

..............................................................................................

BCU-006

...........................................................................................

BCU-008

..................................................................................................................................

BCU-009

Turning off the utility supplies to the machine Turning off the preform feeder

..................................................................................................................

Turning off the main machine circuit

BCU-010

.........................................................................................................

BCU-011

Isolating the machine

................................................................................................................................

BCU-012

Using the JOG system

..............................................................................................................................

BCU-013

Using manual rotation

...............................................................................................................................

BCU-014

Running the machine in "Manual" mode

...................................................................................................

BCU-015

Inspecting the preforms on delivery

..........................................................................................................

BCU-016

Clearing preforms from the feeder

............................................................................................................

Setting the pressure on the low pressure air system Operating the feeder in Automatic mode

................................................................................

..................................................................................................

Resynchronizing after a torque limiter has tripped

BCU-017 BCU-018 BCU-019

...................................................................................

BCU-020

User management

....................................................................................................................................

BCU-021

Alarm configuration

...................................................................................................................................

Acknowledging "information" and "alert" alarms User login / logout

BCU-023

.....................................................................................................................................

BCU-024

........................................................................................................................

Acknowledging "critical" alarms

................................................................................................................

Configuring access to application functions Entering the date

BCU-022

.......................................................................................

Entering numerical values

..............................................................................................

......................................................................................................................................

Operating the preform feeder in manual mode © SIDEL

BSU-005

BCU

Turning on the power supplies to the machine

Turning off the PCC

BSU-002

...........................................................................

Checking the emergency stop buttons

Turning on the PCC

BSU-001

Vision system, access to the blower

BCU-025 BCU-026 BCU-027 BCU-028

.........................................................................................

BCU-034

.........................................................................................................

BCU-036

Publication date : 13/11/2009

B - 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

PRODUCTION PROCESS PROCEDURE

Part B BPU

Setting points "P0" and "P10"

...................................................................................................................

Setting the blowing pressure

.....................................................................................................................

Auto-adapting the speed of the preform feeder

........................................................................................

BPU-001 BPU-002 BPU-003

Output rate setpoint

..................................................................................................................................

BPU-004

Recipe management

.................................................................................................................................

BPU-005

....................................................................................................................................

BPU-006

...................................................................................................................................................

BPU-007

Solenoid valve test Oven test

Preform feeder test

...................................................................................................................................

Setting the parameters of the process

......................................................................................................

Carrying out a trial on a new production process Mechanical settings for the lamps

BPU-008 BPU-009

......................................................................................

BPU-010

.............................................................................................................

BPU-011

...............................................................................................................

BPU-012

Checking the preblow flow setting

............................................................................................................

BPU-013

Checking the feeder preform count

...........................................................................................................

BPU-014

Setting the preblowing pressure

Setting the parameters for the preform feeder cell-sensors Searching for preform feeder start-up setpoints

BPU-015 BPU-017

..........................................................................................

BPU-027

© SIDEL

Initializing the preform feeder production start

......................................................................

.......................................................................................

B - 2/2

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

User procedure Safety procedure

TABLE OF CONTENTS Safety: opening/closing molds

..................................................................................................................

Safety: blocking the manual rotation system

............................................................................................

Safety: mechanical blocking/unblocking of the machine Pneumatic circuit safety checks

BSU-001 BSU-002

...........................................................................

BSU-003

................................................................................................................

BSU-004

Checking the emergency stop buttons

...................................................................................................... .................................................................................................

BSU-006

© SIDEL

Checking the door safeties in JOG mode

BSU-005

Publication date : 13/11/2009

B - 1/2

Part B

© SIDEL

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

B - 2/2

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Safety procedure

BSU-001

Safety: opening/closing molds

1

GENERAL INFORMATION The holding brace (1) prevents the locking system from dropping down from the up-position, which could result in an operator losing his fingers.

1-006030-01-xx.svg

Never attempt any work on an open mold support unit without first positioning the holding brace (1).

1

Working on hot molds : The following procedure is carried out on cold molds. Some procedures may, however, require an intervention on a hot mold. In these cases always follow the following safety instructions: Wear protective clothing on the body, hands and face during any work on the mold support unit. Protective equipment must be in accordance with the stipulated risks. Hot metal, risk of burns. There is a risk of splashing of fluids at high temperature and pressure. MACHINE STATUS - cold molds. Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

© SIDEL

Parts None Consumables None Specific tools - locking system holding brace (1).

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-008494-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Safety procedure

1

Safety: opening/closing molds

Part B BSU-001

2/2

PROCEDURE Opening the mold support unit 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Bring the mold support unit around to your working position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013. 3- Place both hands below the nut (2) and move the locking system upwards. 4- Manually, open the locking system fully. 2

Positioning the holding brace 5- Place the holding brace (1) on the right mold support unit support block (3), facing the lock. 6- Turn the knob (4).

1-006680-01-xx.svg

1

4

The holding brace is now locked in position.

The mold support unit is now secured and there is no risk of injury. Removing the holding brace 7- Turn the knob (4).

3

The holding brace is now unlocked.

1-008495-01-xx.svg

8- Remove the locking system holding brace (1). Closing the mold support unit 9- Place your hands on each of the support blocks (3 ; 5) and close the mold support unit.

The mold support unit will lock automatically.

BEFORE YOU FINISH

5

3

10- Close the safety doors.

1-006683-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Part B 1/2

BSU-002

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Safety procedure

Safety: blocking the manual rotation system

1

GENERAL INFORMATION Blocking the manual rotation system prevents the locking system from being opened manually by pressing the button (1). Blocking the manual rotation system ensures the safety of personnel when carrying out maintenance as long as at least one machine door is open. For all major maintenance operations, use the locking pin to prevent machine rotation, see procedure "BSU-003. 1-006030-14-xx.svg

The visual may be different depending on the machine model ad configuration. MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

1

1-006908-05-xx.svg

PROCEDURE Inhibiting manual rotation 1- Press the (2) key.

The (A) window appears.

2- Press the (3) key.

Manual rotation is now blocked. 3- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. Releasing manual rotation

2

The manual rotation system can be released if all of the machine doors are closed.

© SIDEL

1-010353-02-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Safety procedure

1

Safety: blocking the manual rotation system

Part B BSU-002

2/2

4- Close the safety doors. 5- Press the (3) key.

A

BEFORE YOU FINISH

3

Manual rotation is no longer inhibited.

6- Close the window(s) and return to the "Welcome" family.

The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-010348-02-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Safety procedure

BSU-003

Safety: mechanical blocking/unblocking of the machine

1

GENERAL INFORMATION The machine is blocked at the blow wheel, however safety cannot be guaranteed if parts of the transmission have been removed. When the locking brace (1) is inserted into the blow wheel drive ring (2): - the blow wheel is mechanically locked in position and manual rotation cannot be used, - the presence of the locking brace (1) is detected by the sensor "B12.6" which sends a signal to the PLC preventing the machine from starting.

1-006030-65-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS - all machine power procedure "BCU-012.

and

utilities

turned

off,

see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables None Specific tools - 1 padlock. PROCEDURE Blocking 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 1

If necessary, use the manual rotation to position the blow wheel drive ring (2), see procedure "BCU-014. 2- Fit the brace (1) on the drive ring (2). 3- Lock off the brace (1).

The machine can no longer rotate.

2

Unblocking 4- Release the brace (1). 5- Remove the brace (1).

The machine is now free to rotate.

BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006095-03-xx.svg

6- Stow the brace (1) back in its housing .

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Safety procedure

Safety: mechanical blocking/unblocking of the machine

BSU-003

2/2

© SIDEL

1

Part B

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

BSU-004

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Safety procedure

Pneumatic circuit safety checks

3

GENERAL INFORMATION The aim of this procedure is to make sure that the pressure in the air lines (except the low pressure and the permanent pressure circuits) is released when a door is opened or when an emergency stop button is pressed while the machine is in production. MACHINE STATUS - machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001, - PCC application set to "Settings". 1-006030-04-xx.svg

PROCEDURE 1- Test the blowing on the station located at the rear of the blow wheel, see procedure "BPU-006. 2- Close the window(s) and return to the "Welcome" family. 3- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. High pressure air circuit

F Check the pressure before regulation at the gauge (1). The pressure gauge (1) indicates the pressure in the local supply. F Control the pressure value after adjusting the pressure gauges (2). - The pressure gauges (2) indicate zero pressure? The high pressure circuit is now secured. · Go to the next step. - One of the pressure gauges (2) shows a pressure that is not zero? The high pressure circuit is not secured. · Contact SIDEL.

2

1

© SIDEL

1-007859-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Safety procedure

3

Pneumatic circuit safety checks

BSU-004

2/2

F Check the pressure at the gauge (3). - the pressure gauge (3) indicates zero pressure? The preblow circuit is now secured. · Go to the next step. - The pressure gauge (3) indicates remaining pressure? The preblow circuit is not secured. · Contact SIDEL.

3 1-007331-02-xx.svg

Low pressure air circuit

F Check the pressure before regulation at the gauge (4). The pressure gauge (4) indicates the pressure in the local supply. F Check the pressure at the gauge (5). - the pressure gauge (5) indicates zero pressure? The low pressure circuit is now secured. · Go to the next step. - The pressure gauge (5) indicates remaining pressure? The low pressure circuit is not secured. · Contact SIDEL. F Make sure that there are no current faults on the band (A) at the PCC.

4

5 1-006273-06-xx.svg

A

If any of the pneumatic circuits are at abnormal pressures contact SIDEL. BEFORE YOU FINISH 4- Close the safety doors.

1-006403-04-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Part B 1/2

BSU-005

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Safety procedure

Checking the emergency stop buttons

1

GENERAL INFORMATION The emergency stop buttons stop the machine immediately when pressed by the operator. For more information on the locations of the emergency stop buttons, please refer to chapter "System safety" chapter in the User manual. MACHINE STATUS - machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001, - PCC application in "Manual" mode, procedure "BCU-015.

see

1-006030-00-xx.svg

PROCEDURE Blowing machine emergency stop button inspection 1- Select the minimum output rate instruction, see procedure "BPU-004. 2- Press the (1) key.

1

6

The alarm will sound until the button (1) changes status.

3- Release the button (1).

© SIDEL

The brake opens and the machine begins to turn. 4- Press one of the emergency stop buttons . The machine stops immediately. An siren sounds and an alarm light appears. A critical message appears at the PCC. 5- Release the emergency stop button . 6- Acknowledge the fault, see procedure "BCU-026. 7- Repeat steps 2 to 6 until you have checked all of the emergency stop buttons. - If any of the emergency stops do not work, contact SIDEL. Inspecting the emergency stop buttons on the preform distributor 8- Press the (2) key. The "Feeder" family appears.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-006704-11-xx.svg

Part B

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Safety procedure

1

Checking the emergency stop buttons

9- Press the (4) key.

The numerical keypad appears. 10- Enter the minimum setpoint value. 11- Press the (5) key. The numerical keypad appears. 12- Enter the minimum setpoint value. 13- Press the (6) key. The preform distributor starts. 14- Press one of the emergency stop buttons . The machine stops immediately. An alarm message appears at the PCC. 15- Release the emergency stop button . 16- Acknowledge the fault, see procedure "BCU-026. 17- Repeat steps 13 to 16 until you have checked all of the emergency stop buttons. - If any of the emergency stops do not work, contact SIDEL.

2

BEFORE YOU FINISH

BSU-005 4

2/2

5

1-008464-04-02.svg

18- Make sure that all of the emergency stops are unlocked. 19- Enter the production output rate, see procedure "BPU-004.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

BSU-006

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Safety procedure

Checking the door safeties in JOG mode

1

GENERAL INFORMATION In JOG mode, the acknowledgement of a fault due to a door opening will clear when the door is closed.

1-006030-14-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005. PROCEDURE 1- Connect the JOG (1) to one of the zones "Z1" to "Z7", see procedure "BCU-013. 2- Open a machine door not corresponding to that zone. 3- Press button (1). 4-

56789-

The machine should not start. Press the (2) key. The (A) window appears. The alarm message window (A) appears. Make sure that the alarm message (A) corresponds to the number of the door opened. Close the door. The message is cleared from the window (A). Repeat steps 2 to 6 to check all of the doors. Press the (3) key. The window (A) disappears from the screen. Connect the JOG (1) to another zone.

1-006265-01-xx.svg

1

© SIDEL

1-006268-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Safety procedure

1

Checking the door safeties in JOG mode

10- Repeat steps 2 to 7, to check all of the zones from "Z1" to "Z7".

BSU-006

2/2

2

BEFORE YOU FINISH 11- Stop JOG mode, see procedure "BCU-013.

The procedure is now complete.

1-010353-29-02.svg

A

3

© SIDEL

1-010017-05-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

User procedure Operating procedure

TABLE OF CONTENTS Turning on the power supplies to the machine

.........................................................................................

BCU-001

..............................................................................................

BCU-002

..................................................................................................................

BCU-003

..................................................................................................................................

BCU-004

Turning on the main machine power circuit Turning on the preform feeder Turning on the PCC

Turning on the machine utilities

................................................................................................................

Running the machine in "Automatic" mode

..............................................................................................

BCU-006

...........................................................................................

BCU-008

Turning off the utility supplies to the machine Turning off the PCC

..................................................................................................................................

Turning off the preform feeder

..................................................................................................................

Turning off the main machine circuit Isolating the machine

BCU-005

BCU-009 BCU-010

.........................................................................................................

BCU-011

................................................................................................................................

BCU-012

Using the JOG system

..............................................................................................................................

BCU-013

Using manual rotation

...............................................................................................................................

BCU-014

Running the machine in "Manual" mode

...................................................................................................

BCU-015

Inspecting the preforms on delivery

..........................................................................................................

BCU-016

Clearing preforms from the feeder

............................................................................................................

BCU-017

Setting the pressure on the low pressure air system Operating the feeder in Automatic mode

................................................................................

BCU-018

..................................................................................................

BCU-019

Resynchronizing after a torque limiter has tripped

...................................................................................

BCU-020

User management

....................................................................................................................................

BCU-021

Alarm configuration

...................................................................................................................................

Acknowledging "information" and "alert" alarms User login / logout

BCU-023

.....................................................................................................................................

BCU-024

Entering numerical values

........................................................................................................................

Acknowledging "critical" alarms

................................................................................................................

Configuring access to application functions Entering the date

BCU-022

.......................................................................................

BCU-025 BCU-026

..............................................................................................

BCU-027

......................................................................................................................................

BCU-028

Operating the preform feeder in manual mode

.........................................................................................

BCU-034

.........................................................................................................

BCU-036

© SIDEL

Vision system, access to the blower

Publication date : 13/11/2009

B - 1/2

Part B

© SIDEL

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

B - 2/2

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

BCU-001

Turning on the power supplies to the machine

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Make sure that no work is in progress on any of the utility systems before turning on the power, air and water supplies. Access to electrical areas is restricted to qualified and authorized personnel only.

1-006030-13-xx.svg

Circuit breaker Q1A

Up-circuit transformer 230 V and cabinet cooling protection

Q1B

Protection for the on-board component

Q1C

24 Vcc 40 A supply protection

Q1D

24 Vcc 20 A supply protection

Q1E

24 Vcc poles protection

Q1F

24 V input/ouput protection

Q1G

230 V transformer up-circuit protection

Q1H

230 V transformer down-circuit protection

Q1AD

24 V connection protection

Q109A

Lighting protection

Q13AA

Cabinet cooling system protection

PROCEDURE

1

2

1- Close the safety doors. 2- Turn on the air and water supplies, see procedure "BCU-005. 3- Open the doors to the main electrical cabinet . 4- Open the circuit breakers (1) on the primary circuit. 5- Close circuit breaker "Q1A" (2).

The primary electrical circuit is now live. 6- Close the circuit breakers (1) on the primary circuit. The plc, the UPS and the cabinet cooling system are now under power. 7- Set the power module (4) standby switch (3) to position "I".

© SIDEL

When a battery is flat, the red lamp "BAF" (5) on the corresponding power module will light up, indicating a battery fault. If any one of the batteries is faulty, SIDEL recommends that you replace all of the batteries, see procedure "BDE-001.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-008533-02-xx.svg

2

1-008521-02-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

2

Turning on the power supplies to the machine

Part B BCU-001

2/2

8- Set the main switch (6) to "RUN". 9- Turn on the main machine circuit, see procedure "BCU-002. 10- Turn on the PCC, see procedure "BCU-004. 11- Turn on the preform feeder, see procedure "BCU-003. BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Check that the pneumatic circuits are secured, see procedure "BSU-004. The procedure is now complete.

1

1-008633-01-xx.svg

5

4

3

6

© SIDEL

1-007067-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

BCU-002

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

Turning on the main machine power circuit

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Access to electrical areas is restricted to qualified and authorized personnel only. Certain parts of the machine, such as the plc, the UPS and the cabinet cooling system, are not powered by the main machine circuit but by the primary electrical circuit, see procedure "BCU-001.

1-006030-13-xx.svg

PROCEDURE 1- Close the safety doors. 2- Close the door to the electrical cabinet. 3- Close the main section switch "Q1" (1) on the control panel.

1 5

The power-on light (2) comes on. 4- Release the emergency stop button (3). 5- Turn the key on the general switch (4) to "I". 6- Press the start button (5). The button (5) lights up. The machine and the preform feeder are now under power. The procedure is now complete.

2 3

4

© SIDEL

1-006263-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

Turning on the main machine power circuit

BCU-002

2/2

© SIDEL

2

Part B

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

BCU-003

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

Turning on the preform feeder

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Make sure that no work is in progress on any of the utility systems before turning on the power, air and water supplies. Access to electrical areas is restricted to qualified and authorized personnel only. Power is supplied to the preform feeder through the peripheral equipment circuit breaker "Q47A" located in the main electrical cabinet . When the main machine circuit is turned on at the main circuit breaker "Q1" power is also supplied to the preform feeder, see procedure "BCU-002.

3

6

1-006030-125-xx.svg

If "Q1" (main electrical cabinet) is closed and "Q1KA"(4) is open, the terminal "X1" and the orange wiring in the preform distributer cabinets is live.

6

5

4

This procedure applies during maintenance after a manual shut off of the unscramler rollers and the elevator column/hopper assembly, see procedure "BCU-010. PROCEDURE 1-008520-03-xx.svg

1- Close the safety doors. The hopper is equipped with a type (A) or type (B) electrical cabinet, depending on the machine model. 2- Close the doors to the electrical cabinet (3) for the hopper *2.

A

3

2

1

The "Q1XA" circuit breaker (1) in the hopper electrical cainet (3) is powered from the "Q1KA" circuit breaker (4) in the unscrambler roller assembly electrical cabinet (6). 3- Position the "Q1XA" circuit breaker (1) in the hopper electrical cabinet (3) to position "I".

© SIDEL

1-008518-04-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

2

Turning on the preform feeder

4- Close the doors to the unscrambler roller assembly electrical cabinet (6). 5- Position the "Q1KA" circuit breaker (4) in the unscrambler roller electrical cabinet (6) to position "I".

B

BCU-003 3

1

2

2/2

7

The power-on lamps (2 ; 5) light up. The remote modules in the plc and the cooling system for the cabinets are under power. 6- For a type (B) electrical cabinet, press the hopper start button (7). The button (7) lights up. The hopper and elevator column assembly is ready for operation. If there is an intermediate conveyor (optional), it is started by pressing the button (7).

1-008516-03-xx.svg

BEFORE YOU FINISH 7- Acknowledge the faults at the PCC.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

BCU-004

Turning on the PCC

2

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit procedure "BCU-001 . - main electrical circuit procedure "BCU-002.

under under

power,

see

power,

see

PROCEDURE 1- Open the door (1) on the control station. 1-006030-14-xx.svg

2- Turn the switch (2) on the PCC to "ON". 3- Close the door (1) on the control station.

1

2 1-006476-01-xx.svg

4- Open the door (3) on the control station.

3

© SIDEL

5

1-006278-05-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

2

Turning on the PCC

BCU-004

2/2

5- Press button (5).

The UPS (4) is now under power. The PCC and "WINDOWS" start up. The PCC application starts. The (A) window appears.

4

5

1-006333-01-xx.svg

F Wait a few seconds. The "Welcome" family page appears.

A

BEFORE YOU FINISH 6- Close the door (3) on the control station.

The procedure is now complete.

1-006403-11-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

© SIDEL

1-010388-01-02.svg

Part B 1/4

BCU-005

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

Turning on the machine utilities

2

GENERAL INFORMATION For further information on the fluid circuits and their corresponding valves, see the User Manual. Depending on the machine configuration, the external hydraulic module can be integrated in the thermoregulator or independent. For more information on how the thermoregulator works, consult the technical documentation delivered with this equipment.. The number of external hydraulc modules varies according to the production set-up.

1-006030-118-xx.svg

Thermoregulators installed upstream from the machine provide thermal conditioning of the fluids that circulate in the blow wheel.. For more information on how the thermoregulator works, consult the technical documentation delivered with this equipment.. Never attempt to operate the machine without water in the hydraulic circuits.

1

2

PROCEDURE External hydraulic module 1- Open the doors of the external hydraulic module.. During production, only one valve (1) must be open. 2- Open the valves (1 ; 2). 3- Start the related thermoregulator(s).. Hydraulic interface panel 4- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine.

© SIDEL

1-007969-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

2

Turning on the machine utilities

F Make sure that the valves (3 ; 4) are closed. - If the drain valves (3) are open. · Fill the hydraulic lines, see procedure "BDM-043. - If the drain valves (4) are open. · Fill the hydraulic lines, see procedure "BDM-075. 5- Open the valves (5).

5

Part B BCU-005

2/4

6

4 3

1-007351-10-xx.svg

Open the valves (6). Start the related thermoregulator(s).. Open the valve (7). Open the valves (8).

7

8 1-007485-04-xx.svg

© SIDEL

6789-

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 3/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

BCU-005

Turning on the machine utilities

2

High pressure air circuit 10- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 11- Unpadlock the valve (9). 12- Gently open the valve (9).

The pressure in the circuit rises and then stabilizes. F Check the pressure before regulation at the gauge (10). F Check the pressure after regulation at the gauge (11). - If the pressure is not correct. · Set the blowing pressure to , see procedure "BPU-002. Any intervention on the high pressure circuit is no longer secured.

11

9 10

1-007859-09-xx.svg

Low pressure air circuit 13- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine.

14

Open the high pressure air supply. 14- Unpadlock the valve (14). 15- Gently open the valve (14).

The pressure in the circuit rises and then stabilizes. F Check the pressure before regulation at the gauge (15). F Check the pressure after regulation at the gauge (16). - If the pressure is not correct. · Adjust the service pressure, see procedure "BCU-018. BEFORE YOU FINISH 16- Close the external hydraulic module doors. 17- Close the safety doors.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

15

16 1-006273-09-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

Turning on the machine utilities

BCU-005

4/4

© SIDEL

2

Part B

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

BCU-006

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

Running the machine in "Automatic" mode

2

GENERAL INFORMATION During a production cycle, do not press the key (3) (except in emergencies). In this case, the machine will stop automatically with the preforms still in the oven and articles being blown. Clearing these items will be difficult and will complicate the restart of production. MACHINE STATUS - machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001, - the appropriate production recipe has been loaded into the machine, see procedure "BPU-005.

1-006030-14-xx.svg

PROCEDURE

F Check that all of the options physically present on the machine have been activated in the PCC application as per your machine configuration.

1

For further information, please refer to chapter "Option selection", in the User manual. 1- Close the safety doors.

F Check that there are no faults. F Check the output rate value (1), see procedure "BPU-004. 2- Select "Automatic" mode for the blowing machine, using the key (2). "Automatic" mode is reserved for starting machine production. For further information, please refer to chapter ""Automatic" mode", in the User manual. 3- Select "Automatic" mode for the preform feeder, see procedure "BCU-019.

3

2

Manual and Automatic modes for the feeder are independent from the Manual and Automatic modes on the blowing machine.

1-006403-01-02.svg

If there is a fault on the count sensor "D5", the preform feeder can be operated in Manual mode, see procedure "BCU-034. 4- Press key (3) for 2 seconds.

The alarm will sound until the button (3) changes status. 5- Release the button (3). The brake opens and the machine begins to turn. 6- Press the (4) key. When the temperature limit has been reached, preforms will begin to feed into the machine. Bottle production begins.

3

© SIDEL

During production, the (4) key allows preform feeding to be suspended without stopping the machine.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

5

4 1-006706-03-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

2

Running the machine in "Automatic" mode

Part B BCU-006

2/2

BEFORE YOU FINISH The machine is in production cycle. 7- Press the key (5) to stop production.

© SIDEL

The machine will clear all preforms and bottles. The machine stops but the oven ventilation system will continue for another 2 minutes. The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

BCU-008

Turning off the utility supplies to the machine

2

GENERAL INFORMATION For further information on the fluid circuits and their corresponding valves, see the User Manual. Depending on the machine configuration, the external hydraulic module can be integrated in the thermoregulator or independent. For more information on how the thermoregulator works, consult the technical documentation delivered with this equipment.. The number of external hydraulc modules varies according to the production set-up.

1-006030-118-xx.svg

Thermoregulators installed upstream from the machine provide thermal conditioning of the fluids that circulate in the blow wheel.. For more information on how the thermoregulator works, consult the technical documentation delivered with this equipment.. Never attempt to operate the machine without water in the hydraulic circuits.

1

2

Intervention on hot hydraulic circuits : Please read carefully all the safety instructions before carrying out any works on the hot hydraulic systems. Wear safety equipment for body, hands and face. Hot metal, risk of burns. MACHINE STATUS - the machine is stopped, see procedure "BCU-006. PROCEDURE

© SIDEL

External hydraulic module 1- Stop the thermoregulator(s). 2- Open the doors of the external hydraulic module.. 3- Close the inlet valves (1). 4- Close the return valve (2). Hydraulic interface panel 5- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-007969-01-xx.svg

Part B

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

2

Turning off the utility supplies to the machine

6- Stop the thermoregulator(s). 7- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 8- Close the inlet valves (3). 9- Close the outlet valves (4). 10- Close the inlet valve (5). 11- Close the return valve (6).

BCU-008

3

4

5

6

1-007351-11-xx.svg

High pressure air circuit 12- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 13- Close the valve (7).

The high pressure air system is now isolated. The high pressure air system has now been purged. F Control the absence of pressure on the pressure gauges (8). F Control the absence of pressure on the pressure gauges (9). 14- Lock out the valve (7).

2/4

9

7 8

1-007859-10-xx.svg

Low pressure air circuit 15- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 16- Close the valve (10).

Publication date : 13/11/2009

11

12 1-006273-10-xx.svg

© SIDEL

The low pressure air system is now isolated. The low pressure air system has now been purged. F Control the absence of pressure on the pressure gauges (11). F Control the absence of pressure on the pressure gauges (12). 17- Lock out the valve (10).

10

Part B 3/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

BCU-008

Turning off the utility supplies to the machine

BEFORE YOU FINISH 18- Close the external hydraulic module doors. 19- Close the safety doors.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

Turning off the utility supplies to the machine

BCU-008

4/4

© SIDEL

2

Part B

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

BCU-009

Turning off the PCC

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Exit the PCC application before turning off the PCC in order to avoid any malfunctions on the PCC application. MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit procedure "BCU-001. - main electrical circuit procedure "BCU-002.

under under

power,

see

power,

see 1-006030-14-xx.svg

PROCEDURE 1- Press the (1) key.

1

The (A) window appears. 2- Press the (2) key. The PCC application shuts down.

1-006403-09-02.svg

3- Shut down the PCC from the "Windows" start menu.

A

F Wait for the PCC to shut down.

2

© SIDEL

1-006102-01-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

2

Turning off the PCC

Part B BCU-009

2/4

4- Open the door (3) on the control station. 5- Turn off the UPS (4) by pressing the button (5). To reach the switch (6) for the PCC open the door (7) to the control panel. 6- If required turn the PCC switch (6) to "OFF".

3

1-006278-03-xx.svg

BEFORE YOU FINISH 7- Close the door (3) on the control station.

The procedure is now complete.

4

5

© SIDEL

1-006333-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 3/4

BCU-009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

Turning off the PCC

2

7

6

© SIDEL

1-006476-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

Turning off the PCC

BCU-009

4/4

© SIDEL

2

Part B

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

BCU-010

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

Turning off the preform feeder

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Access to electrical areas is restricted to qualified and authorized personnel only.

2

Power is supplied to the preform feeder through the peripheral equipment circuit breaker "Q47A" located in the main electrical cabinet . Isolating the main machine power circuit at the main "Q1" circuit breaker cuts the power supply to the prefrom feeder, see procedure "BCU-011.

10

5

If "Q1KA" (4) is open and "Q1" (main electrical cabinet) is closed, the "X1" terminal *6 and the orange wiring in the preform distributer electrical cabinets are still live.

1-006030-124-xx.svg

The aspiration system electrical cabinet (10) is present depending on the model and the machine configuration PROCEDURE 1- Set the "Q69LD" circuit breaker (9) in the aspiration system cabinet (10) to position "0".

11

10

The lamp (11) goes out. The aspirators stop.

The hopper is equipped with a type (A) or type (B) electrical cabinet, depending on the machine model.

9

1-008830-06-xx.svg

The "Q1KA" circuit breaker (4) in the unscrambler roller electrical cabinet (5) also isolates the hopper electrical cabinet (2).

A

2

3

1

2- For a type (B) electrical cabinet, press the hopper stop button (7).

The light on the hopper start button (8) goes out.

© SIDEL

1-008518-05-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

2

Turning off the preform feeder

3- Position the "Q1XA" circuit breaker (1) in the hopper electrical cabinet (2) to position "0".

BCU-010 2

B

1

3

2/2

8

7

The lamp (3) goes out. The plc and the cabinet cooling remote modules (2) are switched off.

1-008516-04-xx.svg

4- Position the "Q1KA" circuit breaker (4) in the unscrambler roller electrical cabinet (5) to position "0".

5

4

6

The lamp (6) goes out. The plc and the cabinet cooling remote modules (5) are switched off.

BEFORE YOU FINISH 5- Acknowledge the faults at the PCC.

The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-008520-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

BCU-011

Turning off the main machine circuit

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Access to electrical areas is restricted to qualified and authorized personnel only. When the main circuit breaker (4) is open, the primary electrical circuit is still live. see procedure "BCU-012.

1-006030-13-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS - the machine is stopped, see procedure "BCU-006. - PCC switched off, see procedure "BCU-009.

4

PROCEDURE

2

1- Press button (1).

The lamp in the button (2) goes out. 2- Turn the key on the general switch (3) to "0". 3- Open the main circuit breaker Q1 (4). The power lamp (5) goes out. The machine and preform feeder primary circuit is now isolated.

5 1

BEFORE YOU FINISH 4- Lock out the main switch (4).

The procedure is now complete.

3

© SIDEL

1-006263-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

Turning off the main machine circuit

BCU-011

2/2

© SIDEL

2

Part B

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

BCU-012

Isolating the machine

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Access to electrical areas is restricted to qualified and authorized personnel only. The PLC is designed to cope with power failures, however SIDEL recommends that you follow the procedure below.

1-006030-13-xx.svg

Circuit breaker

3

Q1A

Up-circuit transformer 230 V and cabinet cooling protection

Q1B

Protection for the on-board component

Q1C

24 Vcc 40 A supply protection

Q1D

24 Vcc 20 A supply protection

Q1E

24 Vcc poles protection

6

Q1F

24 V input/ouput protection

Q1G

230 V transformer up-circuit protection

Q1H

230 V transformer down-circuit protection

Q1AD

24 V connection protection

Q109A

Lighting protection

Q13AA

Cabinet cooling system protection

5

4

MACHINE STATUS - the machine is stopped, see procedure "BCU-006. 1-007067-04-xx.svg

© SIDEL

PROCEDURE

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

2

Isolating the machine

Part B BCU-012

2/2

1- Turn off the utility supplies to the machine, see procedure "BCU-008. 2- Turn off the preform feeder, see procedure "BCU-010. 3- Turn off the PCC, see procedure "BCU-009. 4- Isolate the main machine power circuit, see procedure "BCU-011. 5- Open the doors to the main electrical cabinet . When a battery is flat, the red lamp "BAF" (3) on the corresponding power module will light up, indicating a battery fault. If any one of the batteries is faulty, SIDEL recommends that you replace all of the batteries, see procedure "BDE-001. 6- Set the main switch (4) to "STOP". 7- Set the power module (6) standby switch (5) to position "OFF". 8- Open the circuit breakers (1) on the primary circuit.

1

1-008633-01-xx.svg

9- Open the isolating switch "Q1A" (2).

The primary electrical circuit is now isolated. The plc, the UPS and the cabinet cooling system are now switched off.

1

BEFORE YOU FINISH 10- Close the door to the electrical cabinet.

The procedure is now complete.

2

1-008533-02-xx.svg

1-008521-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

© SIDEL

2

Part B 1/4

BCU-013

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

Using the JOG system

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Never rotate the blow wheel by pushing or pulling it. To activate the JOG mode, the JOG unit (1) must be connected to the stowage zone "Z0" at the control station (2). Activating the JOG mode will automatically block use of the manual rotation system, see procedure "BCU-014. A thermal safety device prevents misuse of the JOG.

1-006030-14-xx.svg

MAchine production cannot be restarted until the JOG mode has been disactivated. MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

1 2

PROCEDURE 1-006266-01-xx.svg

1- Close the safety doors.

F Make sure that there are no current faults on the band (A) at the PCC. · If necessary, reset fault on the PCC. see procedure "BCU-026, 2- Connect the JOG unit (1) to the stowage zone "Z0" at the control station (2). 3- Press the (3) key. The "Settings" family appears. 4- Press the (4) key. The (B) window appears.

© SIDEL

1-006265-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

2

Using the JOG system

BCU-013

5- Press the (5) key.

The secure low pressure air system of the machine is supplied. The nozzle and stretch cylinders are in raised position and do not inhibit the rotation of the machine.. F Check whether the operation requires the activation of the low pressure air system. - If yes. · Go to the next step. - If not. · Press the (5) key. The secure low pressure air system of the machine is no longer supplied. 6- Disconnect the JOG. 7- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. Only the doors in the relevant zone may be opened without causing the machine to stop. 8- Connct the JOG unit (1) to the socket corresponding to the work zone on the machine. 9- Depress the button (6) (and keep it pressed in).

The brake opens and the machine begins to turn.

2/4

A

3 1-006403-10-02.svg

9

The button (7) is a secure stop button, it functions in the same way as the door open safety features. The button (7) can be held in stop position. 10- Release the button (6).

The machine stops and the brake engages. The machine is in the desired position.

4 1-010353-03-02.svg

11- Repeat steps 9 to 10 . to set the machine to the required positions.

B

5

8

BEFORE YOU FINISH 12- Disconnect the JOG. 13- Close the safety doors.

© SIDEL

1-010349-02-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 3/4

BCU-013

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

Using the JOG system

14- Connect the JOG unit (1) to the stowage zone "Z0" at the control station (2).

2 6

7

F If necessary, press button (5) to deactivate the supply of the secure low pressure air system. 15- Press the (8) key. The window (B) disappears from the screen. 16- Press the (9) key. The "Welcome" family page appears. The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-006268-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

Using the JOG system

BCU-013

4/4

© SIDEL

2

Part B

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

BCU-014

Using manual rotation

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Before rotating the machine, always make sure that there are no personnel located at positions not visible from the cranking point. For interventions involving 2 technicians and using the manual rotation system, the 2 technicians must communicate clearly with each other to coordinate their actions during any procedures. Never rotate the blow wheel by pushing or pulling it. 1-006030-17-xx.svg

When rotating manually, always turn the machine in the normal direction of production (except when following specific SIDEL instructions).

1

Never rotate the machine by more than half a complete revolution in the opposite direction to normal production. MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - JOG not in service, see procedure "BCU-013, - manual rotation unrestricted. see procedure "BSU-002, - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

1-010353-04-02.svg

PROCEDURE Raising the nozzle and stretching cylinders 1- Press the (1) key.

The (A) window appears. 2- Press the (2) key. The secure low pressure air system of the machine is supplied. The nozzle and stretch cylinders stop in raised position. 3- Press the (2) key. The secure low pressure air system of the machine is no longer supplied. 4- Close the window(s) and return to the "Welcome" family. Using manual rotation

A

2

Never use a crank other than the one fitted on the machine safety system. © SIDEL

1-010342-02-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

2

Using manual rotation

BCU-014

2/2

Comply with the procedure that requires manual rotation to select the electric circuits that must be shutdown. 5- If need be, shutdown: the PCC, the main electric circuit and the upstream electric circuit, see procedure "BCU-004, see procedure "BCU-002, see procedure "BCU-001. 6- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine.

F Make sure that the stretching and nozzle cylinders are in the raised position. 7- Remove the crank (4) from the safety system (5). Removing the crank (4) from the safety system (5) will be detected by the sensor "B12.5" which will prevent the machine from operating automatically. Depending on the model, the machine is equipped with either a type "A" or type "B" crank. 8- Engage the hand crank (4) on the motor shaft . 9- Depress the button (3) (and keep it pressed in).

A

5

4

3

5

4

The blow wheel brake is open.

10- Turn the hand crank (4) until you reach the required position. Steps 9 and 10 are carried out simultaneously by the same technician. BEFORE YOU FINISH 1-006603-08-xx.svg

11- Release the button (3).

The blow wheel brake is closed.

12- Remove the hand crank (4). 13- Stow the crank (4) back on its safety system (5).

B

3

4

5

4

If the crank (4) is not correctly positioned on the safety system (5) the machine will not operate automatically. 14- Close the safety doors.

The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-006908-09-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

BCU-015

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

Running the machine in "Manual" mode

3

GENERAL INFORMATION "Manual" mode is reserved for production trials and when setting up the machine. MACHINE STATUS - machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001, - the appropriate production recipe has been loaded into the machine, see procedure "BPU-005. PROCEDURE 1-006030-14-xx.svg

F Check that all of the options physically present on the machine have been activated in the PCC application as per your machine configuration.

A

For further information, please refer to chapter "Option selection", in the User manual. 1- Close the safety doors.

F Check that the setpoint values (A) are coherent. · If the values do not correspond to those in the production set-up, modify them. 2- Select Manual mode on the blowing machine using the key (2). 3- Select "Automatic" mode for the preform feeder, see procedure "BCU-019. Manual and Automatic modes for the feeder are independent from the Manual and Automatic modes on the blowing machine. 2

If there is a fault on the count sensor "D5", the preform feeder can be operated in Manual mode, see procedure "BCU-034.

1-006403-12-02.svg

4- Press key (3) for 2 seconds. 567-

8-

3

© SIDEL

9-

The alarm will sound until the button (3) changes status. Release the button (3). The brake opens and the machine begins to turn. Press the (4) key. Oven heating and cooling start. Press the (5) key. The stretching/preblowing/blowing operations are ready for operation. Press the (6) key. The preform feeder is operating. Press the (7) key. The key (7) will flash until the oven has reached the required temperature for preform feeding to begin. When the temperature limit has been reached, preforms will begin to feed into the machine. Bottle production trials begin.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

4

5

6

7 1-006707-02-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

3

Running the machine in "Manual" mode

Part B BCU-015

2/2

BEFORE YOU FINISH During a production cycle, do not press the key (3) (except in emergencies). In this case, the machine will stop automatically with the preforms still in the oven and articles being blown. Clearing these items will be difficult and will complicate the restart of production. 10- Press the (7) key.

Preform feeding stops.

11- Press the (6) key.

The preform feeder stops. Wait for the last bottle to exit the machine.

12- Press the (3) key.

© SIDEL

The machine stops but the oven ventilation system will continue for another 2 minutes. The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

BCU-016

Inspecting the preforms on delivery

2

GENERAL INFORMATION The testing procedure will be carried out by the quality control laboratory according to the regulations in place in the production facility. Chemical tests must be carried out on each batch of preforms delivered. When handling preforms, hands must be washed and disinfected and gloves worn. The sample preforms testing.

must be disposed of after 1-006757-01-xx.svg

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - Clean, dry cloths, - latex gloves. Specific tools - box cutter, (solid non-slap blade). PROCEDURE Inspecting the storage area

F Inspect the cleanness of the storage area. F Make sure that the storage area is well ventilated and that the temperature and the hygrometry are monitored (only small variations). F Make sure that the storage area is sealed against the entry of moisture, insects and other nuisances. Inspecting the packaging Only open boxes near the preform hopper. Always wear latex gloves when handling the packaging or its contents.

© SIDEL

F Make sure that the description on the label corresponds to the references on the purchase order. F Check the general appearance of the box, looking especially for damage, tears or traces of external moisture. F Check that the plastic bag containing the preforms is inside a clean, sealed cardboard box and does not show any signs of moisture or mould. F Check that the preforms have been supplied in a complete, clean, dry, airtight plastic bag. F Make sure that the plastic bag does not contain any foreign objects such as insects, preform debris or other items. Visual inspection of the preforms Wear latex gloves.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

2

Inspecting the preforms on delivery

Part B BCU-016

2/2

1- Take out 10 preforms.

F Check that the preforms correspond to the contractual drawings and dimensions. F Make sure that the preforms do not have any kind of deformity (curved, oval, stuck together etc.). F Make sure there are no scratches, grooves, traces of impact or sticking. F Check the appearance of the seal plane (thickness, no displacement). F Check that the injection points are small, salient and free from burring. F Make sure that the thread on the neck has been correctly injected and is fully formed. F Make sure that the rim is perfectly smooth and flat. Checking for preform contamination Wear latex gloves. 2- Take out 10 preforms.

F Check the microbe load in the preforms. F Make sure that there are no traces of chemical products. Inspections during loading F When loading preforms, make sure that the packaging has been opened cleanly (using a box cutter will prevent the creation of packaging particles). F Make sure that there are no foreign objects in the packaging. 3- Discard any preforms that fall from the production line or that have been handled. BEFORE YOU FINISH Corrective measures

© SIDEL

F Check the other boxes in the batch. 4- Remove any container which does not pass the inspection procedures indicated above. 5- Contact the supplier following the contractual quality control procedure. The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

BCU-017

Clearing preforms from the feeder

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Always empty the hopper before clearing the unscrambler rollers. The buttons (17 ; 18) located on the unscrambler roller unit frame have the same function ast the "Preform elevator start/stop" key (16) on the lower display bar of the PCC.

1-006030-59-xx.svg

The PCC screen display(s) may differ depending on the model and the configuration of the machine. MACHINE STATUS

18

17

Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005. 1-006375-08-xx.svg

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables None Specific tools - mobile external conveyor (option), - drain pan. PROCEDURE 1- Position the external mobile conveyor (1) (option) or the recycle bin under the clearance gate (2) of the hopper (3). 1

© SIDEL

1-006636-00-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

2

Clearing preforms from the feeder

2- Pull the handle (4) to unlock the clearance gate (2) on the hopper (3). 3- Raise the clearance gate (2) of the hopper (3). 4- Pull back the holding pin (19) and position the hole on the locking rod (20) in line with the axis of the pin (19). 5- Release the pin (19).

The clearance gate (2) is blocked in the raised position. 6- If an external mobile conveyor is positioned under the hopper clearance chute. · Position the bin under the external mobile conveyor (1) (option). · Start the external mobile conveyor (1) (option), refer to the technical documentation supplied with the conveyor. 7- Press the (5) key. The "Feeder" family appears. 8- Press the (6) key. The (A) window appears. Empty the hopper 9- Press the (7) key. Clearance by the hopper is confirmed. 10- Enter a setpoint value of 30 % using the key (8). 11- Press the (11) key. 12- If the application PCC is in "Automatic" mode, press key (15). The application PCC is now in "Manual" mode.

BCU-017 19

2/4

20

3 2

4

1-010331-01-xx.svg

5

15

6

1-008464-05-02.svg

13- Press the key (16).

16

The hopper begins its emptying cycle. F Wait until the hopper is empty.

© SIDEL

1-006704-05-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 3/4

BCU-017

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

Clearing preforms from the feeder

Emptying the unscrambler rollers 14- Press the (9) key.

2 7

A

Clearance by the unscrambler rollers is confirmed. 15- Enter a setpoint value of 30 % using the key (10). 16- Press the (12) key. The elevator column and the unscrambler rollers begin their clearance cycles. F Wait until the elevator column and the rollers are clear of preforms. 17- Press keys (11 ; 12). The conveyor belts on the preforms feeder stop. 18- If an external mobile conveyor is positioned under the hopper clearance chute. · Stop the external mobile conveyor (1) (option). Clearing the infeed rail 19- Position the collecting bin under the infeed rail. 20- Slightly loosen the grip-nut (13). 21- Slide the guide rail (14). 22- Remove the preforms from the infeed rail and from below the infeed rail. 23- Position the guide rail (14). 24- Tighten the grip-nut (13).

11

BEFORE YOU FINISH

8

9

12

10 1-007478-05-02.svg

13

14

25- Press the (16) key.

© SIDEL

The preform feeder stops. 26- Press keys (7 ; 9). 27- Remove any preforms which have remained in the system (chutes, hopper, conveyor belts etc.). 28- Close the window(s) and return to the "Welcome" family. 29- Remove the external mobile conveyor (1) (option). 30- Pull back the pin (19) and hold the clearance gate (2) of the hopper (3). 31- Release the pin (19). 32- Lower the clearance gate (2) until the locking handle engages (4). 33- Remove the collecting bin from beneath the infeed rail. The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-006271-02-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

Clearing preforms from the feeder

BCU-017

4/4

© SIDEL

2

Part B

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

BCU-018

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

Setting the pressure on the low pressure air system

1

GENERAL INFORMATION Normal operation of the stationary part of the machine requires a pressure of 7 bar. The braking system is designed to operate at 7 bar. Below this level it will not function in the same way. The pressure value for the low pressure circuit (A) is indicated in the "Wheel" family. MACHINE STATUS - machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001. 1-006030-04-xx.svg

PROCEDURE 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine.

F Check the pressure at the gauge (1). 2- Lift the button (2). The button (2) is released. 3- Turn the button (2) until you reach the required pressure. The pressure gauge (3) indicates the pressure in the circuit. 4- Lower the button (2). The button (2) is locked. 5- Close the safety doors.

A

© SIDEL

1-010358-02-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

1

Setting the pressure on the low pressure air system

BEFORE YOU FINISH

BCU-018

2/2

2

F Check the operating pressure. · Reset the operating pressure level if required. The procedure is now complete.

1

3

© SIDEL

1-006273-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

BCU-019

Operating the feeder in Automatic mode

3

GENERAL INFORMATION Manual and Automatic modes for the feeder are independent from the Manual and Automatic modes on the blowing machine. Automatic mode on the preform feeder is the normal operating mode. Automatic mode on the feeder allows the speed on the elevator column to auto-adapt. For more information on the preform feeder auto-adapt function, see procedure "BPU-003. The PCC screen display(s) may differ depending on the model and the configuration of the machine. MACHINE STATUS

1-006030-14-xx.svg

1

2

- machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001, - the appropriate production recipe has been loaded into the machine, see procedure "BPU-005. PROCEDURE

F Check that all of the options physically present on the machine have been activated in the PCC application as per your machine configuration. For further information, please refer to chapter ""Options" family" chapter in the User manual. 1- Press the (1) key.

The "Feeder" family appears.

2- Select Automatic mode on the preform feeder, using the key (2).

F Check the start setpoint values produced by the production recipe loaded. 3- If necessary, search for the preform feeder start instructions in Auutomatic mode, see procedure "BPU-017. 4- Start the machine cycle, see procedure "BCU-006 or see procedure "BCU-015. The plc pilots the preform feeder with the start instruction setpoint for the elevator column, which results from the auto-adapt calculation. BEFORE YOU FINISH 5- Stop the machine, see procedure "BCU-006 or see procedure "BCU-015.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-008464-13-02.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

Operating the feeder in Automatic mode

BCU-019

2/2

© SIDEL

3

Part B

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/4

BCU-020

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

Resynchronizing after a torque limiter has tripped

GENERAL INFORMATION

2

Never rotate the blow wheel by pushing or pulling it.

1

2

3

5

Apply the procedure relevant to the tripped torque limiter. If there is a preform decontamination module (option according to the model), the torque limiter (6) is fitted on the machine.

6

1-007205-07-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005, - JOG not in service, see procedure "BCU-013.

1

PROCEDURE

1-006344-01-xx.svg

Drive system (1) torque limiter 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Reset the the torque limiter (1) using the manual rotation system, see procedure "BCU-014. 3- Press button (4).

The alarm message corresponding to the fault disappears from the message band (A) on the PCC. Infeed wheel torque limiter (2)

A

4

© SIDEL

1-006403-13-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

2

Resynchronizing after a torque limiter has tripped

4- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 5- Remove any preforms or bottles which may be obstructing the rotation of the machine. 6- Reset the torque limiter (2) by manually turning the infeed wheel in the normal direction of operation. 7- Press button (4).

Part B BCU-020

2/4

2

The alarm message corresponding to the fault disappears from the message band (A) on the PCC. 40 mm-pitch oven wheel drive shaft torque limiter (3) 8- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 9- Remove any preforms or bottles which may be obstructing the rotation of the machine.

1-006345-01-xx.svg

Never turn the blow wheel backwards by more than half a complete revolution (risk of mechanical damage). For the 40 mm pitch oven, restarting in the normal direction will not re-synchronize. The non-synchronized message displays at the PCC. The machine cannot restart. For further information, please refer to chapter "Transmission" chapter in the User manual. 10- Reset the torque limiter (3) by turning the blow wheel backwards using the manual rotation system, see procedure "BCU-014. 11- Press button (4).

The alarm message corresponding to the fault disappears from the message band (A) on the PCC. 50 mm-pitch oven wheel drive shaft torque limiter (3) 12- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 13- Remove any preforms or bottles which may be obstructing the rotation of the machine. 14- Reset the the torque limiter (3) using the manual rotation system, see procedure "BCU-014. 15- Press button (4). The alarm message corresponding to the fault disappears from the message band (A) on the PCC. Bottle outfeed wheel torque limiter (5) 16- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 17- Remove any preforms or bottles which may be obstructing the rotation of the machine. 18- Reset the torque limiter (5) by manually turning the blow wheel in the normal direction of production. 19- Press button (4). The alarm message corresponding to the fault disappears from the message band (A) on the PCC.

3

1-006346-01-xx.svg

1-006583-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

© SIDEL

5

Part B 3/4

BCU-020

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

Resynchronizing after a torque limiter has tripped

BEFORE YOU FINISH 20- Check the synchronization of the machine before starting production, see procedure "BNM-012. 21- Close the safety doors.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

Resynchronizing after a torque limiter has tripped

BCU-020

4/4

© SIDEL

2

Part B

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

BCU-021

User management

3

GENERAL INFORMATION Each user level must include at least 1 user. The "User management" window allows the administrator to: - display user accounts, their levels and their passwords, - modify user levels and their passwords, - create and delete user accounts. 1-006030-14-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS - machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001, - PCC application connected in the name administrator, see procedure "BCU-024.

of

an

PROCEDURE 1- Press the (1) key.

The "Options" family appears. 2- Press the (2) key. The (A) window appears. 3- Press the (3) key. The (B) window appears. Creating a new user account 4- Press the (4) key. The (C) window appears.

1

2 1-007626-02-02.svg

5- press on the window (5). 6789-

The keyboard appears. Key in the name of the user using the keyboard, then confirm. press on the window (6). The keyboard appears. Key in the password using the keyboard, then confirm. press on the window (7). The keyboard appears.

A 3

© SIDEL

If the entries into the password fields (6 ; 7) are not the same the password will not be accepted.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-010389-02-02.svg

Part B

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

3

User management

10- Key in again the password using the keyboard, then confirm. 11- Authorize or not a user to modify their password using the key (8). 12- Authorize or not the automatic delogin of a user account using the key (9). 13- Define the level of a user using the keys (10). 14- Press the (11) key.

The new account has now been created. The window (C) disappears from the screen. Modify an existing user account 15- Press on the user name. The (D) window appears. Modify the password and the automatic delogin 16- press on the window (12). The keyboard appears. 17- Key in the new password using the ketyboard, then confirm. 18- press on the window (13). The keyboard appears.

BCU-021

2/2

B

4

1-010385-02-02.svg

C

5

6

7

8

If the entries into the password fields (12 ; 13) are not the same the password will not be accepted. 19- Key in again the password using the keyboard, then confirm. 20- Authorize or not a user to modify their password using the key (14). 21- Authorize or not the automatic delogin of a user account using the key (15). Modify the level of a user 22- Define the level of a user using the keys (16). 23- Press the (17) key.

The modifcations have now been saved. The window (D) disappears from the screen. Delete a user account 24- Press on the user name. The (D) window appears. 25- Press the (18) key. The user account has been deleted. The window (D) disappears from the screen.

9

10

11 1-006561-01-02.svg

D

12

18

BEFORE YOU FINISH 26- If necessary, close the session to prohibit access to nonadministrator users.

The procedure is now complete.

13

14

15

16

17

© SIDEL

1-006562-01-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

BCU-022

Alarm configuration

3

GENERAL INFORMATION Pressing the key (1) will increment the corresponding alarm level. The keys (2 ; 3 ; 4) select the alarm tone associated with the corresponding "Information" alarm: - (2) no alarm tone. - (3) alarm tone for 8 s. - (4) continuous alarm tone. 1-006030-14-xx.svg

For further information, please refer to chapter ""Alarms" family" chapter in the User manual.

7

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004.

see see

PROCEDURE

8

A

2

3

4

1 1-008989-02-02.svg

1- Press the (5) key. 23-

F 45-

The "Alarms" family appears. Press the (6) key. The (A) window appears. Press the (7) key. The (A) window displays the top of the alarm list. Check the alarm configuration. If necessary, change the configuration of the alarms using the keys (1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4). Scroll down the list using the key (8).

BEFORE YOU FINISH 6- Repeat as above from stage 4 until you have completed the settings for all of the alarms.

The procedure is now complete.

5

6

© SIDEL

1-006948-02-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

Alarm configuration

BCU-022

2/2

© SIDEL

3

Part B

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

BCU-023

Acknowledging "information" and "alert" alarms

2

GENERAL INFORMATION For more details on the definitions for the "Critical" and "Alert" alarms and critical and progessive shutdowns which result from them, please refer to chapter ""Alarms" family", in the User manual. MACHINE STATUS - machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001. PROCEDURE 1-006030-14-xx.svg

1- If the application PCC is not at the "Welcome" family, press key (2) to identify the cause of the alarm.

2

3

The (A) window appears.

"Information" alarms

F Acknowledge the fault. 2- Press the acknowledge key (1). The messages on the scrolling band (3) in the window (A) disappear. "Alert" alarms F Acknowledge the fault. 3- Press the acknowledge key (1). The alarm siren and lamps will stop. The alarm remains on the display. F Correct the fault. 4- Press the acknowledge key (1). The key (2) returns to its original state. The messages on the scrolling band (3) in the window (A) disappear. 5- Press the (4) key. The machine starts.

4

1 1-006403-02-02.svg

BEFORE YOU FINISH 6- Close the window (A).

The procedure is now complete. A

© SIDEL

1-010017-03-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

Acknowledging "information" and "alert" alarms

BCU-023

2/2

© SIDEL

2

Part B

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

BCU-024

User login / logout

1

GENERAL INFORMATION Only authorized personnel are permitted to operate the machine.

1-006030-14-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS - machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001. PROCEDURE

1

1- Press the (1) key.

The (A) window appears.

2- press on the window (2). 34567-

The keyboard (B) appears. Enter the user name using the keyboard (B). Press the (3) key. press on the window (4). The keyboard (B) appears. Enter the password using the keyboard (B). Press the (3) key. 1-006077-10-02.svg

BEFORE YOU FINISH

2

A

8- Press the (5) key.

4

The start of the user shift has been confirmed. The procedure is now complete.

6

5

At the end of the shift press the key (6) to close the user session.

1-006563-01-02.svg

B

3

© SIDEL

1-006564-01-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

User login / logout

BCU-024

2/2

© SIDEL

1

Part B

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

BCU-025

Entering numerical values

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Values can be modifed using the numerical keypad. For entering or procedure "BCU-028.

modifying

a

date,

see

PROCEDURE 1

Minimum value selection key

2

Maximum value selection key

3

Key to delete value shown one figure at a time

4

Key to delete entire value shown

5

Key to display the last confirmed value

6

Key to confirm the value displayed and close the keypad

1- Press any key or display zone on the PCC.

The numerical keypad (A) appears.

The value entered must fall between the minimum (1) and maximum (3) values.

1-006030-14-xx.svg

A 1

2- Enter the required value through the keypad (A) or press keys (1) or (2) to select the minimum and maximum values. 3- Press the (6) key.

The value displayed is confirmed and the keypad disappears from the screen.

BEFORE YOU FINISH

© SIDEL

F Check the value shown on the PCC. The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

2 3 4 5 6

1-006398-04-02.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

Entering numerical values

BCU-025

2/2

© SIDEL

2

Part B

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

BCU-026

Acknowledging "critical" alarms

3

GENERAL INFORMATION For more details on the definitions for the "Critical" and "Alert" alarms and critical and progessive shutdowns which result from them, please refer to chapter ""Alarms" family", in the User manual. MACHINE STATUS - machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001. PROCEDURE 1-006030-14-xx.svg

1- If the application PCC is not at the "Welcome" family, press key (2) to identify the cause of the alarm.

2

3

The (A) window appears.

2- Press the acknowledge key (1).

F 3-

4-

5-

The alarm siren and lamps will stop. The alarm remains on the display. Correct the fault. Press the acknowledge key (1). The key (2) returns to its original state. The messages on the scrolling band (3) in the window (A) disappear. If the application PCC is in "Automatic" mode, press key (4). The application PCC is now in "Manual" mode. Press the (5) key. The machine starts. The bottles and preforms will be ejected from the transfer arms until the machine is completely clear.

F Check the meeting points and make sure that the machine is running correctly. - No incidents have been detected. · Press the (5) key. The machine stops.

5

4

1

1-006403-03-02.svg

A

BEFORE YOU FINISH 6- Start the machine cycle, see procedure "BCU-006.

The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-010017-03-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

Acknowledging "critical" alarms

BCU-026

2/2

© SIDEL

3

Part B

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

BCU-027

Configuring access to application functions

3

GENERAL INFORMATION Access to functions which change the status of the machine can only be set by a user with administratorlevel access. For further information, please refer to chapter "Operating levels" chapter in the User manual.

1-006030-14-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004.

see see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables None Specific tools - mouse with "USB" type connection.

1 1-006288-02-xx.svg

PROCEDURE 1- Open the cover flap (1) at the PCC. 2- Connect the mouse to the "USB" port on the front of the PCC. 3- Position the cursor over the button you wish to configure. 4- Right click on the mouse.

The pop-up menu (A) appears. 5- Modify the access level to this function as required. 6- Repeat as above from step 3 until you have completed all access configurations.

A

BEFORE YOU FINISH 7- Disconnect the moouse.

The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-007071-01-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

Configuring access to application functions

BCU-027

2/2

© SIDEL

3

Part B

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

BCU-028

Entering the date

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Dates can be entered and modified using the keyboard. For entering and modifyng numerical information, see procedure "BCU-028. PROCEDURE 1

Current date displayed in window (A)

2

Go to previous month

3

Go to previous year

4

Go to following year

5

Go to following month

6

Day selection keys

1-006030-14-xx.svg

1- Press any key or display zone on the PCC.

The (A) window appears.

2- Select the year using the keys (3 ; 4).

The calendar (B) updates. 3- Select the month using the keys (2 ; 5). The calendar (B) updates. 4- Select the day using the keys (6). The date has been modified and the window (A) disappears.

A

1

2

5

3

4

B

6

BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Check the date displayed at the PCC. The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-008213-01-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

Entering the date

BCU-028

2/2

© SIDEL

2

Part B

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

BCU-034

Operating the preform feeder in manual mode

3

GENERAL INFORMATION Manual and Automatic modes for the feeder are independent from the Manual and Automatic modes on the blowing machine. "Manual mode" is a downgraded operating mode for the preform feeder which allows production to continue when there is a fault at the "D5" count sensor. When "Manual" mode for the feeder has been selected, the automated regulation system (auto-adapt) is no longer in operation. The PCC screen display(s) may differ depending on the model and the configuration of the machine.

1-006030-14-xx.svg

1

2

MACHINE STATUS - machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001, - the appropriate production recipe has been loaded into the machine, see procedure "BPU-005. PROCEDURE

F Check that all of the options physically present on the machine have been activated in the PCC application as per your machine configuration. For further information, please refer to chapter ""Options" family" chapter in the User manual. 1- Press the (1) key.

The "Feeder" family appears. 2- Select Manual mode on the preform feeder using the key (2). F Check the start setpoint values produced by the production recipe loaded. 3- If necessary, search for the preform feeder start instruction setpoints in Manual mode, see procedure "BPU-017. For further information, please refer to chapter "Manual mode" chapter in the Preform Feeder family in the User manual. 4- Start the machine cycle, see procedure "BCU-006 or see procedure "BCU-015. BEFORE YOU FINISH Correct the sensor "D5" fault quickly in order to return to full Automatic mode operation, see procedure "BCU-019. 5- Stop the machine, see procedure "BCU-006 or see procedure "BCU-015. © SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-008848-08-02.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

Operating the preform feeder in manual mode

BCU-034

2/2

© SIDEL

3

Part B

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

BCU-036

Vision system, access to the blower

2

MACHINE STATUS - all machine power procedure "BCU-012.

and

utilities

turned

off,

see

PROCEDURE Opening the camera support

1-006030-18-xx.svg

1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Loosen the grip nut (1). 3- Tilt the locking handle (2). 4- Loosen the grip nut (3). 5- Rotate the support (4) and the table (5).

2

Rotate the support (4) and the table (5) with caution. Closing the camera support 6- Rotate the support (4) and the table (5) as far as they will go. 7- Tighten the grip-nut (1). 8- Tighten the grip-nut (3). 9- Tilt the locking handle (2). Removing the electrical unit

4

5 3

1

1-007490-01-xx.svg

10- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 11- Loosen the grip nut (6). 12- Slide the electrical unit (7) as far as it will go. Fitting the electrical unit 13- Slide the electrical unit (7) as far as it will go. 14- Tighten the grip-nut (6). BEFORE YOU FINISH 15- Close the safety doors.

The procedure is now complete. 7

6

© SIDEL

1-007442-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Operating procedure

Vision system, access to the blower

BCU-036

2/2

© SIDEL

2

Part B

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

User procedure Production process procedure

TABLE OF CONTENTS Setting points "P0" and "P10"

...................................................................................................................

BPU-001

Setting the blowing pressure

.....................................................................................................................

BPU-002

Auto-adapting the speed of the preform feeder

........................................................................................

BPU-003

Output rate setpoint

..................................................................................................................................

BPU-004

Recipe management

.................................................................................................................................

BPU-005

....................................................................................................................................

BPU-006

...................................................................................................................................................

BPU-007

Solenoid valve test Oven test

Preform feeder test

...................................................................................................................................

Setting the parameters of the process

......................................................................................................

Carrying out a trial on a new production process Mechanical settings for the lamps Setting the preblowing pressure

BPU-008 BPU-009

......................................................................................

BPU-010

.............................................................................................................

BPU-011

...............................................................................................................

BPU-012

Checking the preblow flow setting

............................................................................................................

BPU-013

Checking the feeder preform count

...........................................................................................................

Setting the parameters for the preform feeder cell-sensors Searching for preform feeder start-up setpoints

BPU-015

.......................................................................................

BPU-017

..........................................................................................

BPU-027

© SIDEL

Initializing the preform feeder production start

BPU-014

......................................................................

Publication date : 13/11/2009

B - 1/2

Part B

© SIDEL

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

B - 2/2

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/4

BPU-001

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

Setting points "P0" and "P10"

3

GENERAL INFORMATION In order to set points "P0" and "P10" the lower stretching thrusts must first be set, see procedure "BRM-009. This procedure requires the presence of 2 technicians: - The first technician rotates the machine using the manual rotation system, - the first technician activates and disactivates the controls at the PCC, - the second technician check the position of the roller (1) on the stretching cam (2).

1-006030-33-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS

1

- cold molds. Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005, - high pressure air circuit supply on, see procedure "BCU-005. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables None Specific tools - certified standard preforms for the type of production being carried out.

© SIDEL

PROCEDURE

Publication date : 13/11/2009

2 1-006511-01-xx.svg

Part B

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

3

Setting points "P0" and "P10"

à traduire 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Insert a preform into the grip corresponding to the selected mold. 3- Bring the roller (1) forward onto the horizontal part of the stretching cam (2) using the manual rotation system, see procedure "BCU-014. 4- Close the safety doors. 5- Press the (3) key.

BPU-001

2/4

3

The "Wheel" family appears. 6- Press the (4) key. The (A) window appears.

4 1-007565-04-02.svg

7- Press the (5) key.

A 5

1-007570-02-02.svg

6

8

7

B

9

10 1-007574-02-02.svg

© SIDEL

The (B) window appears. 8- Enter the number of the mold using the keys (6). 9- Press the (7) key. The low pressure air supply to the blowing station is now active. 10- Press the (8) key. The stretching cylinder is forced downwards. 11- Bring the roller (1) gently along the stretching cam (2) using the manual rotation system, see procedure "BCU-014. 12- As soon as the roller (1) is no longer in contact with the stretching cam (2) stop rotating the machine. The stretching rod has now reached the bottom of the preform, this is point "P0". 13- Press the (9) key. à traduire "P0". 14- Press the (8) key. The stretching cylinder * 1 stops at the up-position. à traduire 15- Bring the roller (1) forward onto the horizontal part of the stretching cam (2) using the manual rotation system, see procedure "BCU-014. The preform will be ejected at the bottle transfer.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 3/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

BPU-001

Setting points "P0" and "P10"

16- Press the (8) key.

The stretching cylinder is forced downwards. 17- Bring the roller (1) gently along the stretching cam (2) using the manual rotation system, see procedure "BCU-014. 18- As soon as the roller (1) is no longer in contact with the stretching cam (2) stop rotating the machine. à traduire.

3 2 1

1-006514-01-xx.svg

19- Press the (10) key.

à traduire "P10". 20- Press the (8) key. The stretching cylinder * 1 stops at the up-position. 21- Press the (7) key. The low pressure air supply to the blowing station is now cut off. BEFORE YOU FINISH 22- Close the window(s) and return to the "Welcome" family.

The procedure is now complete.

P0 P10

© SIDEL

1-006510-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

Setting points "P0" and "P10"

BPU-001

4/4

© SIDEL

3

Part B

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

BPU-002

Setting the blowing pressure

3

GENERAL INFORMATION The synoptic may differ depending on the machine model and its configuration but the setting procedure is always the same. MACHINE STATUS - machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001. PROCEDURE 1- Press the (1) key.

1-006030-14-xx.svg

The "Wheel" family appears. If necessary, press on button (2) to display the air synoptic (A).

2- Press the (3) key.

The numerical keypad appears. 3- Enter the required pressure and confirm. BEFORE YOU FINISH 4- Close the window(s) and return to the "Welcome" family.

The procedure is now complete.

1

3

2

A

© SIDEL

1-007507-02-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

Setting the blowing pressure

BPU-002

2/2

© SIDEL

3

Part B

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

BPU-003

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

Auto-adapting the speed of the preform feeder

3

GENERAL INFORMATION The auto-adapt system adjusts the speed of the elevator column located immediately upstream from the unscrambler rollers in order to achieve a continuous flow of preforms along the infeed rail and therefore not disrupting production. The auto-adapt function can be started when creating a new production set up, modifying the the output rate of the blowing machine or at any time during production. 1-006030-14-xx.svg

The procedure is carried out only in "Automatic" mode, from the "Feeder" family. The parameters determined by the auto-adaptation process are recorded in the production recipe if the operator saves the recipe, see procedure "BPU-005. The PCC screen display(s) may differ depending on the model and the configuration of the machine. MACHINE STATUS - machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001. PROCEDURE Before starting the auto-adapt cycle: - enter the preform feeder start-up setpoints, see procedure "BPU-017, - load the appropriate recipe into the application, see procedure "BPU-005, - enter the production rate setpoint, see procedure "BPU-004. The key (1) is characterised by a symbol "-" or "+" depending on whether the low or high speed has been selected. 1- Select the low speed for the elevator column, using the key(s) (1). The blowing machine start cycle can be carried out in Automatic or Manual mode. If the blowing machine productoin set-up has not been defined in the PCC application, start the machine in forced loading with preform ejection activated. The procedure below is described in Manual mode for the blowing machine.

© SIDEL

2- Start the blowing machine and the preform feeder, see procedure "BCU-015. 3- Press the (2) key.

The (A) window appears.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

2

1 1-008464-11-02.svg

Part B

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

3

Auto-adapting the speed of the preform feeder

The start percentage for the elevator column (3) corresponds to its speed at the start of the auto-adapt cycle. 4- Enter a start-up setpoint for the elevator column (3) of 60 %. 5- Press the (4) key.

BPU-003

2/2

4

A

B

3

A confirm window appears.

The preform feeder speed auto-adaptation cycle may take several minutes.

1-007549-04-02.svg

The auto-adapt cycle stops when the feeder has operated over a time pre-defined by the plc and at a sufficient level of preforms in the stabilization rail with the blowing machine stop pin open. 6- Press the appropriate key to confirm the start of the autoadaptation cycle.

The key (4) flashes during the auto-adapt phase. The preform feeder is operating. 7- Authorize preform loading into the blowing machine using the key (5). F Wait for the end of the cycle.

6

5

The reference speed calculated is shown in the window (B).

F Check that the reference value calculated is below *1. - If yes. · Go to the next step. - If not. · Stop the preform loading using the key (5). · Stop the preform feeder using the key (6). · Select high speed for the elevator column(s) using the key(s) (1). · Repeat as above from step 4 .

1-006704-14-xx.svg

BEFORE YOU FINISH 8- Close the window (A). 9- Stop the machine, see procedure "BCU-015. 10- Save the recipe, see procedure "BPU-005.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

BPU-004

Output rate setpoint

3

GENERAL INFORMATION Caution: modifying the "Output rate" will automatically generate a recalculation of the production timings by the plc. The quality of the production may be altered.

1-006030-14-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS

1

3

- machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001, - PCC application set to the "Welcome" family. PROCEDURE 1- Press the (1) key.

The (A) window appears. 2- Enter the setpoint. 3- Press the (2) key. The window (A) disappears from the screen. The setpoint has now been modifed. BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Check the output rate value (3). The procedure is now complete. 1-006403-16-02.svg

A

2

© SIDEL

1-006398-03-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

Output rate setpoint

BPU-004

2/2

© SIDEL

3

Part B

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

BPU-005

Recipe management

3

MACHINE STATUS - machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001. PROCEDURE 1- Press the (1) key.

The "Recipe" family appears.

Drive selection 2- Press the key (2) corresponding to the source drive you require.

The key changes status. The recipes present on the drive will be displayed in the recipe list (A). Loading a recipe into the machine

1-006030-14-xx.svg

3- Press the name of the recipe in the recipe list (A).

1

The key (3) is no longer masked. 4- Press the (3) key. The recipe is now loaded into the machine. Deleting a recipe or recipes 5- Press the names of the recipes in the recipe list (A). 6- Press the (4) key. A confirm window appears. 7- Press the key corresponding to the required operation. Printing a recipe or recipes

12

11

3

A

The entire content of a recipe will be printed by default. 8- Press the name of the recipe in the recipe list (A).

14

9

8

13

4

5

2 1-007760-02-02.svg

© SIDEL

9- Press the (5) key.

The (B) window appears. 10- Press the key (6) to activate or disactivate the print out of the page(s). 11- Turn the recipe pages using the keys in zone (C). 12- Press the (7) key. The window (B) disappears from the screen. 13- Repeat as above, from step 8 , to configurate the printouts for the other recipes. 14- Press the names of the recipes in the recipe list (A). 15- Press the (8) key. The recipes selected from the recipe list (A) will print out. Copying a recipe or recipes 16- Press the names of the recipes in the recipe list (A). 17- Press the (9) key. The (D) window appears. 18- Select the drive you require using the keys (10).

7

B

C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

6

C 1-010421-01-02.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

3

Recipe management

The recipes will be copied to the selected drive. The window (D) disappears from the screen. Saving a recipe Saving a new recipe 19- Press the (11) key. The keyboard appears. 20- Enter the name of the new recipe using the keyboard. The new recipe is created and saved. Saving an existing recipe 21- Press the (12) key. The new recipe overwrites the existing recipe in the list (A). Recovering a deleted recipe 22- Press the (14) key. The (E) window appears. 23- Press the name of the recipe in the recipe list (F). The key (15) is no longer masked. 24- Press the (15) key. The recipe is reloaded into the list of recipes (A). 25- Press the (16) key. The window (E) disappears from the screen. Exporting a recipe 26- Press the name of the recipe in the recipe list (A). The key (13) is no longer masked. 27- Press the (13) key. The (D) window appears. 28- Select the drive you require using the keys (10). The recipe is exported to the selected reader. The window (D) disappears from the screen.

Part B BPU-005

2/2

D

10 1-010410-01-02.svg

E

15

F

16 1-007602-02-02.svg

BEFORE YOU FINISH 29- Close the window(s) and return to the "Welcome" family.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

BPU-006

Solenoid valve test

3

GENERAL INFORMATION Never attempt any work on the machine during a "Fixed or mobile solenoid valve test": - doors open, the machine is energised (water, electricity, air etc.). For further information, please refer to chapter ""Settings" family. The test windows in the "Settings" family are only accessible if all of the machine safety doors are closed. 1-006030-14-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS - machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001, - PCC application set to "Settings". PROCEDURE Blowing test 1- Position the blowing station to be tested at the rear of the machine using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013. The blowing station to be tested will be in the machine's white zone (B). 2- Press the (1) key.

The (A) window appears. 3- Enter the number of the blowing station using the keys (2). The number of the blowing station selected appears in the zone (C). 4- Press the (3) key. The low pressure air supply to the blowing station is now active. 5- Press the (4) key. The high pressure air supply to the blowing station is now on. Activating the preblow and blow solenoid valves will cause a lot of noise if the mold is empty. You can place a small metal plate (make sure that it is clean and smooth) on the mold for the nozzle to rest on. This will reduce the noise when testing the valves on an empty mold. Briefly activate the preblow and blow solenoids causing the noise. 6- Press the (5) key.

The nozzle tip drops down.

1

10 1-010353-05-02.svg

7

8

9

A

15

6 14

B

5 4 3 C 2

© SIDEL

1-010342-03-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

3

Solenoid valve test

The lamps (13) will light up when the corresponding solenoid is active.

BPU-006

2/2

13

7- Press the (6) key.

The blowing station is now at preblowing pressure.

8- Press the (6) key.

The blowing station is no longer at preblow pressure. 9- Press the (7) key. The blowing station is at blowing pressure. 10- Press the (7) key. The blowing station is no longer at blowing pressure. 11- Press the (8) key, (option). The blowing air is recoverd in the recovery circuit. 12- Press the (8) key, (option). The recovery solenoid is deactivated. 13- Press the (9) key. The blowing air is cleared through the exhaust . 14- Press the (9) key. The exhaust solenoid is disactivated. 15- Press the (14) key, (option according to model). The blowing station is at compensation pressure. 16- Press the (14) key, (option according to model). The blowing station is no longer at compensation pressure. 17- Press the (15) key. · If all of the solenoids are not disactivated, press key "Oui" on the window that appears. The window (A) disappears from the screen. Testing the solenoids on the fixed section 18- Press the (10) key. The (D) window appears. 19- Press the (11) key. The machine is now supplied with low pressure air. 20- Test the solenoids one after the other by pressing the corresponding keys in the zone (E).

1-006409-01-xx.svg

11

D

E

12

BEFORE YOU FINISH 21- Press the (12) key. · If all of the solenoids are not disactivated, press key "Oui" on the window that appears.

The window (D) disappears from the screen. The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-010348-03-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

BPU-007

Oven test

3

GENERAL INFORMATION The "Oven test" window allows you to check the oven lamps. For further information, please refer to chapter ""Settings" family. The test windows in the "Settings" family are only accessible if all of the machine safety doors are closed.

1-006030-14-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS - machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001 , - PCC application set to "Settings". PROCEDURE 1- Press the (1) key. 2345-

The (A) window appears. Select the half of the oven to be tested using key (2). The key (2) indicates the half of the oven selected. Select the zone to be activated using the keys (3). The zone changes to yellow. Press the (4) key. The numerical keypad appears. Enter the heating percentage for the zone to be tested. It is possible to check the ventilation system by modifying the setpoint using the key (5). The minimum default value is 30 %.

6- Press the (6) key.

The heating zone selected lights up. 7- Select the next test zone using the keys (3). The zone changes to yellow. 8- If necessary, modify the heating percentage in the zone using the key (4). 9- Repeat as above from steps 3 until you have tested all of the oven zones. 10- Press the (6) key. The heating zone selected goes out. BEFORE YOU FINISH

1 1-010353-06-02.svg

A

7

3

2

4

6

5 1-006421-01-02.svg

11- Press the (7) key.

© SIDEL

The window (A) disappears from the screen. The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

Oven test

BPU-007

2/2

© SIDEL

3

Part B

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

BPU-008

Preform feeder test

3

GENERAL INFORMATION The test windows in the "Settings" family are only accessible if all of the machine safety doors are closed. The "Feeder test" window (A) allows the user to activate the controls for the various components of the preform feeder separately in order to test and adjust each of them.

1-006030-14-xx.svg

Opening any of the safety doors will stop the operation of the elements selected in the "Feeder test" window (A). For further information, please refer to chapter ""Settings" family. The minimum default value for the preform feeder speed setpoints is *1. The PCC screen display(s) may differ depending on the model and the configuration of the machine. MACHINE STATUS - machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001, - PCC application in "Manual" mode, - PCC application set to "Settings". 1

PROCEDURE

1-010353-07-02.svg

1- Press the (1) key.

© SIDEL

The (A) window appears. 2- Press the (2) key. The low pressure air supply to the preform feeder is now active.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

3

Preform feeder test

BPU-008

Unscrambler roller operating test 3- Press the (3) key.

B

The numerical keypad appears. 4- Key in the value of the rotation order for the unscrambler rollers, then confirm. 5- Press the button (4) and release. The unscrambler rollers are selected. Selected elements will only start if the "Preform elevator start/stop" key (5) on the lower display bar PCC is activated.

A

2/4

14

2

8 9 4 3

11

13 12

10 1-010351-03-02.svg

6- Press the (5) key.

5

The unscrambler rollers are in operation. The buttons (6 ; 7) located on the unscrambler roller unit frame have the same function ast the "Preform elevator start/stop" key (5) on the lower display bar of the PCC. The keys (6 ; 7) allow the user to start and stop the various components of the unscrambler rollers selected in the "Feeder test" window in order to observe their performance in contact with the preforms.

F Check the performance of the various components. 7- Press the button (4) and release. The unscrambler rollers are stopped. Elevator column operation test 8- Press the (8) key. The numerical keypad appears. 9- Enter the elevator motor setpoint.

1-006704-02-xx.svg

7

6

Selected elements will only start if the "Preform elevator start/stop" key (5) on the lower display bar PCC is activated. 10- Press the button (9) and release.

The conveyor belt on the elevator is now in operation. F Check the performance of the various components. 11- Press the button (9) and release. The conveyor belt on the elevator column is stopped. Performance test on the elevator column of the mini-hopper (option according to model) 12- Press the (10) key. The numerical keypad appears. 13- Enter the setpoint instruction for the mini-hopper motor.

1-006375-07-xx.svg

14- Press the button (11) and release.

The mini-hopper (option) elevator belt is now operational. Publication date : 13/11/2009

© SIDEL

Selected elements will only start if the "Preform elevator start/stop" key (5) on the lower display bar PCC is activated.

Part B 3/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

BPU-008

Preform feeder test

F Check the performance of the various components. 15- Press the button (11) and release. The mini-hopper (option) elevator belt is now stopped. Hopper conveyor belt operating test 16- Press the (12) key. The numerical keypad appears. 17- Enter the setpoint for the hopper motor. Selected elements will only start if the "Preform elevator start/stop" key (5) on the lower display bar PCC is activated. 18- Press the button (13) and release.

The hopper belt is functioning. F Check the performance of the various components. 19- Press the button (13) and release. The hopper belt is now stopped. Other operating tests Selected elements will only start if the "Preform elevator start/stop" key (5) on the lower display bar PCC is activated. 20- Test the functions one after the other by pressing the corresponding key in the zone (B), please refer to chapter The "Feeder test" window in the "Settings" window in the User manual.

F Check the performance of the various components. BEFORE YOU FINISH 21- Press the (5) key.

© SIDEL

The selected elements are stopped. 22- Press the (14) key. - If all of the functions are not deactivated a confirmation window appears. · Press the key corresponding to the required operation. The window (A) disappears from the screen. The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

3

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

Preform feeder test

BPU-008

4/4

© SIDEL

3

Part B

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

BPU-009

Setting the parameters of the process

3

MACHINE STATUS - machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001. PROCEDURE 1- Press the (1) key.

The "Wheel" family appears. 2- Press the (2) key. The (A) window appears. 1-006030-14-xx.svg

3- Activate "Manual" mode using button (3).

1

Manual mode active. 4- Select the type of production in Zone (B). 5- Enter the article's capacity (4). The parameters (5) may then be refined.

2

These parameters may be refined in order to improve regulation performance. As a general rule, these parameters can be set to obtain: - a preblow start up with a minimum of 0/10 and a maximum of +1/10 relative to the baseline process, - and a pressure with a minimum limit of -2 bar and a maximum of +2 bars relative to the baseline process. 6- Enter a weight setpoint (6) for the article bases. 7- Enter a weight setpoint tolerance (7) for the article bases of +/-0.10 g. 1-007565-09-02.svg

The tolerance specifications.

must

be

less

than

the

article

8- Enter a correction (8) coefficient for individual regulation of +0,8. 9- Enter a correctio coefficient (9) for overall regulation of -0,3. These parameters should subsequently be refined in order to adapt the regulation performance to the type of article. 10- Enter a correction frequency (10) for production start up of 10. 11- Enter a correction frequency for individual regulation (11). 12- Enter a correction frequency for overall regulation (12).

A B

4 7 13

9

6

3

8

12

10

11

The correction frequencies for individual and overall regulation must all be the same and be greater than the production start up correction frequency. © SIDEL

5

These parameters may be refined in order to improve regulation performance. Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-007576-02-02.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

3

Setting the parameters of the process

Part B BPU-009

2/2

13- Enter the top of the weight measurement (13) for the article bases. This value is a reminder and is not part of the regulation calculation. BEFORE YOU FINISH 14- Activate "Automatic" mode using button (3).

© SIDEL

"Automatic" mode selected. 15- Close the window(s) and return to the "Welcome" family. The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/6

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

BPU-010

Carrying out a trial on a new production process

3

GENERAL INFORMATION This procedure is not intended to train users in the creation of a production set-up, it is designed to allow technicians to set the machine up for the production of a single item. This article may well serve for the initial mechanical settings of the machine. To be able to use this procedure you will need to be highly familiar with the User manual and in particular with the "Methodology for production set-up" chapter. Complying with the specifications for an "HR" article requires more in-depth process knowledge than can be presented in the context of this instruction. For all developments and additional training, please contact SIDEL. This list of preliminary checks is intended for the initial machine start-up. To carry out this procedure you will require the Service Procedure Catalogue. This procedure must be carried out with the molds at process temperature where this is greater than 60 °C. MACHINE STATUS - machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001, - molds at production temperature. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables None Specific tools - protective gloves (thermal), - box cutter. PROCEDURE

© SIDEL

Preliminary checks 1- Check the user profiles, see procedure "BCU-021. 2- Make sure that the options required for the production setup have been activated (especially the "Push-up" option, if needed) , please refer to chapter ""Options" family" chapter in the User manual. 3- Check the machine parameter settings and PCC, please refer to chapter ""Options" family" chapter in the User manual.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-006030-53-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

3

Carrying out a trial on a new production process

Part B BPU-010

2/6

4- Make sure that the custom parts corresponding to the preforms and items being produced are fitted on the machine, please refer to chapter "Production item changes" chapter in the User manual. 5- Check the alarm configuration, see procedure "BCU-022. 6- Checking the JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013. 7- Verify that the "Push-up" pressure setting (if present) is at 9 bar, please refer to chapter ""Wheel" family" chapter in the User manual. 8- Check the preblow flow limiter settings, see procedure "BPU-013. 9- Check the alarm levels for the fluid temperatures and flows (usually a body temperature of around 140 °C and a base and/or neck temperature of 75 °C) , please refer to chapter ""Wheel" family" chapter in the User manual. 10- Check the settings of the inductive and photo-electric sensors, see procedure "BRE-001. 11- Solenoid valve tests, see procedure "BPU-006. 12- Heating tests, see procedure "BPU-007. 13- Enter the production output rate, see procedure "BPU-004. 14- Start the machine cycle, see procedure "BCU-015. 15- Set the preform feeder, see procedure "BPU-027. 16- Stop the machine, see procedure "BCU-015. Preliminary settings Blow wheel 17- Set points "0" and "10", see procedure "BPU-001. Oven 18- Set the number of lamps required to heat the preforms according to their height. 19- Set the position of the lamps for all of the oven heating modules, see procedure "BPU-011. 20- Set the interior and exterior cooling shields, see procedure "BRM-010. 21- Set the focal point of the infrared camera(s), see procedure "BRE-003. 22- Set the positions of the oven cooling dampers to the middle position. 23- If the "black bars" option is present, set them outside the heating zone for this first approach. Setting up the production process For further information, please refer to chapter "Setting up the machine for production" chapter in the User manual.

© SIDEL

24- Set the temperatures for the mould regulation circuits (usually a body temperature of around 140 °C and a base and/or neck temperature of 75 °C) . Preblowing configuration

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 3/6

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

BPU-010

25- Set the preblow procedure "BPU-012.

Carrying out a trial on a new production process pressure

to

8

bar,

3

see 1

The start of preblowing is expressed in tenths of the stretching phase, with zero being the start of active stretching. 26- Position the cursor (1) at "1/10" to set the start of preblowing to point "0" + 1/10. Blowing configuration 27- Set the blow pressure to 38 bar, see procedure "BPU-002.

1-007570-03-02.svg

28- Press the (2) key.

The end of preblowing at point "10" is active. - For items whose volume is less than 0,5 L, exhaust time is set at 0,2 s. - For items whose volume is less than 1,5 L, exhaust time is set at 0,4 s. - For items whose volume is greater than 1,5 L, exhaust time is set at 0,5 s.

3

29- Key in a value for the exhaust time (3). - For items with a volume of between 2 L and 1,5 L, the sweep time is set at 0,8 s. - For items with a volume of less than 1,5 L, sweep time is set at 0,4 s.

15

16 14

2

30- Enter an air recovery time (16) (option).

1-010341-04-02.svg

- According to the volume of the article, the air recovery time varies from 0.10 to 0.15 s. 31- Enter a sweep time value (14). "Push-up" must start after the sweep and stop at the start of the lowering of the mould base.

© SIDEL

32- Enter the initial and fina "Push-up" angular positions using the keys (15) Heating setpoints 33- Balance the number of penetration and distribution ovens using the keys (4). 34- Activation of lamps necessary on 40 % penetration oven modules. 35- Activate the required lamps on 50 % distribution oven modules. 36- Enter 100 % as a setpoint value for zone 1(A).

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

3

Carrying out a trial on a new production process

37- Enter a value of between 80 and 100 % for the other zones (B).

BPU-010

4

C

B

4/6

A

4

12

11

To achieve better penetration, the "overall heating %" values should be between 80 and 100 %. Oven configuration 38- Enter a "Go to standby" setpoint (5) of 40 %. 39- Enter a "Loading temperature" setpoint (6) of 120 °C. Lower the "Loading temperature" setpoint if the time taken to reach this level is too long. 40- Enter a "Cooling" setpoint (7) of 85 %. 41- Press the (8) key. 42- Activate "Manual" mode using button (13).

6

5

7

8

1-010338-03-02.svg

If the "Preform neck" and "Preform base" options are validated, repeat the previous steps, from step 41 for the windows "Preform neck temperature" (12) and "Preform base temperature" (11). Production set-up trials (in "Manual" mode) Warning - risk of burns Wear heat protection gloves. 43- Start the machine cycle, see procedure "BCU-015.

13

F Wait for the oven to reach the loading temperature. 44- Send around ten preforms through the oven and eject them at the oven outfeed.

1-007559-02-02.svg

The preforms should be completely supple, even the domes. E

D 1-006855-01-xx.svg

© SIDEL

F Check the general temperature of the preforms by holding them. - If the preforms are supple and not crystallized (E). · Go to step 46 . - If the preforms are almost supple. · Increase the overall heating percentage 10 %. - If the preforms are hard. · Increase the number of lamps in operation on the hard areas. - If the preforms are completely crystallized. · Reduce the number of lamps. - If the preforms are partially crystallized (D). · Reduce the overall heating percentage by 10 %.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 5/6

BPU-010

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

Carrying out a trial on a new production process

45- Repeat the previous steps, from step 44 , until the required result is obtained. 46- Test the preblowing on 1 wheel rotation and eject the blown items at the bottle outfeed.

F Check the general appearance of the preblown balloon. - If the preblown balloon is too small (F). · Increase the preblow pressure by 2 bar and if the phenomenon continues bring the start of preblowing forward. - If the preblown balloon is satisfactory (G). · Go to step 48 . - If the preblown balloon is to big (H). · Reduce preblowing pressure. 47- Repeat the previous steps, from step 46 , until the required result is obtained. 48- Test the blowing on 1 wheel rotation and eject the blown items at the bottle transfer. F Check the shape of the bottles (I). 49- If necessary, adjust the various parts of the bottle outfeed (gaps, height and synchronization). Refining the production set-up 50- Note the positions of the heating zones on a preform using a box cutter or a permanent marker. The marked preform will serve as template. F Check the temperature of the various preform sections with regard to the heating zones using the template. · If necessary, correct the heating profile by changing the heating percentages and the number of active lamps. 51- Note the position of the heating zones on the preforms using a box cutter or a permanent marker. 52- Test the blowing process on 1 wheel rotation. F Make sure that the plastic material has been evenly distributed between the shoulder and the base of the bottle. - If the material is not evenly distributed. · Correct the preblow pressure. F Use marked articles to check the distribution of the material with regard to the heating zones. · If necessary, correct the heating profile. 53- Send in a number of preforms corresponding to half of the oven's full capacity. 54- Raise the ambient oven temperature. 55- Refine the "Loading temperature" setpoint. 56- Note the temperature of the preforms at the oven outfeed. 57- Refine the "Preform temperature" setpoint. 58- Note the output percentage value. 59- Refine the "Production start-up" setpoint.

3

F

1-006856-01-xx.svg

G

1-006857-01-xx.svg

H

© SIDEL

1-006858-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

3

Carrying out a trial on a new production process

F Make sure that the blown bottles conform to the production specifications. · If they do not conform, start over the adjustments.

Part B BPU-010

6/6

I

BEFORE YOU FINISH 60- Activate "Automatic" mode using button (13). For further information, please refer to chapter "Setting up the machine for production" chapter in the User manual. 61- Save the recipe, see procedure "BPU-005.

1-008360-01-xx.svg

© SIDEL

F Check the stability of the set-up in production. The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

BPU-011

Mechanical settings for the lamps

3

GENERAL INFORMATION Never touch the lamps with your fingers. Always hold the lamps by their ends. Always wear clean, dry gloves.

1-006030-09-xx.svg

The position of the infrared lamps (1) (advanced or center) is adjusted according to the production set up. The shim stacks (4) allow you to adjust the position of the lamps (1) on the rack (3). MACHINE STATUS - all machine power procedure "BCU-012, - oven cold.

3 2

and

utilities

turned

off,

see

1-006075-02-xx.svg

PROCEDURE 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. To faciltate tightening, the handles (2) can be disengaged.

3

Depending on the configuration of your machine, these elements (2) may vary visually but their functions remain the same. 2- Loosen the handles (2). 3- Carefully tilt out the rack (3) from the oven. 4- Pivot the cover lugs (5) by a 1/2 turn. 5- Remove the covers (6).

5 1-006338-01-xx.svg

6 1

© SIDEL

1-006339-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

3

Mechanical settings for the lamps

6- Set the positions of the lamps (1) using the shims (4). 7- Position the covers (6). 8- Pivot the cover lugs (5) by a 1/2 turn.

Part B BPU-011

2/2

4

1

1-008536-01-xx.svg

9- Carefully tilt out the rack (3) from the oven. 10- Tighten the handles (2).

6 1

1-006341-02-xx.svg

BEFORE YOU FINISH

5 1-006342-01-xx.svg

11- Close the safety doors. 12- Enter the configuration you have created into the "Comments" window in the "Oven" family.

The procedure is now complete.

2

3

© SIDEL

1-006076-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

BPU-012

Setting the preblowing pressure

3

GENERAL INFORMATION The PCC screen display(s) may differ depending on the model and the configuration of the machine. MACHINE STATUS - machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001. PROCEDURE

1-006030-14-xx.svg

1- Press the (1) key.

The "Wheel" family appears.

2- If necessary, press on button (2) to display the air synoptic (A). 3- Press the (3) key.

The numerical keypad appears. 4- Enter the required pressure and confirm. BEFORE YOU FINISH

5- Close the window(s) and return to the "Welcome" family.

The procedure is now complete.

1

2

A

3

© SIDEL

1-010355-03-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

Setting the preblowing pressure

BPU-012

2/2

© SIDEL

3

Part B

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

BPU-013

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

Checking the preblow flow setting

2

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005. PROCEDURE

1-006030-01-xx.svg

The value 150 is a default value. The value may be changed when the final process set-up is effected. Do not activate the low pressure air system in the JOG implementation window. 1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013. 2- Bring the mold support unit around to your working position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

1

3

2

© SIDEL

F Check that the display (1) reads 150. - If yes. · Go to step 2 . - If not · Continue with the procedure. 3- Loosen the bolt (2). 4- Set the display (1) to 150 using the knob (3). 5- Tighten the bolt (2). 6- Repeat stages 2 to 5 until the preblow flow has been set on all of the blowing stations. 7- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-010704-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

2

Checking the preblow flow setting

Part B BPU-013

2/2

BEFORE YOU FINISH 8- Press the (4) key.

The numerical keypad appears. 9- If necessary, press on button (5) to display the air synoptic (A). 10- Press the (6) key. The numerical keypad appears. 11- Enter the value "150". The procedure is now complete. The preblow flow entered at the PCC is an indicator which has no incidence on the actual preblow flow setting. 4

5

A

6

© SIDEL

1-010355-02-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

BPU-014

Checking the feeder preform count

3

GENERAL INFORMATION Sensor D3 D4 D5

Unscrambler roller exit Unscrambler roller anticipated start sensor

B102.0 B103.3

Upper count cell

B105.0

1

Detection of preforms at top of rail

B10.5

2

Detection of preforms at bottom of rail

B10.6

3

Detection of preforms at machine infeed

B32.1

3 2 1

The sensor cells (D3 ; D4 ; D5 ; 1 ; 2 ; 3) must be first adjusted and set according to the production to be done, see procedure "BRE-002, see procedure "BRE-014, see procedure "BRE-015, see procedure "BPU-015.

D4

D5

D3 1-006030-122-xx.svg

Updating the infeed rail missing preform count (A) may take several seconds. The screen display(s) may differ depending on the model and the configuration of the machine.

4

A

MACHINE STATUS - unscrambler roller assembly clear of preforms, - infeed rail clear of preforms. Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004.

see see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - certified standard preforms for the type of production being carried out. Specific tools None PROCEDURE 1- Press the (4) key.

© SIDEL

The "Feeder" family appears.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-008464-12-02.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

3

Checking the feeder preform count

Part B BPU-014

2/4

2- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. Initializing the missing preform counter Masks can be made out of pieces of cardboard affixed with adhesive tape. 3- Place a mask on the sensors (D3 ; D4 ; 1 ; 2).

F Wait for 1 minute(s). F Check that the missing preform counter (A) on the infeed rail is at "0". 4- Remove the mask from the sensors (D3 ; D4). Checking the feeder preform count Checking the count manually 5- Pass your hand 3 time in front of the (3) cell. 6- Pass your hand 1 time in front of the (D5) cell. F Check that the missing preform counter (A) on the infeed rail is at "2". - If yes. · Go to the next step. - If not. · Start the sensor adjustments and settings again, see procedure "BRE-002, see procedure "BPU-015. · Repeat as above from step 3 until the missing preform count is correct. Checking the sensor (D5) F Check the operation of the sensor (D5), see procedure "BRE-015. Checking the count under production conditions 7- " and ", see above. The procedure is carried out only in "Automatic" mode, from the "Feeder" family. 8- Pass your hand 11 time in front of the (3) cell.

F Check that the missing preform counter (A) on the infeed rail is at "11". 9- Position 10 preforms in the unscrambler rollers . The blowing machine start cycle can be carried out in Automatic or Manual mode. If the blowing machine productoin set-up has not been defined in the PCC application, start the machine in forced loading with preform ejection activated.

F Check that the missing preform counter (A) on the infeed rail is at "1". - If yes. · Go to the next step. - If not. · Stop the machine, see procedure "BCU-006 or see procedure "BCU015. · Start the sensor adjustments and settings again, see procedure "BRE-002, see procedure "BRE-015, see procedure "BPU-015. Publication date : 13/11/2009

© SIDEL

10- Start the machine cycle, see procedure "BCU-006 or see procedure "BCU-015.

Part B

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

BPU-014

3/4

·

Checking the feeder preform count

Repeat as above from step 3 until the missing preform count is correct.

BEFORE YOU FINISH 11- Stop the machine, see procedure "BCU-006 or see procedure "BCU015. 12- Remove the preforms. 13- Remove the mask from the sensors (1 ; 2). 14- Close the safety doors.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

3

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

Checking the feeder preform count

BPU-014

4/4

© SIDEL

3

Part B

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

BPU-015

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

Setting the parameters for the preform feeder cell-sensors

3

GENERAL INFORMATION The values below are recommended for testing a new production set-up. These values can be refined after studying the performance of the preforms in production.

1-006030-14-xx.svg

The PCC screen display(s) may differ depending on the model and the configuration of the machine.

1

2

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004.

see see

PROCEDURE 1- Press the (1) key.

© SIDEL

The "Feeder" family appears. 2- Press the (2) key. The (A) window appears. Setting the parameters for the unscrambler roller sensor cells 3- Set the parameters of the leading edge of the cell "D1" of the unscrambler rollers to 2 s using the button (3). 4- Set the parameters of the leading edge of the cell "D2" of the unscrambler rollers to 1 s using the button (4) (option according to model). 5- Set the leading edges on cells "D3 ; D4 " for the unscrambler rollers at 0,5 s using the keys (5).

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-008464-10-02.svg

Part B

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

3

Setting the parameters for the preform feeder cell-sensors

Setting the parameters for the hopper sensor cells (depending on the machine configuration) 6- Set the leading and trailing edges for the hopper cells at 3 s using the keys (6). 7- Set the the leading and trailing edges of the sensor at the outlet chute to 3 s using the keys (7). 8- Set the leading and the trailing edges for the blockage sensor on the elevator column to 1 s using the keys (8). Setting the sensor cells on the mini-hopper (depending on the machine configuration) 9- Set the leading edges for the sensors on the mini-hopper to 3 s using the keys (9). 10- Set the trailing edges for the sensors on the mini-hopper to 1 s using the keys (10). 11- Set the leading edge for the blockage sensor on the elevator column to 2 s using the key (11). 12- Set the trailing edge for the blockage sensor on the elevator column to 1 s using the key (12).

7

3

A

4

BPU-015

5

8

11

2/2

6

12

10

9

1-007555-03-02.svg

BEFORE YOU FINISH 13- Close the window (A). 14- Start an auto-adapt cycle, see procedure "BPU-003.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/6

BPU-017

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

Searching for preform feeder start-up setpoints

3

GENERAL INFORMATION You search for a start up setpoint when testing a new production set-up or when the current production setup is not satisfactory. Setpoints can be searched in the Feeder family in either Automatic and Manual mode. Searching for setpoints in Manual mode requires in-depth knowledge of the articles being produced. Depending on the machine configuration, only one of the two screens (A ; B) is visible in the application PCC. For this procedure, only consider the setpoints visible on the screens (A) or (B). Designations and functions for the relevant sensor cells D1 D2

Unscrambler rollers and elevator column stoppage Unscrambler roller regulation sensor (option according to model)

1-006030-14-xx.svg

D4

D3

D2

D1

B102.1 B126.0

D3

Unscrambler roller exit

B102.0

D4

Unscrambler roller anticipated start sensor

B103.3

1-010560-01-xx.svg

The aim of this procedure is to determine the setpoints (3 ; 4 ; 5) and the setpoint (6) (if it is present) to obtain the appropriate level and the flow of preforms in the unscrambler roller assembly and the infeed rail. the rapid improvement in th level and flow of preforms in the feeder is principally obtained by modifying: - the start setpoint for the elevator column (5) according to the quantity of preforms dropped into the unscrambler rollers, - hopper belt setpoint (3) according to the quantity of preforms supplying the hopper outlet chute, - for the configuration (B), the "Small hopper supply" (6) setpoint (motors for the elevator column/intermediate conveyor assembly according to the quantity of preforms tipped into the mini-hopper.

A

1

3

D

F

5

2

11

E

4

10

9

© SIDEL

1-010420-01-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

3

Searching for preform feeder start-up setpoints

Initial values for the start setpoints The values on the table are the base values. These values are present in the PCC application during the first start-up. These values are replaced when the recipe is loaded. Element

Reference

Start setpoint

(3)

50 %

(4)

80 % (fixed value) 60 % (fixed value)

(5)

60 %

(6)

30 %

Hopper belt Unscrambler roller (Steel) Unscrambler roller (Aluminium) Elevator column Elevator *

column*

1

6

3

11

2/6

2

for the configuration (B)

If there is a production process set-up and a rate close to the new production, it is possible to recover the values of the setpoints for the corresponding recipe, see procedure "BPU-005. Initial values for the speed increase percentages

Unscrambler roller Window (C)

With presence at D2

10 %

10 %*

With presence at D3

10 %

10 %

By missing preforms

1%

None

With non-presence at D4

15 %

*

D

and decrease

Elevator column Window (B)

Setpoint instructions

*

B

BPU-017

F

5

E

4

10

9

1-008848-07-02.svg

15 % *

Accessible only in Manual mode

MACHINE STATUS - machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - Grade 00 abrasive paper. Specific tools - certified standard preforms for the type of production being carried out.

© SIDEL

PROCEDURE

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 3/6

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

BPU-017

Searching for preform feeder start-up setpoints

3

1- Press the (1) key.

The "Feeder" family appears. 2- Press the (2) key. The (C) window appears.

C 7

The characteristics of the preforms entered into the application PCC influence the operation of the preform feeder : - If the value entered (7) for the interior diameter of the preform is greater than 38 mm, the speed setpoint for the elevator column (5) is automatically limited to 81 %, - If the value entered (8) for the total preform length is less than 100 mm, the speed setpoint for the elevator column (5) is automatically limited to 85 %. 3- Enter the characteristics of the preforms for the production to be carried out. 4- Close the window (C).

The preform characteristics for the production are saved.

Monitoring the preform flow time on the unscrambler rollers

This procedure is made easier with the assistance of a second technician. 5- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 6- Make 2 marks 2 m apart on the unscrambler rollers using a marker pen. 7- Position a preform in front of the second mark. 8- Close the safety doors. Enter the unscrambler roller rotation setpoint (see the table above) in the "Feeder Test" window , see procedure "BPU-008. 9- Start the unscrambler rollers , see procedure "BPU-008. The speed of the preform flow on the unscrambler rollers is around 2 m in 3 s.

© SIDEL

F Check the preform flow time between the 2 marks. - If the flow time is not correct. · Stop the rollers , see procedure "BPU-008. · Check the gap between the rollers , see procedure "BRM-013. · Clean the unscrambler rollers using grade 00 abrasive paper. - If the flow time is incorrect. · Go to the next step. 10- Stop the rollers , see procedure "BPU-008.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

8

1-008844-03-02.svg

Part B

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

3

Searching for preform feeder start-up setpoints

Search the setpoints in the Automatic mode 11- Activate "Automatic" mode using button (9).

BPU-017

A

1

3

D

F

5

4/6

2

11

The setpoint value (5) must be entered into the autoadapt window, see procedure "BPU-003. 12- Enter the start-up setpoints for the preform feeder, see the table above. 13- Enter the the speed increase and decrease percentage in the windows (D ; E), see the table above. The key (10) is characterised by a symbol "-" or "+" depending on whether the low or high speed has been selected. 14- Select the low speed for the elevator column, using the key(s) (10). 15- Start an auto-adapt cycle, see procedure "BPU-003.

F Wait for the end of the cycle. F Check that the level and the flow of the preforms in the preform feeder is appropriate. 16- If necessary, refine the speed increase and decrease percentages in the windows (D ; E). Search the setpoints in Manual mode 17- Activate "Manual" mode using button (9). 18- Enter the start-up setpoints for the preform feeder, see the table above. 19- Enter the the speed increase and decrease percentage in the windows (D ; E), see the table above.

E

4

10

9

1-010420-01-02.svg

The key (10) is characterised by a symbol "-" or "+" depending on whether the low or high speed has been selected. 20- Select the low speed for the elevator column, using the key(s) (10).

© SIDEL

The blowing machine start cycle can be carried out in Automatic or Manual mode. If the blowing machine productoin set-up has not been defined in the PCC application, start the machine in forced loading with preform ejection activated.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 5/6

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

BPU-017

Searching for preform feeder start-up setpoints

The procedure below is described in Manual mode for the blowing machine.

B

6

1

3 3

11

2

21- Start the machine cycle, see procedure "BCU-015. A satisfactory flow of preforms in the feeder is characterized by a fluctuation in the level of preforms around the "D3" cell without that extending to the "D4" and "D1" cells.

F Check that the unscrambler rollers and the upstream components are sufficiently supplied with preforms. In the configuration (B), the setpoint (6) represents the speed percentage for the elevator column and remote hopper (option)/intermediate conveyor assembly.

F Observe the level and the flow of preforms using the indicators (11) on the sensors "D4 ; D3 ; D1" as well as the levels measured at the elevator column (F). - If no sensor cells are occluded and if the speed measured (F) is above the setpoint (5). Lack of preforms in the unscrambler rollers . · Increase the setpoint (5). · If necessary, increase the setpoints (3) and (6) (if present). - If the sensor cell "D1" is often occluded and causes frequent preform feeder stoppages . Too many preforms in the unscrambler rollers . · Reduce the setpoint (5). · If necessary, reduce the setpoints (3) and (6) (if present). F Check that the reference value calculated is below *1. - If yes. · Go to the next step. - If not. · Stop the preform loading using the key (12). · Stop the preform feeder using the key (13). · Select high speed for the elevator column(s) using the key(s) (10). · Enter the start-up setpoints for the preform feeder, see the table above. · Repeat as above from step 21 . 22- Continue adjusting the setpoints until you obtain a satisfactory level and flow of preforms in the feeder. 23- If necessary, refine the speed increase and decrease percentages in the windows (D ; E).

D

BEFORE YOU FINISH 24- Stop the machine, see procedure "BCU-006 or see procedure "BCU-015.

© SIDEL

The speed setpoints, obtained with this procedure can be transfered into the other operating mode (automatic or manual)for the feeder, before saving the recipe. 25- Activate "Automatic" mode using button (9). 26- Save the recipe, see procedure "BPU-005.

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

5

F

E

4

10

9

1-008848-07-02.svg

13

12

1-006704-13-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

Searching for preform feeder start-up setpoints

BPU-017

6/6

© SIDEL

3

Part B

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part B 1/2

BPU-027

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

Initializing the preform feeder production start

3

GENERAL INFORMATION This procedure is designed to provide instructions for all of the operations required for preparing the feeder before starting production. For all developments and additional training, please contact SIDEL. To carry out this procedure you will require the Service Procedure Catalogue. MACHINE STATUS - machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001, - hopper cleared of preforms, see procedure "BCU-017. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables None Specific tools - certified standard preforms for the type of production being carried out. PROCEDURE

F Check that all of the options physically present on the machine have been activated in the PCC application as per your machine configuration.

© SIDEL

For further information, please refer to chapter ""Options" family" chapter in the User manual. Preliminary settings 1- Set the unscrambler rollers, see procedure "BRM-013. 2- Set the stabilization rail assembly, see procedure "BRM-017. 3- Set the unscrambler, see procedure "BRM-016. 4- Set the infeed rail , see procedure "BRM-011. 5- Check the tensions on the conveyor belts, see procedure "BRM-015. 6- Set the infeed rail sensor cells, see procedure "BRE-014. 7- Set the stabilization rail sensor cells, see procedure "BRE-015. 8- Set the unscrambler rollers sensor cells, see procedure "BRE-016. 9- Set the sensors cells on the hopper, see procedure "BRE-018. 10- Set the time-delays on the prefrom feeder sensors, see procedure "BPU-015.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-006030-123-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Production process procedure

3

Initializing the preform feeder production start

Part B BPU-027

2/2

11- Adjust the detection system at the machine infeed, see procedure "BRE-002. 12- Check the count function on the preform feeder, see procedure "BPU-014. 13- Feeder tests, see procedure "BPU-008. Setting up the production process 14- Load the preforms for production into the hopper. 15- Search the start setpoints for the preform feeder, see procedure "BPU-017. BEFORE YOU FINISH 16- Save the recipe, see procedure "BPU-005.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

GENERAL PRESENTATION USER PROCEDURE MECHANICAL OPERATION PROCEDURE ELECTRICAL OPERATION PROCEDURE

Part A Part B Part C Part D

TABLE OF CONTENTS INSPECTING / CLEANING PROCEDURE Inspection/cleaning: oven lamps Inspecting the torque limiters

BNM

..............................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................

Inspection/cleaning: oven reflectors

.........................................................................................................

Checking the mold closing and locking safety devices

BNM-004

.........................................................................................................

BNM-005

....................................................................................................................

BNM-006

Cleaning the molds prior to storage

.........................................................................................................

BNM-008

Inspection/cleaning: braking system

........................................................................................................

BNM-009

Visual inspection of the reducer motor Checking general synchronization

.....................................................................................................

BNM-011

...........................................................................................................

BNM-012

Inspection/cleaning: preform feeder

.........................................................................................................

Degreasing the toothing on the drive wheels

...........................................................................................

Checking the safety devices on the stretching cam Inspection/cleaning: oven spindles

.................................................................................

BNM-015 BNM-033

...........................................................................................................

BNM-045

Inspection/cleaning: grease distributor (blowing machine)

.......................................................................

REMOVAL / REFIT PROCEDURE .....................................................................................

Removal/refit: solenoid valve assembly "TORNADO"

BDM-002

.....................................................................................................................

BDM-003

..............................................................................................

BDM-005

...........................................................................................

BDM-006

........................................................................................................

BDM-007

....................................................................................................................

BDM-008

Removal/refit: high pressure air circuit filters Removal/refit: hydraulic circuit filters Removal/refit: spindle chain links

.............................................................................................................

Removal/refit: molds and mold bases Removal/refit: spindle tips

BDM-001

..............................................................................

Removal/refit:low pressure air circuit filters

Removal/refit: nozzle seals.

BNM-046 BDM

Removal/refit: mold support unit shock absorber Removal/refit: transfer arms

BNM-013 BNM-014

...........................................................................................

Cleaning of the loading and unloading cams

BDM-010

......................................................................................................

BDM-011

........................................................................................................................

BDM-012

Removal/refit: spindle sprockets

..............................................................................................................

BDM-013

Removal/refit: stretching cylinder

.............................................................................................................

BDM-014

..................................................................................................................

BDM-015

Removal/refit: nozzle cylinder

Removal/refit: seal and compensation springs (single holding bar) (HR) Removal/refit: stretching unit bottom thrust Removal/refit: upstream feed unit

BDM-016

..............................................................................................

BDM-017 BDM-018

Removal/refit: downstream feed unit Removal/refit: infeed guide

................................................

............................................................................................................ ........................................................................................................

BDM-019

....................................................................................................

BDM-020

.......................................................................................................................

BDM-021

Removal/refit: preform infeed turntable © SIDEL

BNM-002 BNM-003

............................................................................

Checking the misload safety device Checking the machine levels

BNM-001

Publication date : 13/11/2009

C - 1/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents Removal/refit: infeed retractable guide

.....................................................................................................

Removal/refit: oven wheel infeed turntable

BDM-022

..............................................................................................

BDM-023

.....................................................................................................................

BDM-024

...........................................................................................................................

BDM-025

Removal/refit: stretching rod

....................................................................................................................

BDM-026

Removal/refit: stretching cam

...................................................................................................................

BDM-027

Removal/refit: oven outfeed guide

............................................................................................................

Removal/refit: stretching cylinder distributer (lower command)

BDM-028

................................................................

BDM-029

Removal/refit: stretching cylinder seals

....................................................................................................

BDM-030

Removal/refit: lower stretching thrusts

.....................................................................................................

BDM-031

Reconditioning nozzle cylinders (4 stroke)

...............................................................................................

BDM-032

Removal/refit: braking system friction pads

..............................................................................................

BDM-033

....................................................................................................

BDM-034

.........................................................................................................

BDM-035

Removal/refit: exhaust system silencer Removal/refit: mold base safety pin

Removal/refit: nozzle cylinder distributer

..................................................................................................

Removal/refit: mold base console assembly springs

...............................................................................

BDM-037

............................................................................................

BDM-039

...................................................................................................................

BDM-040

Removal/refit: unscrambler rollers drive belt Removal/refit: conveyor belts

BDM-036

Draining of the mold body (support and/or shell) hydraulic circuit Removal/refit: locking counter-cam shock absorber Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed wheel

............................................................

BDM-043

................................................................................

BDM-045

.........................................................................................................

Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed retractable guide

BDM-046

.......................................................................................

BDM-047

Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed neck guides

...............................................................................................

BDM-048

Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed body guides

...............................................................................................

BDM-049

Removal/refit: seal and compensation springs (holding thrust bar) (HR) Removal / fitting a "TORNADO" solenoid valve

.................................................

BDM-050

.......................................................................................

BDM-063

Removal/refitting of an upper stretching stop shock absorber

.................................................................

Removal/refitting of the "TORNADO" solenoid valve flow rate limiters

BDM-072

.................................................................

BDM-075

...........................................................................................

BDM-076

.............................................................................................................

BDM-095

Draining of the hydraulic system of the mold base (and neck) Draining of the hydraulic system of the oven Reconditioning the oven spindles

BDM-069

....................................................

Reconditioning nozzle cylinder distributer

................................................................................................

Removal/Refit - silencers on the mold support unit solenoid valve

BDM-098

..........................................................

BDM-106

......................................................................

BDM-107

Setting the mold opening/closing lever

.....................................................................................................

BRM-001

Removal/Refit - mold support unit compensation solenoid ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

BRM

Setting the heights of the transfer arms

...................................................................................................

BRM-002

Setting the tension of the spindle chains

..................................................................................................

BRM-003

Synchronizing the preform infeed/oven

....................................................................................................

Synchronizing the oven wheel/preform transfer Synchronizing the molds/bottle transfer

BRM-005

...................................................................................................

BRM-006

................................................................................................

BRM-007

Synchronizing the preform transfer/molds Setting the tensions on the timing belts Setting the stretching bottom thrust

....................................................................................................

BRM-008

..........................................................................................................

BRM-009

Setting the interior and exterior cooling shields Setting the infeed rail

BRM-004

.......................................................................................

........................................................................................

................................................................................................................................

Setting the positions of the braking system friction pads Setting the unscrambler roller assembly

.........................................................................

BRM-010 BRM-011 BRM-012

..................................................................................................

BRM-013

...............................................................................................

BRM-015

Setting the height of the unscrambler unit

................................................................................................

BRM-016

Setting up the stabilization rail assembly

.................................................................................................

BRM-017

Setting the tensions on the conveyor belts

C - 2/4

Publication date : 13/11/2009

© SIDEL

Removal/refit: transfer grips Removal/refit: nozzle tip

Part C

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

Synchronizing the bottle outfeed/bottle transfer

.......................................................................................

Setting the compensation system using single bars (HR) Setting the bottle base outfeed guide

........................................................................

.......................................................................................................

Setting the compensation system using thrust bars (HR)

BRM-018 BRM-021 BRM-022

........................................................................

BRM-023

.......................................................................................................

BRM-044

.............................................................................................................

BGM-001

Setting the stretching cylinder rollers GREASING PROCEDURE

BGM

Greasing the transfer arm guides

Greasing the spindle rollers and the turnover ramps

...............................................................................

BGM-005

Greasing the toothing on the oven wheel drive ring

.................................................................................

BGM-006

Greasing the toothing on the blow wheel drive ring

.................................................................................

BGM-007

................................................................................................................

BGM-008

Greasing the stretching guides

Greasing the mold base support assembly guides

..................................................................................

BGM-009

......................................................................................................

BGM-010

...................................................................................................................

BGM-011

Changing the oil in the reducer motor Greasing the molds (cavities)

Greasing the cylindrical GUPM mold support units Greasing the coder wheel gear

..................................................................................

BGM-013

................................................................................................................

BGM-014

Greasing the blow wheel drive ring movements

......................................................................................

BGM-015

Greasing the oven wheel drive ring movements

......................................................................................

BGM-017

Greasing the oven wheel shaft bearings

..................................................................................................

Greasing the mold support unit locking system Greasing the preform ejection cams Greasing the nozzle raise safety cam Transfer cam lubrication

.......................................................................................

........................................................................................................

BGM-020

......................................................................................................

BGM-021

...........................................................................................................................

Lubrication of the unlocking and locking cams of the mold-support units Greasing the blowing function cams

BGM-030

................................................

BGM-031

........................................................................................................

BGM-032

Piloted automatic greaser: replacing a cartridge

......................................................................................

BGM-033

........................................................................................................

BGM-035

© SIDEL

Greasing the reducer motor bearing

BGM-018 BGM-019

Publication date : 13/11/2009

C - 3/4

Part C

© SIDEL

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

C - 4/4

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

Mechanical operation procedure Inspecting / cleaning procedure

TABLE OF CONTENTS Inspection/cleaning: oven lamps Inspecting the torque limiters

..............................................................................................................

BNM-001

...................................................................................................................

BNM-002

Inspection/cleaning: oven reflectors

.........................................................................................................

Checking the mold closing and locking safety devices

BNM-004

.........................................................................................................

BNM-005

....................................................................................................................

BNM-006

Checking the misload safety device Checking the machine levels

BNM-003

............................................................................

Cleaning the molds prior to storage

.........................................................................................................

BNM-008

Inspection/cleaning: braking system

........................................................................................................

BNM-009

.....................................................................................................

BNM-011

Visual inspection of the reducer motor Checking general synchronization Inspection/cleaning: preform feeder

...........................................................................................................

BNM-012

.........................................................................................................

BNM-013

Degreasing the toothing on the drive wheels

...........................................................................................

Checking the safety devices on the stretching cam Cleaning of the loading and unloading cams Inspection/cleaning: oven spindles

BNM-014

.................................................................................

BNM-015

...........................................................................................

BNM-033

........................................................................................................... .......................................................................

BNM-045 BNM-046

© SIDEL

Inspection/cleaning: grease distributor (blowing machine)

Publication date : 13/11/2009

C - 1/2

Part C

© SIDEL

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

C - 2/2

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

BNM-001

Inspection/cleaning: oven lamps

1

GENERAL INFORMATION Always wear clean, dry gloves. Never touch the lamps with your fingers. MACHINE STATUS - oven cold, - all machine power and utilities turned off. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

1-006030-09-xx.svg

Parts None Consumables - Clean, dry cloths, - cotton gloves. Specific tools None PROCEDURE 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. To faciltate tightening, the handles (1) can be disengaged. Depending on the configuration of your machine, these elements (1) may vary visually but their functions remain the same.

2 1

2- Loosen the handles (1). 3- Carefully tilt out the rack (2) from the oven. Never use cleaning agents.

1-006075-01-xx.svg

4- Clean the lamps (3) using a clean, dry cloth. 5- Replace faulty, blackened or persistently soiled lamps (3), see procedure "BDE -009. 6- Carefully tilt out the rack (2) from the oven. 7- Tighten the handles (1). 8- Repeat steps 1 to 7, to check all of the oven lamps. BEFORE YOU FINISH 9- Close the safety doors.

The procedure is now complete.

3

© SIDEL

1-006076-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

Inspection/cleaning: oven lamps

BNM-001

2/2

© SIDEL

1

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

BNM-002

Inspecting the torque limiters

2

GENERAL INFORMATION For all work on the torque limiters, check the calibration values on the transmission drawings. Never attempt to modify the torque limiter tares.

1-006580-06-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS

1

A

- primary electrical circuit under power, - main electrical circuit under power, - PCC switched on. PROCEDURE 1- Press the (1) key.

The "Welcome" family page appears. 2- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. Checking the infeed wheel torque limiter

1-006403-17-02.svg

3- Turn the turntable (2) manually.

The torque limiter will trip. The corresponding fault is displayed at PCC.

2

If the corresponding fault does not appear on the PCC, reset the torque limiter sensor, see procedure "BRE-010. 4- Reset the preform infeed torque procedure "BCU-020. 5- Acknowledge the fault at the procedure "BCU-026.

limiter,

see

PCC.

see

© SIDEL

The alarm message corresponding to the fault disappears from the message band (A) on the PCC. Check the bottle outfeed wheel torque limiter 6- Turn the turntable (3) manually. The torque limiter will trip. The corresponding fault is displayed at PCC. If the corresponding fault does not appear on the PCC, reset the torque limiter sensor, see procedure "BRE-010.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-007175-03-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

2

Inspecting the torque limiters

Part C BNM-002

2/4

7- Reset the torque limiter, see procedure "BCU -020. 8- Acknowledge the fault at the PCC, see procedure "BCU-026.

The alarm message corresponding to the fault disappears from the message band (A) on the PCC. Checking the reducer motor torque limiter 9- Check for the gap X = 1,5 mm between the probe (4) on the sensor (5) and the control disc (6). If the gap X is incorrect, reset the torque limiter sensor, see procedure "BRE-010. 10- Check for the gap Y = 0,5 mm between the probe (4) on the sensor (5) and the control disc (6). If the gap Y is incorrect, reset the torque limiter sensor, see procedure "BRE-010.

3

1-006574-01-xx.svg

11- Press the probe (4) until the sensor (5) is set off.

4

The corresponding fault is displayed at PCC.

12- Acknowledge the fault procedure "BCU-026.

at

the

PCC.

Y

If the corresponding fault does not appear on the PCC, reset the torque limiter sensor, see procedure "BRE-010. see

The alarm message corresponding to the fault disappears from the message band (A) on the PCC. Checking the oven wheel torque limiter

X 6

5

© SIDEL

1-007163-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 3/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

BNM-002

Inspecting the torque limiters

2

13- Check for the gap X = 1,5 mm between the probe (7) on the sensor (8) and the control disc (9).

8

If the gap X is incorrect, reset the torque limiter sensor, see procedure "BRE-010. 14- Check for the gap Y = 0,5 mm between the probe (7) on the sensor (8) and the control disc (9). If the gap Y is incorrect, reset the torque limiter sensor, see procedure "BRE-010. 15- Press the probe (7) until the sensor (8) is set off. The corresponding fault is displayed at PCC. If the corresponding fault does not appear on the PCC, reset the torque limiter sensor, see procedure "BRE-010. 16- Acknowledge the fault procedure "BCU-026.

at

the

PCC.

see

The alarm message corresponding to the fault disappears from the message band (A) on the PCC.

7

Y

BEFORE YOU FINISH 17- Close the safety doors.

The procedure is now complete.

9

X

© SIDEL

1-007118-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

Inspecting the torque limiters

BNM-002

4/4

© SIDEL

2

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

BNM-003

Inspection/cleaning: oven reflectors

1

GENERAL INFORMATION Always use recommended tools. The vented reflectors must always retain their mirroreffect. Always wear clean, dry gloves. Eye protection is obligatory. 1-006030-09-xx.svg

Breathing protection is obligatory. When handling the reflectors (3) take the following precautions: - do not split or break them into small pieces, - avoid creating dust.

2 1

If transformed into dust, the reflectors (3) may cause temporary irritation to the skin, the eyes and respiratory system.

1-006075-01-xx.svg

The fine coating on the surface of the standard reflectors must not be damaged in any way. MACHINE STATUS - all machine power procedure "BCU-012, - oven cold.

3

and

utilities

turned

off,

see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT 1-006089-01-xx.svg

Parts None Consumables - cleaning agent "NET A02", - cotton wad. Specific tools - soft paintbrush.

© SIDEL

PROCEDURE

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

1

Inspection/cleaning: oven reflectors

1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine.

Part C BNM-003

2/2

4

To faciltate tightening, the handles (1) can be disengaged. Depending on the configuration of your machine, these elements (1) may vary visually but their functions remain the same. 2- Loosen the handles (1). 3- Carefully tilt out the rack (2) from the oven. 4- Remove the standard reflectors (3) and the vented reflectors (4).

5 1-006079-01-xx.svg

F Check the condition of the reflectors (3 ; 4). 5- Clean the dust off the reflectors (3 ; 4) using a soft brush. 6- Clean the vented reflectors (4) using cotton wad dabbed in cleaning agent "NET A02". 7- Wipe any remaining cleaning agent off the vented reflectors (4) using a dry cotton wad. 8- Replace any damaged reflectors (3 ; 4). 9- Refit the reflectors (3 ; 4). F Make sure that the reflector (4) is in the groove on the support (5). 10- Carefully tilt out the rack (2) from the oven. 11- Tighten the handles (1). 12- Repeat steps 1 to 11 , to check all of the reflectors (3 ; 4) in the oven. BEFORE YOU FINISH 13- Close the safety doors.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/4

BNM-004

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

Checking the mold closing and locking safety devices

2

MACHINE STATUS - cold molds. Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

1-006030-80-xx.svg

Parts None Consumables - adhesive tape. Specific tools - 10 mm plastic thickness gauge. PROCEDURE Checking the safety devices 1- Press the (1) key.

1

A

The "Welcome" family page appears. Do not activate the low pressure air system in the JOG implementation window.

2- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013. 3- Use the JOG system on the mold closing retractable safety cam (2) to bring the blowing station forward, see procedure "BCU-013. To ensure safety, the person carrying out the procedure must always keep the control box JOG with them.

© SIDEL

1-006403-17-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

2

Checking the mold closing and locking safety devices

BNM-004

2/4

4- Use a screwdriver (3) as a lever on the mold closing retractable safety cam (2).

The mold closing safety cam is retracted. The lamp on the detector (4) "B12.3" goes out. The alarm message corresponding to the fault appears on the message band (A) at the PCC. 5- Remove the screwdriver. The mold closing retractable safety cam (2)returns to its original position. 6- Acknowledge the fault at the PCC, see procedure "BCU-023. 7- Use the screwdriver as a lever on the mold locking retractable safety cam (5). The mold locking retractable safety cam (5) is now retracted. The lamp on the detector (6) "B31.0" goes out. The alarm message corresponding to the fault appears on the message band (A) at the PCC. 8- Remove the screwdriver. 9- Acknowledge the fault at the PCC, see procedure "BCU-023. Checking the safety detection systems 10- Open the vision system, see procedure "BCU-036. 11- Use the JOG unit between the 2 transfer wheels to bring the blowing station (9) around, see procedure "BCU-013. 12- Place the (7) thickness gauge 10 mm on the left half-mold (8) of the open blowing station (9). 13- Affix the gauge (7) using the adhesive tape. 14- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-13.

10 2

4

3

1-006080-01-xx.svg

5

6

3

1-006082-01-xx.svg

The lamp on the detector (4) "B12.3" goes out. 16- Use the manual rotation system to bring the blowing station (9) around so that the follower (11) is in contact with the mold locking retractable safety counter-cam (5), see procedure "BCU-014. The lamp on the detector (6) "B31.0" goes out. The alarm messages corresponding to the faults appear on the message band (A) at the PCC. 17- Advance the blow unit (9) by manual rotation so that the mold blocking rolling (11) is no longer in contact with the cam (5). 18- Acknowledge the faults at the PCC, see procedure "BCU-023. 19- Remove the gauge (7). 20- Close the mold support unit manually, see procedure "BSU-001. 21- Close the vision system, see procedure "BCU-036.

7

9

8

Publication date : 13/11/2009

11 1-006081-01-xx.svg

© SIDEL

15- Use the manual rotation system to bring the blowing station (9) around so that the follower (10) is in contact with the mold closing retractable safety cam (2), see procedure "BCU-014.

Part C 3/4

BNM-004

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

Checking the mold closing and locking safety devices

2

BEFORE YOU FINISH 22- Use the manual rotation system to bring the blowing station (9) around to the mold opening/closing safety lever (12), see procedure "BCU-014. 23- If the blowing station (9) sets off the safety device (12), adjust the mold opening/closing lever, see procedure "BRM-001. 24- Close the safety doors.

The procedure is now complete.

10

12

© SIDEL

1-006083-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

Checking the mold closing and locking safety devices

BNM-004

4/4

© SIDEL

2

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/4

BNM-005

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

Checking the misload safety device

2

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT 1-006030-10-xx.svg

Parts None Consumables None Specific tools - thickness ring 1 mm same diameter as the preform neck, - 1 preforms. PROCEDURE 1- Press the (1) key.

The "Welcome" family page appears. 2- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine.

1

A

© SIDEL

1-006403-17-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

2

Checking the misload safety device

BNM-005

2/4

3- Pivot the infeed guide (2) manually. 4- Position the preform (3) on the infeed turntable (4). 5- Bring the preform up to the spindle tip (5) using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013. 6- Position the thickness ring 1 mm(6) on the spindle tip (5).

4

2 1-006084-01-xx.svg

7- Bring the spindle tip (5) up to the preform loading point(3) using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013. The preform (3) will present a fault on loading due to the thickness of the ring (6). 8- Use the JOG to procedure "BCU-013.

turn

the

oven

wheel,

see

F Check the rising section on the ejection cams (7). F Check the rise of the 3 guide followers (8) on the ejection cams (7). F Make sure that the mis-loaded preform is ejected. F Check the safety device. The lamp on the sensor (9)"B32.0" will be off when it is inactive. The alarm message corresponding to the fault appears on the message band (A) at the PCC. 9- Remove the preform (3) and the ring (6). F Check the falling section of the ejection cams (7). 10- Acknowledge the fault at the PCC, see procedure "BCU-023.

5 6

3

1-006090-01-xx.svg

BEFORE YOU FINISH 11- Close the safety doors.

The procedure is now complete.

9

7

© SIDEL

1-006085-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 3/4

BNM-005

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

Checking the misload safety device

2

8

7

© SIDEL

1-006086-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

Checking the misload safety device

BNM-005

4/4

© SIDEL

2

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

BNM-006

Checking the machine levels

2

GENERAL INFORMATION This procedure is intended to check the levels of the machine. Levelling up procedures use other means which take into account the position of the blow wheel in the production area. SIDEL carries out the levelling up.

1-006030-54-xx.svg

Check the levels according to the measurments taken during the installaiton of the machine (see SIDEL levelling up document). If the document is not available, establish a reference to be used for the annual inspections.

2

1

The arrow next to the level indicates the direction in which it should be read. 3

MACHINE STATUS - all machine power procedure "BCU-012.

4

and

utilities

turned

off,

see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables None Specific tools - precision spirit level 0,02 mm/m.

1-006517-01-xx.svg

PROCEDURE

5

6

9

10

© SIDEL

1-006825-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

2

Checking the machine levels

Part C BNM-006

2/2

1- Take the levels of the bars (7) located as follows: - on the left side (1) of the blow wheel, - on the rear cross-piece (2) of the blow wheel.

7 1-008389-01-xx.svg

2- Take the levels of the bars (8) located as follows: - on the transfer table (3 ; 4), - on the front module (5 ; 6), - on the rear module (9 ; 10). BEFORE YOU FINISH if these readings do not match the original levels, contact SIDEL. 8

© SIDEL

1-006685-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

BNM-008

Cleaning the molds prior to storage

1

GENERAL INFORMATION Never use oxygenated or chlorinated cleaning agents. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - cleaning agent "NET A03", - clean, dry, non-abrasive cloth, - bubble-wrap. Specific tools - sectionned pallets.

1-006757-01-xx.svg

PROCEDURE 1- Clean the centering studs (1) using a clean. dry, nonabrasive cloth dipped in cleaning agent "NET A03". 2- Clean the seal planes (2) on the half-molds and the mold base using a clean, dry non-abrasive cloth dipped in cleaning agent "NET A03". 3- Clean the preform centering ring (3) using a clean, dry non-abrasive cloth dipped in cleaning agent "NET A03". 4- Clean the cavity (4) in the half-molds and the mold base using a clean, dry non-abrasive cloth dipped in cleaning agent "NET A03". 5- Wrap the mold and the mold base in bubble-wrap. 6- Store the molds on sectionned pallets.

3

1

3

4

4

1

1

2

2

BEFORE YOU FINISH 7- Make sure there is no chlorine in the storage area. 8- Monitor the humidity level in the storage area (less than 70%). 9- Monitor the temperature in the storage area (from 20°C to 25°C).

4

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

2 1-006091-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

Cleaning the molds prior to storage

BNM-008

2/2

© SIDEL

1

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

BNM-009

Inspection/cleaning: braking system

3

GENERAL INFORMATION The braking system opens pneumatically and is drawn closed by a vacuum (see User manual). Never loosen the bolts (1). Operations 8 to 10 require the presence of 2 technicians. Do not inhale the dust from the brake systems. 1-006030-17-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

2 3 1

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - cleaning agent "NET A04", - Clean, dry cloths, - latex gloves. Specific tools - set of thickness gauges .

1-006094-01-xx.svg

PROCEDURE Wear latex gloves. Do not apply cleaning agents to the brake pads (2).

© SIDEL

1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Clean the accessible sections of the brake disc (3) using a cloth dipped in cleaning agent "NET A04". 3- Use the JOG to make the other sections of the brake disc (3) accessible, see procedure "BCU -013. 4- Clean the other sections of the brake disc (3) using a cloth dipped in cleaning agent "NET A04".

F Check the condition of all of the parts of the brake system visually. F Check the condition of the brake pads (2) visually. · Replace the pads if they have become soiled by grease or oil, see procedure "BDM -033.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

3

Inspection/cleaning: braking system

Part C BNM-009

2/2

F Check the thickness of the brake pads (2). · If the thickness of the brake pads (2) is less than 7 mm replace them, see procedure "BDM -033. 5- Connect the JOG to zone "0" on the PCC. 6- Turn off the JOG, see procedure "BCU -013. 7- Inhibit machine rotation, see procedure "BSU-003. Extreme caution and perfect coordination between the 2 technicians is required for the following operations.

6

8- The first technician presses the button (6) and keeps it pressed in.

The braking system is now open.

Never touch the moving parts of the brake during this inspection. 9- The second technician checks the gap 0,5 +0,1/0 mm between the brake pads (2) and the brake disc (3).

1-006603-01-xx.svg

Check the gap X along the entire length of the brake pads (2).

2

10- Adjust the brake pads (2) if the measurements taken exceed tolerance limits or are irregular, see procedure "BRM -012.

3

After inspecting the brake pads (2) the second technician gives a signal to the first to release the button (6). 11- Release machine rotation, see procedure "BSU-003. 1-006093-01-xx.svg

BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Check the condition of all of the parts of the brake system visually. F Check the tightness of the fixing bolts (7) (tightened to a torque of 85 N.m. 12- Press the button (6) several times to make sure that the brake is working properly. 13- Close the safety doors. The procedure is now complete. 7

© SIDEL

1-006096-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

BNM-011

Visual inspection of the reducer motor

2

MACHINE STATUS - reducer motor cold, - all machine power procedure "BCU-012.

and

utilities

turned

off,

see

PROCEDURE 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Check the general condition of the reducer motor (1). 3- Make sure there are no traces of oil on the reducer motor (1) shafts or the floor.

1-006030-17-xx.svg

If you detect any oil carry out a closer inspection, see procedure "BGM -010.

BEFORE YOU FINISH 4- Close the safety doors.

The procedure is now complete.

1

© SIDEL

1-006099-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

Visual inspection of the reducer motor

BNM-011

2/2

© SIDEL

2

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

BNM-012

Checking general synchronization

3

GENERAL INFORMATION Determine the cause of the de-synchronization before attemptng any work. Check the synchronization of the machine after carrying out any mechanical procedure on the belts, pulleys or bearings. Checking synchronization requires the full attention of the technician with regard to the mechanical parts involved as well as full control of the JOG system, see procedure "BCU -013.

1-006580-05-xx.svg

Grips not opening symmetrically, marks around the preform necks or problems on transfer can all be the result of de-synchronization. MACHINE STATUS - correct belt tensions, see procedure "BRM -008, - torque limiters in working position. Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

2

1

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

1-006100-01-xx.svg

Parts None Consumables None Specific tools - 3 preforms, - 3 certified acceptable items .

© SIDEL

PROCEDURE 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Pivot the infeed guide (1) manually. 3- Position 3 preforms on the infeed turntable (2). 4- Rotate the machine using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013. 5- Make sure that the preforms load onto the spindle chain correctly. 6- Remove the preforms.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

3

Checking general synchronization

BNM-012

2/4

7- Place 3 preforms at the oven outfeed, up-line from the offload point. 8- Rotate the machine using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013. Checking the meeting points of the grips with the molds is difficult and of limited efficiency when the machine is moving. For a full inspection, see procedure "BRM-006, see procedure "BRM-007.

F Make sure that the preforms move freely right up to the bottle transfer wheel. F Check all aspects of preform movement as well as that of the parts around them. 9- Note any abnormal stress or asymmetry on preform transfer. Preform movement and transfer should be fluid and unobstructed. 10- Remove the preforms from the grips on the bottle transfer wheel. 11- Place 3 bottles in the transfer grips (3) on the bottle transfer wheel. 12- Rotate the machine using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

4

3

F Check that the bottles are carried correctly to the neck guides (4). F Make sure that the bottles and all moving parts around them are working properly. 13- Remove the bottles from the neck guides (4). BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006581-02-xx.svg

De-synchrnonization at one meeting point often indicates de-synchronization at another meeting point. If synchronization problems are found at any 1 point, check all of the transfer points. 14- If necessary, re-synchronize the various parts in the following order. - De-synchronization at meeting point A?

A B

see

see see

E

see

Publication date : 13/11/2009

C 1-006690-01-xx.svg

© SIDEL

-

Synchronizing the preform transfer/molds, procedure "BRM-007. Synchronizing the oven wheel/preform transfer, procedure "BRM-005. Synchronizing the preform infeed/oven, procedure "BRM-004. De-synchronization at meeting point B? Synchronizing the oven wheel/preform transfer, procedure "BRM-005.

D

Part C 3/4

BNM-012

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

Checking general synchronization

see see see see see

© SIDEL

Synchronizing the preform infeed/oven, procedure "BRM-004. - De-synchronization at meeting point C? Synchronizing the preform infeed/oven, procedure "BRM-004. - De-synchronization at meeting point D? Synchronizing the molds/bottle transfer, procedure "BRM-006. Synchronizing the bottle outfeed/bottle transfer, procedure "BRM-018. - De-synchronization at meeting point E? Synchronizing the bottle outfeed/bottle transfer, procedure "BRM-018. 15- Close the safety doors. The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

3

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

Checking general synchronization

BNM-012

4/4

© SIDEL

3

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/4

BNM-013

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

Inspection/cleaning: preform feeder

1

GENERAL INFORMATION Never use objects which may damage the parts that need to be cleaned. Discard any preforms that fall from the production line or that have been handled. Check the parts for wear and tear during cleaning. Certain operations described in this chapter refer to optional equipment. Parts to be cleaned : Hopper and elevator column - the hopper (1), - the conveyor belt (2) and the fall cushioner (3) for the hopper (1), - the ribbed belt (4), the flaps (5) and the upper cover of the elevator column (6). Intermediate conveyor (option) - the internal walls of the intermediate conveyor , - the conveyor belt of the intermediate conveyor . Mini-hopper (option according to model) - the internal walls of the mini hopper (7), - the ribbed belt (8), the flaps (9) and the upper cover of the elevator column (10), - the conveyor belt (11) of the intermediary belt (12).

1-007021-11-xx.svg

14

13

1-006110-03-xx.svg

© SIDEL

Unscrambler roller assembly - the preform recovery conveyor belt (13), - the rollers, the wire-guides (14) and the rails (15) on the unscrambler roller assembly, - the 45° unscrambler paddles (16), - the waste recovery area (17), - the flaps, - the internal walls of the unscrambler roller assembly, - the access gantry. Infeed rail - the infeed rail cowling (option), - all the guides.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

16

15

1-006105-03-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

1

Inspection/cleaning: preform feeder

Part C BNM-013

2/4

MACHINE STATUS - feeder cleared of preforms, see procedure "BCU-017, - all machine power and utilities turned off, see procedure "BCU-012. 1

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - Clean, dry cloths, - cleaning agent "NET A03". Specific tools - long-necked industrial vacuum cleaner (check the filters of the vacuum cleaner), - long-handled rubber scraper, - raised platform for workng at heights, - ladder and footplate supplied with the machine.

3

2 1-006485-02-xx.svg

PROCEDURE 1- Remove any preforms present on the surfaces. 2- Remove all dust and plastic debris using the vacuum cleaner. 3- Clean the parts using a clean cloth and cleaning agent "NET A03". · If required. wipe the parts down. Cleaning the hopper (1) and the hopper fall cushioner (3) The machine ladder is designed to be fitted to the edge of the hopper.

6

1

4- Clean the hopper (1) and the fall cushioner (3) using the rubber scraper, a cloth and "NET A03" cleaner. Cleaning the conveyor belts (2 ; 4 ; 8 ; 10 ; 13 ; 15) This procedure describes the simple cleaning of the conveyor belts. For more complete cleaning, remove the belts and clean them in a bath or with a jet of water, see procedure "BDM-040. 5- Open or remove the casings providing access to the conveyor belts.

4 5

© SIDEL

1-008538-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 3/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

BNM-013

Inspection/cleaning: preform feeder

6- Clean all accessible sections of the conveyor belts. 7- Clean all sections of the conveyor belts by physically pulling them along. 8- Close or install the casings. Cleaning the waste recovery area (17) 9- Open the gate (23). 10- Clean the recovery area (17). 11- Close the gate (23).

Cleaning the anti-UV cabin (UV rail option) 12- Open the bottom cover (18) using the butterfly nut (19). 13- Remove the top cover (20). 14- Remove the rear panel (21) by releasing the 1/4 turn fixings . 15- Remove the side panel (22) by releasing the 1/4 turn fixings .

1 17

23 1-008526-01-xx.svg

8

10

7

9

Never obstruct the upper ventilation grill as this may reduce the bactericidal effects of the lamps. 12

Never touch the lamps with your fingers. Never clean the UV lamps .

11 1-006675-06-xx.svg

If a lamp is broken, clean the whole area thoroughly with an aspirator. Dispose of any articles present and make sure any electrical components are disposed of according to specific procedures.

19

© SIDEL

16- Clean the internal walls, the rear panel (21) and the side panel (22). 17- Clean all of the parts oin the infeed rail and the upstream block . 18- Refit the top cover (20). 19- Refit the rear panel (21) and secure it using the 1/4 turn fixings . 20- Refit the side panel (22) and secure it using the 1/4 turn fixings . 21- Close and lock the lower cover (18) using the butterfly nut (19).

Publication date : 13/11/2009

18

21 1-006807-03-xx.svg

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

1

Inspection/cleaning: preform feeder

General checks

F Check all of the rubber and plastic parts to make sure they are free from: - stretching or shrinking, - hardening or softening, - cracking, porosity or roughness. 22- Replace faulty or damaged parts. F Check that all of the nuts and fixtures are tightened up properly. F Control the adjustment of the conveyor belts, see procedure "BRM-015.

22

BNM-013

4/4

20

BEFORE YOU FINISH 23- Close the safety doors.

The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-006808-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

BNM-014

Degreasing the toothing on the drive wheels

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Never start the machine without lubrication on the toothing of the drive rings. MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

1-006030-12-xx.svg

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - cleaning agent "NET A04", - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - Clean, dry brush. PROCEDURE Degreasing the toothing on the blow wheel drive ring (1) Do not activate the low pressure air system in the JOG implementation window. 1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013. 2- Inhibit machine rotation, see procedure "BSU-003. 3- Remove excess grease from the drive ring (1) using a clean, dry cloth. 4- Clean the toothing on the drive ring (1) using a brush dipped in degreasing agent "NET A04". 5- Clean the drive gear. 6- Release machine rotation, see procedure "BSU-003. 7- Make accessible the other parts of the ring (1) using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013. 8- Repeat the previous steps, from step 2 , until degreasing is complete on the teeth of the drive ring (1). 9- Grease the toothing on the drive ring (1), see procedure "BGM-007. Degreasing the toothing on the oven drive ring (3)

1

© SIDEL

Do not activate the low pressure air system in the JOG implementation window.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-006088-01-xx.svg

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

2

Degreasing the toothing on the drive wheels

10- Connect the JOG to the work zone, procedure "BCU-013. 11- Inhibit machine rotation, see procedure "BSU-003.

BNM-014

2/4

see

Depending on the type of machine and accessibility, remove the elements (4 ; 5) or (5 ; 6 ; 7).

4 1-008402-01-xx.svg

12- Clean the different disassembled parts using a cloth moistened with "NET A04" cleaner.

6

7 1-008423-01-xx.svg

13- Remove excess grease from the drive ring (3) using a clean, dry cloth. 14- Clean the toothing on the drive ring (3) using a brush dipped in degreasing agent "NET A04".

5

6

© SIDEL

1-008401-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 3/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

BNM-014

Degreasing the toothing on the drive wheels

2

15- Clean the drive gear. 16- Release machine rotation, see procedure "BSU-003. 17- Make accessible the other parts of the ring (3) using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013. 18- Repeat the previous steps, from step 11 , until degreasing is complete on the teeth of the drive ring (3). 19- Grease the toothing on the drive ring (3), see procedure "BGM-006. 20- Install the different elements that have been removed. 3

BEFORE YOU FINISH 21- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-006087-04-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

Degreasing the toothing on the drive wheels

BNM-014

4/4

© SIDEL

2

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

BNM-015

Checking the safety devices on the stretching cam

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Sensor 2

Stretching cam safety

B14.4

When the safety device is set off a critical alarm will be generated and the fault will be shown on the PCC display. Work to be carried out at height: use the equipment fitted on the machine and always follow current safety regulations.

1-006030-18-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched onsee procedure "BCU-004.

see see

2 1

PROCEDURE 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Press on the retractable cam sector (1) for the stretching safety cam.

The cam sector (1) retracts. The lamp on the sensor "B14.4"(2) will be off when it is inactive. The alarm message corresponding to the fault appears on the message band (A) at the PCC. 3- Release the pressure on the retractable cam sector (1). The sensor lamp "B14.4" (2) is lit when the sensor is active. 4- Acknowledge the fault at the PCC, see procedure "BCU-026 The alarm message corresponding to the fault disappears from the message band (A) on the PCC.

1-006667-01-xx.svg

A

BEFORE YOU FINISH 5- Close the safety doors.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

1-006403-04-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

Checking the safety devices on the stretching cam

BNM-015

2/2

© SIDEL

2

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

BNM-033

Cleaning of the loading and unloading cams

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Check the parts for wear and tear during cleaning. Parts to be cleaned: - loading/off-loading cams (1). MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

1-006030-93-xx.svg

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools None PROCEDURE Do not activate the low pressure air system in the JOG implementation window. 1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, procedure "BCU-013. 2- Inhibit machine rotation, see procedure "BSU-003.

see

Do not remove grease from the cam races (1) and the followers in contact with them. 3- Remove excess and splashed grease from the parts (1) and the areas around them using clean dry cloths. 1

Area greased automatically

© SIDEL

1-006378-03-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

2

Cleaning of the loading and unloading cams

Part C BNM-033

2/2

4- If necessary, clean the greaser applicator (3).

F Check for any grease leaks at the inlet connector (4). 5- Release machine rotation, see procedure "BSU-003. 6- Use the JOG system to access the other parts (1) of the system, see procedure "BCU-013. 7- Repeat as above from step 2 until you have cleaned off all the excess and splashed grease.

3

BEFORE YOU FINISH In order to be able to start the machine normally, ther must be sufficient grease on the cam races (1) and the followers in contact.

4

8- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-008401-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BNM-045

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

Inspection/cleaning: oven spindles

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Visually identifying the type of spindles : - Spindle (A), shaft and cylindrical support ring. - Spindle (B), shaft and flattened support ring. The maintenance schedule varies according to the type of spindle. Type

Frequency

Spindle (A)

2 000 h

Spindle (B)

3 000 h

1-006030-21-xx.svg

Check the parts for wear and tear during cleaning. Parts to be cleaned: - spindle chain assembly. Never use solvents as they may affect the lubrication of the bearings and the self-lubricating bushings. MACHINE STATUS - oven cold. Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - Clean, dry cloths, - alcohol at 70 % does not need to be rinsed (non-residual). Specific tools None PROCEDURE

© SIDEL

Do not activate the low pressure air system in the JOG implementation window. 1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013. 2- Wipe off any excess or splashed grease from around the spindle chain using a clean, dry cloth. 3- Remove the ejectors (1) manually. Publication date : 13/11/2009

A

B 1-010327-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

2

Inspection/cleaning: oven spindles

4- Clean the parts of the spindle chain using a clean, dry cloth.

Part C BNM-045

2/2

2

Only use alcohol at 70 % and no other cleaning product as this may damage the parts. 5- Disinfect the spindle tips (2) and the ejectors (1) using a cloth dipped in 70 % alcohol. 6- Clip the ejectors (1). 7- Use the JOG system to access the other parts of the spindle chain . 8- Repeat as above, from step 3 until you have fully cleaned the spindle chain.

1

BEFORE YOU FINISH 9- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-010317-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BNM-046

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

Inspection/cleaning: grease distributor (blowing machine)

2

GENERAL INFORMATION 1

Grease distributor, mold opening/closing cam and mold raise/lower cam

If the damage cannot be repaired replace the faulty distributer with an identical one. Check the references of the distributers in order not to confuse them with other distributers fitted around the machine.

1

1-006030-121-xx.svg

1 cm3 of "LUB 29" grease corresponds to 1 shot from the "ALGI" grease gun. MACHINE STATUS

4 2 3

- machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - "LUB 29" grease, - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - "ALGI" grease gun.

5 1 1-010376-01-xx.svg

PROCEDURE 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- If need be, remove the electrical unit, see procedure "BCU-036. 3- Clean the distributer (1) and the area around it using a clean, dry cloth.

F Check that all of the parts greased manually using the distributor (1) are sufficiently greased. - If yes. · Go to step 11 . - If not. · Go to the next step. F Inspect the pipes (2 ; 3 ; 4 ; 5) on the grease lines. · If any of the pipes (2 ; 3 ; 4 ; 5) has been pinched or split, replace it. · If none of the pipes (2 ; 3 ; 4 ; 5) are crushed or pierced, replace the distributor (1).

© SIDEL

Note the positions of the pipes (2 ; 3 ; 4 ; 5) on the distributor (1) in order to correctly refit them. Fill up the new pipe with grease before connecting it.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

2

Inspection/cleaning: grease distributor (blowing machine)

BNM-046

2/2

Fill the new distributer with grease before fitting it. 4- Wipe off any excess grease from the main distributer (1) using clean, dry cloths.

F Check that all of the pipes (2 ; 3 ; 4 ; 5) on the greasing line are connected. 5- Close the safety doors. 6- Start the machine cycle, see procedure "BCU-006. 7- Inject 6 cm3 of "LUB 29" grease into the nipple (6) using the "ALGI" grease gun. 8- Clean the greasing nipple (6) using a clean, dry cloth. 9- Stop the machine after several wheel revolutions, see procedure "BCU-006. 10- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. F Check that all of the parts greased manually using the distributor (1) are sufficiently greased.

6

BEFORE YOU FINISH 11- Close the safety doors.

The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-008331-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

Mechanical operation procedure Removal / Refit procedure

TABLE OF CONTENTS Removal/refit: mold support unit shock absorber

.....................................................................................

Removal/refit: solenoid valve assembly "TORNADO" Removal/refit: transfer arms

BDM-002

.....................................................................................................................

BDM-003

Removal/refit:low pressure air circuit filters

..............................................................................................

BDM-005

...........................................................................................

BDM-006

........................................................................................................

BDM-007

....................................................................................................................

BDM-008

Removal/refit: high pressure air circuit filters Removal/refit: hydraulic circuit filters Removal/refit: nozzle seals.

Removal/refit: spindle chain links

.............................................................................................................

Removal/refit: molds and mold bases Removal/refit: spindle tips

BDM-011

........................................................................................................................

BDM-012

..............................................................................................................

BDM-013

.............................................................................................................

BDM-014

..................................................................................................................

BDM-015

Removal/refit: stretching cylinder Removal/refit: nozzle cylinder

Removal/refit: seal and compensation springs (single holding bar) (HR) Removal/refit: stretching unit bottom thrust Removal/refit: upstream feed unit

BDM-016 BDM-017

............................................................................................................

BDM-018

Removal/refit: downstream feed unit Removal/refit: infeed guide

................................................

..............................................................................................

........................................................................................................

BDM-019

....................................................................................................

BDM-020

.......................................................................................................................

BDM-021

Removal/refit: preform infeed turntable Removal/refit: infeed retractable guide

.....................................................................................................

Removal/refit: oven wheel infeed turntable

BDM-022

..............................................................................................

BDM-023

.....................................................................................................................

BDM-024

...........................................................................................................................

BDM-025

Removal/refit: transfer grips Removal/refit: stretching rod

....................................................................................................................

BDM-026

Removal/refit: stretching cam

...................................................................................................................

BDM-027

Removal/refit: oven outfeed guide

............................................................................................................

Removal/refit: stretching cylinder distributer (lower command)

................................................................

BDM-028 BDM-029

Removal/refit: stretching cylinder seals

....................................................................................................

BDM-030

Removal/refit: lower stretching thrusts

.....................................................................................................

BDM-031

Reconditioning nozzle cylinders (4 stroke)

...............................................................................................

BDM-032

Removal/refit: braking system friction pads

..............................................................................................

BDM-033

Removal/refit: exhaust system silencer Removal/refit: mold base safety pin

....................................................................................................

BDM-034

.........................................................................................................

BDM-035

Removal/refit: nozzle cylinder distributer

..................................................................................................

Removal/refit: mold base console assembly springs Removal/refit: conveyor belts

BDM-036

...............................................................................

BDM-037

............................................................................................

BDM-039

...................................................................................................................

BDM-040

Removal/refit: unscrambler rollers drive belt © SIDEL

BDM-010

......................................................................................................

Removal/refit: spindle sprockets

Removal/refit: nozzle tip

BDM-001

..............................................................................

Draining of the mold body (support and/or shell) hydraulic circuit Removal/refit: locking counter-cam shock absorber

............................................................

BDM-043

................................................................................

BDM-045

Publication date : 13/11/2009

C - 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed wheel

.........................................................................................................

Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed retractable guide

Part C BDM-046

.......................................................................................

BDM-047

Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed neck guides

...............................................................................................

BDM-048

Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed body guides

...............................................................................................

BDM-049

Removal/refit: seal and compensation springs (holding thrust bar) (HR) Removal / fitting a "TORNADO" solenoid valve

.................................................

BDM-050

.......................................................................................

BDM-063

Removal/refitting of an upper stretching stop shock absorber

.................................................................

Removal/refitting of the "TORNADO" solenoid valve flow rate limiters

BDM-072

.................................................................

BDM-075

...........................................................................................

BDM-076

.............................................................................................................

BDM-095

Draining of the hydraulic system of the mold base (and neck) Draining of the hydraulic system of the oven Reconditioning the oven spindles

BDM-069

....................................................

Reconditioning nozzle cylinder distributer

................................................................................................

Removal/Refit - silencers on the mold support unit solenoid valve

BDM-106

......................................................................

BDM-107

© SIDEL

Removal/Refit - mold support unit compensation solenoid

BDM-098

..........................................................

C - 2/2

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/4

BDM-001

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: mold support unit shock absorber

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Replace the shock absorber (1) with an identical shock absorber. Check the references on the absorbers so as not to confuse them with other absorbers on the machine. Make sure that the mold support unit is secured in the open position before attempting any work on it, see procedure "BSU-001.

1-006030-01-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS - cold molds. Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

3 2 7 1

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts - Shock absorber (1). Consumables None Specific tools - locking system holding brace (2), - tool for adjusting the shock absorbers, - 44,00 x 32 thin flat-head wrench.

1-006053-05-xx.svg

7

4

5

6

1

PROCEDURE Removal Do not activate the low pressure air system in the JOG implementation window.

© SIDEL

1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013. 2- Bring the mold support unit around to your working position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013. 3- Unlock and open the mold support unit manually, see procedure "BSU-001. Place the holding brace (2) on the right mold support unit support block (3), facing the lock, see procedure "BSU-001.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-010178-02-xx.svg

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Removal/refit: mold support unit shock absorber

BDM-001

2/4

4- Remove the nut (4). 5- Remove the washer (5). 6- Remove the protective cover (7). 7- Loosen the nut (6). 8- Remove the shock absorber (1). Refit 9- Remove the locking system holding brace (2), see procedure "BSU-001. 10- Close the mold support unit manually, see procedure "BSU-001. 11- Screw in the shock absorber (1) fully into the right support block (3) on the mold support unit. Adjustments without the tooling (8) :

F Check the type of shock absorber (1) on the rear part (A). - Is it a "ENIDINE" type shock absorber (1)? · Screw in the shock absorber (1) to obtain the distance X=15,2 ±0,2 mm between the body of the absorber (1) and the thrust (9). - Is it a "SANA 001" type shock absorber (1)? · Screw in the shock absorber (1) to obtain the distance X=11,7 +0/-0,4 mm between the body of the absorber (1) and the thrust (9). 12- Go to step 15 . Adjustments with the tooling (8) :

X

9

1 1-008051-02-xx.svg

9

3

1

A

6

© SIDEL

1-006052-04-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 3/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-001

Removal/refit: mold support unit shock absorber

2

F Check that the dimension of the tooling corresponds to the value X of the type of shock absorber (1) being set up. 13- Position the shock absorber adjustmen tooling (8). F Check that the bore on the absorber adjustment tooling (8) is able to receive the absorber rod (1) when screwed in. 14- Screw in the shock absorber (1) right up to the adjustment tooling (8). F Check that the shock absorber adjustment tooling (8) is straight, and fully flush with the mold support unit and the absorber body (1). 15- Fit the nut (6) and tighten. 16- Unlock and open the mold support unit manually, see procedure "BSU-001. Place the holding brace (2) on the right mold support unit support block (3), facing the lock, see procedure "BSU-001. 17- Remove the shock absorber adjustmnt tooling (8). 18- Position the protective over (7). 19- Position the washer (5). 20- Tighten the nut (4). 21- Remove the locking system holding brace (2), see procedure "BSU-001. 22- Close the mold support unit manually, see procedure "BSU-001. BEFORE YOU FINISH 23- Remove the locking system holding brace (2), see procedure "BSU-001. 24- Close the mold support unit manually, see procedure "BSU-001. 25- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

8

6

1

1-010179-02-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: mold support unit shock absorber

BDM-001

4/4

© SIDEL

2

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/4

BDM-002

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: solenoid valve assembly "TORNADO"

2

GENERAL INFORMATION During the warranty period only the "TORNADO" solenoid valve assembly may be replaced. The stretching rod and the process air both pass through the "TORNADO" solenoid valves and the nozzle cylinder. The "TORNADO" solenoid valve assembly and the nozzle cylinder are potential sources of both biological and chemical contamination. Do not remove the nozzle cylinder.

1-006030-01-xx.svg

Follow the hygiene precautions.

10

Ensure that no foreign bodies are allowed to enter the "TORNADO" solenoid valve assembly or the nozzle cylinder.

9

2

8

8

4

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

12 3

1

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts - solenoid valve assembly "TORNADO" on base. Consumables - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - torque wrench 10 to 20 N.m. PROCEDURE Removal 1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU -013. 2- Bring the mold support unit around to your working position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU -013.

© SIDEL

Turn off the power and utility supplies to the machine, see procedure "BCU-012. 3456-

5

15

Remove the stretching rod , see procedure "BDM -026. Block the orifice (1). Disconnect the hose (2). Disconnect the hose (3). Publication date : 13/11/2009

11 1-006449-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Removal/refit: solenoid valve assembly "TORNADO"

7- Disconnect the hose (4). 8- Disconnect the hose (5). 9- Disconnect the hose (6) (from the mold support unit). 10- Remove the bolts (7). 11- Remove the electrical connectors (8). 12- Remove the electrical connector (9) from the sensor (10). 13- Remove the 4 fixing bolts (11). 14- Remove the "TORNADO" solenoid valve assembly (12). 15- Block the orifice (13). 16- Disconnect the hose (6). Refit 17- Connect the hose (6) to the "TORNADO" solenoid valve assembly (12). 18- Unplug the orifice (13). 19- Clean and check the seals (14 ; 15). · If the seal (14) is worn replace it, see procedure "BDM -032. · If the seal (15) is worn replace it, see procedure "BDM -032. 20- Use a clean dry cloth to clean the "TORNADO" solenoid valve assembly (12). 21- Clean the nozzle cylinder (16) using a clean dry cloth. 22- Position the "TORNADO" solenoid valve assembly (12) on the nozzle cylinder (16). 23- First tightening; tighten the bolts (11) crosswise to a torque of 10 N.m. 24- Second tightening; tighten the bolts (11) crosswise to a torque of 20 N.m. 25- Reconnect the electrical connector (9) to the sensor (10).

Part C BDM-002

2/4

7

6

1-006450-01-xx.svg

13 14

16

1-006058-02-xx.svg

Always follow the references when connecting the electrical connectors (8) to the corresponding solenoid valve functions. The electrical connector references (8) commence with: - "PB" for the preblow solenoid. - "E" for the exhaust solenoid. - "B" for the blowing solenoid. - "R" for the recovery solenoid valve.

© SIDEL

Make sure the seals are on the electrical connectors (8).

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 3/4

BDM-002

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: solenoid valve assembly "TORNADO"

26- Fit the electrical connectors (8). 27- Tighten the bolts (7). 28- Reconnect the hose (5). 29- Reconnect the hose (4). 30- Reconnect the hose (3). 31- Reconnect the hose (2). 32- Reconnect the hose (6) to the mold support unit. 33- Fit the stretching rod , see procedure "BDM -026. 34- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

6

BEFORE YOU FINISH 35- Test the "TORNADO" solenoid valves (12) and the nozzle cylinder (16), see procedure "BPU-006.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

2

12

1-006059-02-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: solenoid valve assembly "TORNADO"

BDM-002

4/4

© SIDEL

2

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-003

Removal/refit: transfer arms

2

GENERAL INFORMATION The procedures for removing and replacing preform and bottle transfer arms are identical. MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

1-006030-02-xx.svg

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables None Specific tools - transfer arm removal/refit tool (1). PROCEDURE Removal 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Open the vision system, see procedure "BCU-036. 3- Bring the transfer arm around to your working position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

3;4

7

Follow the assembly direction indicated on the tooling (1). 4- Pull the grip supports (2) and position the tooling (1). 5- Remove the bolts (3) and the washers (4). 6- Remove the transfer arms (5). 7- Remove the wrench (1). Refit 5

2

© SIDEL

1-010330-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Removal/refit: transfer arms

8- Pull the grip supports (2) and position the tooling (1). 9- Position the transfer arm (5). 10- Position the washers (4). 11- Tighten the bolts (3). 12- Remove the wrench (1).

F Check the height of the transfer arm (5), see procedure "BRM-002. · If necesssary, set the height of the transfer arm (5), see procedure "BRM-002. F Check the positions of the followers (6) on the cams (7). · If necessary, set the positions of the rollers (6), see procedure "BDM-038. 13- Close the vision system, see procedure "BCU-036.

BDM-003 3;4

2/2

3;4

1 2

BEFORE YOU FINISH 14- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013. 15- Close the safety doors.

The procedure is now complete.

6

5

6

© SIDEL

1-010318-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-005

Removal/refit:low pressure air circuit filters

2

MACHINE STATUS - all machine power procedure "BCU-012.

and

utilities

turned

off,

see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts - filter 40 µm(1), - filter 5 µm(2), . - filter 0,01 µm (only when the preform ionisation options is fitted on the 3M UV rail and the infeed rail). Consumables - Clean, dry cloths, - vaseline, - latex gloves. Specific tools - strap wrench.

1-006030-04-xx.svg

PROCEDURE Removal 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine.

3

F Check that the valve (3) is closed and locked off.

The pressure gauge (4) indicates the pressure in the circuit.

4

2- Depress the locking lug (12) and keep it pressed in. 5

11

© SIDEL

1-006067-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Removal/refit:low pressure air circuit filters

Part C BDM-005

2/4

3- Turn the bowl (5) by a 1/4 and remove it. 4- Repeat steps 2 to 3 to remove the second bowl (5).

8 12

9

5

1-006066-01-xx.svg

5- Unscrew and remove the support (6). 6- Remove the filter 40 µm(1). 7- Loosen and remove the filter 5 µm(2). Refit 8- Clean the support (6) using a clean, dry cloth.

9 8

6

2

1-006064-01-xx.svg

6 7

1

1-006065-01-xx.svg

© SIDEL

9- Clean the seal (7) and inspect it. · If the seal (7) is worn replace it. 10- Clean the bases (8 ; 9). 11- Clean the bowls (5). 12- Clean and check the seals (10). · If the seals (10) are worn, replace them. 13- Position the filter 40 µm(1). 14- Tighten the support (6). 15- Fit the filter 5 µm(2). 16- Refit the bowls (5).

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 3/4

BDM-005

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit:low pressure air circuit filters

2

17- Loosen the connectors (11) as far as possible. 10

BEFORE YOU FINISH 18- Release the valve (3). 19- Open the valve (3).

The low pressure air circuit is now turned on. The pressure gauge (4) indicates the pressure in the circuit.

F Make sure that the circuit is airtight. 20- Close the safety doors. The procedure is now complete.

5

© SIDEL

1-006022-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit:low pressure air circuit filters

BDM-005

4/4

© SIDEL

2

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-006

Removal/refit: high pressure air circuit filters

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Replacement of a high pressure air circuit filter implies replacing all of the machine's high pressure air circuit filters. Danger - high pressure. The procedure for removing and replacing the high pressure air circuit filters is identical to that for the 2 filters on the 2 filtration lines. 1-006030-04-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS - all machine power procedure "BCU-012.

14

and

utilities

turned

off,

4

see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts - filter (1) , - O-ring (2). Consumables - latex gloves. Specific tools - filter wrench (3). PROCEDURE Main supply interface panel filter Removal 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Close the valve (4).

© SIDEL

The high pressure air system is now isolated. F Wait until the circuit has been completely purged. F Control the absence of pressure on the pressure gauges (5 ; 14). 3- Lock out the valve (4).

Publication date : 13/11/2009

9

6

7

5 1-007859-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Removal/refit: high pressure air circuit filters

Part C BDM-006

4- Loosen the connector (6). 5- Remove the automatic purge (7). 6- Loosen the flow valve (8) but do not remove it. 7- Remove the bowl (9) using the filter wrench (3). 8- Remove the nut (10). 9- Remove the collar (11). 10- Remove the filter (1) .

2/4

8 9 3

1-006321-01-xx.svg

11- Remove the seal (2). Refit 12- Clean the base (12) using a clean, dry cloth. 13- Clean the bowl (9) using a clean, dry cloth. 14- Position the seal (2).

12

Always wear clean, dry gloves. Hold the filter by its edges (1) . 1

Never touch the filtering section of the filter unit (1) . 10

11 1-006322-01-xx.svg

15- Partly remove the packaging from the upper part of the filter (1) .

9

2

Do not remove the packaging from the filter body (1) .

F Check the condition and the position of the seal (13). 16- Position the filter (1) . 17- Position the collar (11). 18- Tighten the nut (10). 19- Remove all of the packaging. 20- Lightly tighten the bowl (9) using the filter wrench (3). 21- Tighten up the screw (8). 22- Position the automatic purge (7).

© SIDEL

1-006323-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 3/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-006

Removal/refit: high pressure air circuit filters

23- Tighten the connector (6). Air recycling system filter Removal 24- Bring the filter (A) round to your working position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

2

13

Turn off the power and utility supplies to the machine, see procedure "BCU-012. 25- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine.

F Check that the valve (4) is closed and padlocked. F Control the absence of pressure on the pressure gauges (5 ; 14). 26- Loosen and remove the envelope (15) by inserting the pin wrench into the slot (16). 27- Remove the O-ring (17). 28- Loosen the filter element (18) from the filter block (19) and remove. Refit 29- Clean the envelope (15) using a clean dry cloth. 30- Clean the filter block (19) using the clean dry cloth.

1

1-006324-01-xx.svg

19

A

Always wear clean, dry gloves. Handle the filter element (18) by its edges. Never touch the filter section of the filter element (18). Check the reference of the filter element to ensure you do not confuse it with other filter elements fitted on the machine.

18

31- Partly remove the wrapping from the threaded section of the filter element (18). Do not remove the packaging from the body of the filter element (18).

1-007396-03-xx.svg

21

20

F Check the condition and the position of the 2 seals (20). 32- Grease the thread (21) on the (18) filter and the seals (20) using vaseline. Do not apply grease to the filter section of the filter element (18). 18 1-007395-03-xx.svg

© SIDEL

33- Position the filter element (18). 34- Tighten up the filter element (18). 35- Remove all of the packaging.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Removal/refit: high pressure air circuit filters

36- Position the O-ring (17). 37- Lightly grease the thread (22) on the envelope (15). 38- Position the envelope (15). 39- Tighten the envelope (15) using the pin wrench inserted in the slot (16).

Part C BDM-006

4/4

17

22

15

16

BEFORE YOU FINISH 40- Unpadlock the valve (4). 41- Gently open the valve (4).

The high pressure air circuit is now turned on. The pressure gauge (5) indicates the pressure in the circuit.

1-007397-03-xx.svg

© SIDEL

F Make sure that the circuit is airtight. 42- Press the "TEST" key on the automatic purge (7). F Check that the automatic purge functions correctly (7). 43- Close the safety doors. The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/6

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-007

Removal/refit: hydraulic circuit filters

2

GENERAL INFORMATION For further information, please refer to chapter "Hydraulic system", in the User manual. Depending on the machine configuration, the external hydraulic module can be integrated in the thermoregulator or independent. For more information on how the thermoregulator works, consult the technical documentation delivered with this equipment.. The number of external hydraulc modules varies according to the production set-up. The external hydraulic module is supplied with water or oil depending on the process. The removal/refit procedure for the filters of an external hydraulic module is the same for every filter. The hydraulic interface contains little water. Intervention on hot hydraulic circuits : Replacement of a filter on an external hydraulic module may be done while the machine is in production. In these cases always follow the following safety instructions: Wear safety equipment for body, hands and face. Hot metal, risk of burns. There is a risk of splashing of fluids at high temperature and pressure. MACHINE STATUS - thermoregulator - cold, - all machine power and procedure "BCU-012.

utilities

turned

off,

see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

© SIDEL

Parts - filter(s) . Consumables - cleaning agent "NET A04", - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - Clean, dry brush, - nylon brush, - large tank.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-006030-66-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Removal/refit: hydraulic circuit filters

Part C BDM-007

2/6

PROCEDURE Removal/refit of a filter on an external hydraulic module Removal 1- Open the doors of the external hydraulic module.. If the machine is in production, verify that the valve (1) of the filtration line in use is open. 2- Close the valve (1) of the filter to be replaced. Wait for the maximum temperature drop of the isolated filtration line befor intervening. 3456-

Remove the insulating cover (2). Place the tank under the drain plug (3). Remove the drain plug (3). Remove the plug (4).

2

1

3

F 789-

1-007969-04-xx.svg

Wait until all the fluid has drained out. Remove the 4 bolts (5). Remove the plug (6). Remove the filter (7) . If the filter (7) is over saturated, check the quality of the fluid and of the upstream circuit.

F Check the condition of the filter (7). · If the filter (7) is dirty, clean it. · If the filter (7) is deteriorated or over-saturated, replace it. Refit 10- Clean the filter block (8) using a nylon brush, cleaning fluid "NET A04" and a clean, dry cloth. 11- Clean the stoppers (4 ; 6) using a clean, dry cloth.

5

4

1

© SIDEL

1-007970-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 3/6

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-007

Removal/refit: hydraulic circuit filters

12- Clean and check the seals (9 ; 10). · If the seals (9 ; 10) are worn, replace them. 13- Place the filter (7) on the plug cap (6). 14- Place the plug cap (6)/filter (7) assembly in/on the filter block (8).

2

9

4 1-007971-01-xx.svg

Cross-tighten the screws (5). 15- Hand-tighten the screws (5). 16- Hand-tighten the plug (4). 17- If necessary, clean the assembly using a clean, dry cloth. 18- Install the insulating cover . 19- Fit the drain plug (3). 20- Close the external hydraulic module doors.

8

10

Dispose of the contents of the tank in accordance with applicable legislation. Removal/refitting of the hydraulic panel filters ( Mold support unit )

7

6

© SIDEL

1-007972-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Removal/refit: hydraulic circuit filters

Removal 21- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 22- Close the valves (11). 23- Position the tank under the filter blocks (12). 24- Remove the stoppers (13). 25- Wait until the water has completely drained out. 26- Remove the filters (14).

Part C BDM-007

4/6

11

If the filters (14) are over-saturated check the quaity of the water in the upstream circuits.

F Check the condition of the filters (14). · If the filters (14) are dirty, clean them. · If the filters (14) are worn or over-saturated, replace them. Refit 27- Clean the filters (12) using water, a brush and a clean, dry cloth. 28- Clean the stoppers (13) using a clean, dry cloth.

12

13

1-007351-06-xx.svg

29- Clean and check the seals (15). · If the seals (15) are worn, replace them. 30- Position the filters (14) in the stoppers (13). 31- Position the stopper (13) / filter (14) assemblies in the filter blocks (12).

13

15

© SIDEL

1-006328-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 5/6

BDM-007

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: hydraulic circuit filters

2

32- Lightly tighten the stoppers (13). 33- Wipe down the hydraulic interface using a clean, dry cloth. 34- Open the valves (11).

12

Dispose of the contents of the tank in accordance with applicable legislation.

14 13 1-006327-02-xx.svg

Removal/refit of the hydraulic panel filter ( oven ) Removal 35- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 36- Close the valves (16). 37- Place the tank under the filter block (17). 38- Remove the plug (18).

F Wait until the water has completely drained out. 39- Remove the filter (19) .

17

16 1-007485-03-xx.svg

If the filter (19) is over saturated, check the quality of the fluid and of the upstream circuit.

F Check the condition of the filter (19). · If the filter (19) is dirty, clean it. · If the filter (19) is deteriorated or over-saturated, replace it. Refit 40- Clean the filter block (17) using the clean dry cloth. 41- Clean the plug (18) using a clean, dry cloth. 42- Clean the seal (20) and inspect it. · If the seal (20) is worn replace it. 18

17

© SIDEL

1-008113-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Removal/refit: hydraulic circuit filters

BDM-007

6/6

43- Place the filter (19) on the plug cap (18). 44- Place the plug cap (18)/filter (19) assembly in/on the filter block (17). 45- Hand-tighten the plug (18). 46- If necessary, clean the assembly using a clean, dry cloth. 47- Open the valves (16). Dispose of the contents of the tank in accordance with applicable legislation. BEFORE YOU FINISH 48- Close the safety doors. 49- Check the circuit seals while the machine is in operation.

19

20

18

The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-008114-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/4

BDM-008

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: nozzle seals.

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Never apply grease when fitting the nozzle seal (1). The following procedure is carried out on cold molds. Some procedures may, however, require an intervention on a hot mold. In these cases always follow the following safety instructions: - Wear protective clothing on the body, hands and face during any work on the mold support unit. Depending on the machine configuration, the nozzle seal (1) will come with a flat washer (6) or a threaded washer (7). When changing a production article, replace the nozzle seal (1) and the washer, (6) or (7). MACHINE STATUS - cold molds. Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts - nozzle seal (1). Consumables - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - nozzle seal holding tool (2), - ring pull tool (3).

© SIDEL

PROCEDURE

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-006030-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Removal/refit: nozzle seals.

Part C BDM-008

2/4

Removal Do not activate the low pressure air system in the JOG implementation window. 1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013. 2- Bring the mold support unit around to your working position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

3

2

1-006329-01-xx.svg

3- Hold the nozzle tip (4) using the nozzle tip holding tool (2) and remove the ring (5) using the ring pull tool (3).

4

If there is a threaded washer (7), do not replace it. 4- Remove the washer (6). Do not damage the thread on the ring (5). 5- Remove the nozzle seal (1). Refit 6- Clean the nozzle tip (4), the ring (5) and the washer (6) using a clean, dry cloth. 7- Replace the nozzle seal (1). 2

5

3 1-007790-01-xx.svg

4

1 6 5

© SIDEL

1-007346-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 3/4

BDM-008

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: nozzle seals.

If there is a threaded washer (7), make sure that it is fully tightened. 8- Position the washer (6). 9- Position the ring (5) on the nozzle tip (4). 10- Hold the nozzle tip (4) using the tooling (2) and tighten the ring (5) using the ring pull (3). 11- Bring the next blow station around to your working position using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013. 12- Repeat as above, from step 3 until you have replaced all of the nozzle seals (1).

2

4

7

5

1

BEFORE YOU FINISH 13- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

© SIDEL

F Check all of the nozzle seals (1) with the machine in production. The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-010393-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: nozzle seals.

BDM-008

4/4

© SIDEL

2

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-010

Removal/refit: spindle chain links

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Always use original parts to ensure that they have been commissioned and self-lubricated (except when fitting new parts). MACHINE STATUS - oven cold. Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

1-006030-21-xx.svg

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - outer elastic ring grip. PROCEDURE Removal 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Slightly loosen the spindle chain to free the spindle sprockets (1) (the spring and washer assembly is about 300 mm long), see procedure "BRM-003. 3- Note the respective positions of the spindle sprockets (1) and the sheaths (2) on the links (3 ; 4). 4- Remove the spindle sprockets (1) on the relevant link, see procedure "BDM-013. 5- Remove the elastic rings (5). 6- Remove the sheaths (2).

2

3

The spindle chain may come away. Do not degrease the sheaths (2).

4

1

© SIDEL

1-006193-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Removal/refit: spindle chain links

7- Remove the H link (3). 8- Repeat steps 4 to 7 , to remove the required number of H links (3). Refit

Part C BDM-010

2/2

2 4

3

Do not degrease the sheaths (2).

F Check the condition and cleanness of the H links (3). F Check the condition and cleanness of the articulated links (4). F Check the condition and the cleanness of the bushings (6). F Check the orientation of the seal plane (7) on the bushings (6). 9- Position the articulated links (4) in the H links (3). Always follow the orientation of the articulated links (4) and the H links (3) with regard to the original setting. 10- Position the sheaths (2) in the links (3 ; 4). 11- Position the elastic rings (5). 12- Repeat steps 9 to 11 .

The spindle chain is now secure. 13- Fit the spindle sprockets (1), see procedure "BDM-013. 14- Set the spindle chain tension, see procedure "BRM-003.

5 1-006192-01-xx.svg

7 4

6

1-006194-01-xx.svg

BEFORE YOU FINISH 15- Close the safety doors.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/4

BDM-011

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: molds and mold bases

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Never unscrew the fixing bolts holding the mold base onto the spacer as this may affect their precise positioning. Make sure that the mold support unit is secured in the open position before attempting any work on it, see procedure "BSU-001. Working on hot molds or hot mold bases : The following procedure is carried out on cold molds. Some procedures may, however, require an intervention on a hot mold. In these cases always follow the following safety instructions: Wear protective clothing on the body, hands and face during any work on the mold support unit. Protective equipment must be in accordance with the stipulated risks. Hot metal, risk of burns. There is a risk of splashing of fluids at high temperature and pressure. MACHINE STATUS - cold molds. Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

© SIDEL

Parts None Consumables - "LUB A15" grease, - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - locking system holding brace , - Mold base removal/refit assistance (1), - torque wrench 10 to 50 N.m, - Clean, dry brush. PROCEDURE

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-006030-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Removal/refit: molds and mold bases

Wear protective glasses.

BDM-011

2/4

5

1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013. 2- Bring the mold support unit around to your working position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013. 3- Unlock and open the mold support unit manually, see procedure "BSU-001. Insert the locking system procedure "BSU-001.

Part C

holding

brace,

3

4

2

1

see

F Working on hot molds or hot mold bases. - If yes. · Stop the thermoregulator(s). 4- Shut off the supply to the hydraulic circuit, see procedure "BCU-008. The mold body water circuit is closed. The mold base water circuit is now closed. 5- Purge the circuit of a few centiliters, see procedure "BDM-043. Mold base Removal 6- Disconnect the hoses (2). 7- Connect the mold base removal/refit assistance (1) to the carriage (3) via the connector (4). The carriage (3) is no longer carrying the mold base (5).

1-006195-01-xx.svg

Never unscrew the fixing bolts holding the mold base onto the spacer as this may affect their precise positioning. 8- Remove the mold base (5). Refit 9- Clean the carriage (3) using a clean, dry cloth. 10- Grease the carriage (3) using the "LUB A15" grease and a paintbrush. 11- Position the mold base (5). 12- Disconnect the mold base removal/refit assistance (1). 13- Reconnect the mold base removal/refit assistance (1) to its support (6). 14- Reconnect the hoses (2).

6 1

© SIDEL

1-006196-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 3/4

BDM-011

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: molds and mold bases

Mold Removal 15- Loosen the screws (7) but do not remove them. 16- Remove the flange (8). 17- Tilt out and remove the mold shell (9). 18- Repeat steps 15 to 17 , to remove the opposite mold (9). Refit 19- Clean all of the contact surfaces of the mold shell (10) using a clean, dry cloth. 20- Grease the contact surfaces of the mold shell supports (10) applying the "LUB A15" grease with a paintbrush.

2

10 8 7

1-006197-01-xx.svg

21- Position the mold shell (9) on its support (10). 22- Position the flange (8) so that it rests on the mold shell (9). Tighten thhe bolts (7) to a torque of 16,7 N.m. Make sure that you use the right class of bolt (7) if you are replacing them. The bolt (7) class is 12-9. 23- Tighten the bolts (7). 24- Repeat steps 21 to 23 , to fit the opposite mold shell (9).

10

9

If the right mold shell is fitted with a heat sensor, reconnect it during this procedure. BEFORE YOU FINISH 1-006198-01-xx.svg

25- Grease the mold cavities, see procedure "BGM-011. 26- Remove the locking system holding brace , see procedure "BSU-001. 27- Close the mold support unit manually, see procedure "BSU-001.

8

© SIDEL

F Make sure there is no excess stress when the mold support unit closes. F Make sure that the mold shells (9) do not come into contact with the mold base (5). 28- Turn on the air and water supplies, see procedure "BCU-005. The mold body water circuit is open. The mold base water circuit is open. F Working on hot molds or hot mold bases. - If yes. · Start the related thermoregulator(s).. F Check for leaks. 29- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013. The procedure is now complete.

10

Publication date : 13/11/2009

9

1-006199-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: molds and mold bases

BDM-011

4/4

© SIDEL

2

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-012

Removal/refit: spindle tips

1

MACHINE STATUS - all machine power procedure "BCU-012, - oven cold.

and

utilities

turned

off,

see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts - bayonette spindle tip (2). Consumables - Clean, dry cloths, - alcohol at 70 % does not need to be rinsed (non-residual). Specific tools - Clean, dry brush.

1-006030-22-xx.svg

PROCEDURE Removal 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Remove the ejector (1) manually. 3- Remove the spindle tip (2) by hand. If more force is required, use a hex wrench to remove the spindle tip.

1

1-006204-01-xx.svg

Refit 4- Clean the end of the spindle shaft (3) and the new spindle tip (2) using a clean, dry cloth. 5- Position the new spindle tip (2). 6- Clip the spindle tip (2).

2

3

© SIDEL

1-007220-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

1

Removal/refit: spindle tips

7- Clean the spindle tip (2) and the ejector (1) using the clean, dry cloth.

Part C BDM-012

2/2

2

Only use alcohol at 70 % and no other cleaning product as this may damage the parts. 8- Disinfect the spindle tip (2) and the ejector (1) using a paintbrush dipped in alcohol at 70 %. 9- Clip the ejector (1). BEFORE YOU FINISH 10- Close the safety doors.

1-008766-01-xx.svg

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BDM-013

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: spindle sprockets

2

GENERAL INFORMATION The denominations "upper" and "lower" sprockets designate the sprockets at the oven wheel with the spindle tip pointing downwards. MACHINE STATUS - oven cold, Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

1-006030-21-xx.svg

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts - spindle sprocket. Consumables - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - outer elastic ring grip. PROCEDURE Removal Do not activate the low pressure air system in the JOG implementation window. 1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013. 2- Position the spindle sprocket you need to remove oppositeor working position using the JOG system.

1 3

2

6

© SIDEL

1-006207-03-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Removal/refit: spindle sprockets

BDM-013

2/2

3- Remove the spindle tip , see procedure "BDM-012. To remove the lower sprocket, first remove the 2 adjacent upper sprockets. 4- Remove the elastic ring (1). 5- Remove the bayonet ring (2), spring (3) and support ring (4).

4

3

2 1-010304-02-xx.svg

6- Remove the sprocket (5) / shaft (6) assembly. Refit Never grease the shaft (6), as it is lubricated by the selflubricating bushings. 7- Clean the sprocket (5) using a clean, dry cloth. 8- Position the sprocket (5) / shaft (6) assembly in the sheath (7). 9- Position the bayonet ring (2). 10- Position the elastic ring (1).

7 6

11- Fit the spindle tip, see procedure "BDM-012. BEFORE YOU FINISH

5

12- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

1-006206-02-xx.svg

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/4

BDM-014

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: stretching cylinder

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Work to be carried out at height: use the equipment fitted on the machine and always follow current safety regulations. This procedure must be carried out with the molds at process temperature where this is greater than 60 °C. MACHINE STATUS - molds at production temperature, - the machine is stopped, Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005, - hydraulic circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

1-006030-18-xx.svg

PROCEDURE Removal 1- Advance the stretching cylinder (1) in question on the horizontal part of the stretching cam (2), using manual rotation, see procedure "BCU-014. 2- Switch off the low pressure air supply, see procedure "BCU-008. 3- Isolate the main machine power circuit, see procedure "BCU-011. 4- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 5- Disconnect the hoses (3).

14

1

4

13

2

5

6

16

© SIDEL

The control block (4) is now isolated from the low pressure air circuit. 6- Remove the nut (5). 7- Remove the coil (6).

Publication date : 13/11/2009

3 1-008057-02-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Removal/refit: stretching cylinder

8- Purge the stretching cylinder (1) using the button (7).

The stretching cylinder (1) is no longer blocked in the upposition and the rod can slide freely.

1

Part C BDM-014

2/4

8

The indicator (8) shows the level of residual pressure in the cylinder. 9- Remove the nut (9). 10- Remove the fixing bolts (10).

7 12

Do not lose the fixing bolt washers. 11- Loosen the nut (11). 12- Unscrew the rod (12) on the stretching cylinder (1) using the pipe wrench . 13- Remove the stretching cylinder (1).

11 15

The slide (13) rests on the stretching cam (2).

1-008059-01-xx.svg

Refit Carry out the procedure on the horizontal part of the stretching cam (2), the slide (13) in the up-position. 14- Position the stretching cylinder (1) on the support (14). 15- Screw the rod (12) into the ball-joint (15). 16- Tighten the nut (11). 17- Position the fixing bolts (10) on the stretching cylinder (1). 18- Tighten the fixing bolts (10). 19- Fit the nut (9) and tighten. 20- Reconnect the hoses (3). 21- Fit the coil (6). 22- Tighten the nut (5). 23- Turn on the low pressure air supply to the machine, see procedure "BCU-005. 24- Close the safety doors. 25- Turn on the main machine circuit, see procedure "BCU-002. 26- Press the (18) key.

17

10

9 1-008058-01-xx.svg

The "Settings" family appears.

The (A) window appears. 28- Press the (20) key. The low pressure air supply to the blowing station is now active. The stretching cylinder (1) stops at the up-position. F Make sure that there are no leaks on the pneumatic circuit. F Check the gap between the roller (16) and the stretching cam (2), see procedure "BRM-044. F Check the setting of the upper stretching cylinder stop shock absorber (17), see procedure "BDM-069. 29- Close the safety doors. 30- Press the (20) key.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

© SIDEL

27- Press the (19) key.

Part C 3/4

BDM-014

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: stretching cylinder

2

The low pressure air supply to the blowing station is now cut off. BEFORE YOU FINISH Do not activate the low pressure air system in the JOG implementation window. 31- Position the stretching cylinder (1) at the rear of the machine using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013. 32- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013. 33- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 34- Purge the stretching cylinder (1) using the button (7).

F Check the slide guide (13). 35- Close the safety doors. 36- Enter the number of the blowing station using the keys (21). The number of the blowing station selected appears in the zone (B). 37- Press the (20) key. The low pressure air supply to the blowing station is now active. The stretching cylinder (1) stops at the up-position. 38- Press the (22) key. The stretching cylinder stops at the down-position. 39- Press the (22) key. The stretching cylinder (1) stops at the up-position. 40- Press the (20) key. The low pressure air supply to the blowing station is now cut off. 41- Close the window(s) and return to the "Welcome" family. The procedure is now complete.

18

19 1-010353-30-02.svg

A

22

20 B

21

© SIDEL

1-010342-07-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: stretching cylinder

BDM-014

4/4

© SIDEL

2

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-015

Removal/refit: nozzle cylinder

3

GENERAL INFORMATION The stretching rod and the process air both pass through the "TORNADO" solenoid valves and the nozzle cylinder. The "TORNADO" solenoid valve assembly and the nozzle cylinder are potential sources of both biological and chemical contamination. MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

1-006030-01-xx.svg

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - light "LOCTITE 222" threadlock, - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - stretching rod centering tool (11 ; 12), - dummy stretching rod (10), - torque wrench 10 to 20 N.m. PROCEDURE Removal 1- Advance the desired blowing station until it is opposite the work station using manual rotation, see procedure "BCU-014. Turn off the power and utility supplies to the machine, see procedure "BCU-012. 2- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 3- Remove the stretching rod , see procedure "BDM-026. If required, you can leave the base block (1) for the "TORNADO" solenoid valves on the nozzle cylinder (2), see procedure "BDM-002.

1 2 8

© SIDEL

4- Remove the fixing bolts (3) from the "TORNADO" solenoid valves base block (1). 5- Hold the base block (1) in the raised position.

3

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-010698-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

3

Removal/refit: nozzle cylinder

Part C BDM-015

2/4

6- Disconnect the nozzle cylinder (2) control distributor (5) electrical connectors (4). 7- Disconnect the nozzle cylinder (2) low-pressure air supply hoses (6). The bolts (7) are fitted with light "LOCTITE 222" threadlock. You may find some difficulty loosening the fixing bolts (7).

1 4

8- Remove the 4 fixing bolts (7) from the nozzle cylinder (2) on the console (8). 9- Remove the nozzle cylinder (2).

5

2

6 14 1-010699-01-xx.svg

Refit 10- Clean the seal (9) and inspect it. · If the seal (9) is worn replace it, see procedure "BDM-032. 11- Clean the contact surfaces on the console (8) using a clean, dry cloth. 12- With the spacer (14) present, clean it using a clean, dry cloth and place it on the console (8). 13- Clean the contact surfaces on the nozzle cylinder (2) using a clean dry cloth. 14- Position the nozzle cyclinder (2) on the console (8).

2

8 7

1-006212-01-xx.svg

15- Position the base block (1) for the solenoid valves "TORNADO" on the nozzle cylinder using the 4 blocks (3). 16- First tightening; tighten the bolts (3) crosswise to a torque of 10 N.m. 17- Second tightening; tighten the bolts (3) crosswise to a torque of 20 N.m. Fit the bolts (7) having applied "LOCTITE 222" light threadlock.

2

8 1-006209-01-xx.svg

© SIDEL

18- Position the 4 fixing bolts (7) but do not tighten. 19- Fit the dummy stretching rod (10) in the nozzle cylinder (2) / base block (1) assembly. 20- Center the 2 stretching cylinder centering tools (11 ; 12) on the mold neck collar (13).

9

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 3/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-015

Removal/refit: nozzle cylinder

21- Lower the dummy stretching rod (10) htrough the centering tool (11 ; 12).

12

3 11

The nozzle cylinder (2) / (1) base block is centered.

The dummy stretching rod (10) should slide freely through the stretching rod centering tools (11 ; 12). 22- Tighten the fixing bolts (7) crosswise to a torque of 20 N.m.

1-007419-01-xx.svg

23- Connect the electrical connectors (4). 24- Reconnect the hoses (6).

10 11

13

12 1-007836-01-xx.svg

25- Remove the dummy stretching rod (10). 26- Remove the centering tools (11 ; 12). 27- Fit the stretching rod corresponding to your production set up, see procedure "BDM-026. BEFORE YOU FINISH 28- Close the safety doors.

1

F Check the solenoid valves "TORNADO" and the nozzle cylinder, see procedure "BPU-006. The procedure is now complete.

6 5 4 2

© SIDEL

1-010700-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: nozzle cylinder

BDM-015

4/4

© SIDEL

3

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/4

BDM-016

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: seal and compensation springs (single holding bar) (HR)

3

GENERAL INFORMATION Visually identifying the type of holding bar : - Standard holding bar (A), follow procedure "BDM-016". - Thrust holding bar (B), follow procedure "BDM-050". Make sure that the mold support unit is secured in the open position before attempting any work on it, see procedure "BSU-001. Do not damage the mold shells. 1-006030-01-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS

A

B

- cold molds. Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005. 1-007335-01-xx.svg

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts - 1 compensation seal (8), - 96 elastic rings (5). Consumables - Clean, dry cloths, - cleaning agent "Net A04". Specific tools - locking system holding brace , - set of thickness gauges , - 2 slings (9) supplied with the set of molds.

© SIDEL

PROCEDURE

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

3

Removal/refit: seal and compensation springs (single holding bar) (HR)

Removal 1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013. 2- Bring the mold support unit around to your working position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU -013. 3- Unlock and open the mold support unit manually, see procedure "BSU-001. 4- Insert the locking system holding brace, see procedure "BSU-001. 5- Disconnect the hydraulic lines from the left shell support (1) and the left mold shell (10). 6- Remove the nuts (2) and the washers (3). 7- Remove the external boxes (4). 8- Remove the elastic rings (5). 9- Remove the inner boxes (6). 10- Remove the left half-shell support (1) from the support block (7). 11- Remove the compensation seal (8). Refit

BDM-016

2/4

10

7

1 1-006318-03-xx.svg

6

X

3

2

4

Never apply grease when fitting the compensation seal (8). 12- Remove the grease from the left half-shell support (1) and the left support block (7) using a cloth dipped in cleaning agent "NET A04". 13- Position the new seal (8) on the left half-shell support (1). 14- Position the slings (9) to hold the seal (8) on the left half shell support (1). 15- Position the left half-shell support (1) in the left support block (7). 16- Position the inner boxes (6). 17- Position the elastic rings (5). 18- Position the outer boxes (4).

5

2 2

7 1-007317-01-xx.svg

19- Position the washers (3). 20- Tighten up the nuts (2) so that the left half shell support (1) is clamped against the left support block (7). 21- Remove the slings (9). Tighten the nuts (2) diagonally to position the left half shell support correctly (1).

8 1

1-006320-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

© SIDEL

22- Tighten the nuts (2) to obtain a gap of X = 1,2 +/-0,05 mm between the inner and outer boxes (6 ; 4). 23- Reconnect the hydraulic lines to the left shell support (1) and the left mold shell (10). 24- Remove the locking system holding brace , see procedure "BSU-001.

Part C 3/4

BDM-016

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: seal and compensation springs (single holding bar) (HR)

3

If there is any resistance when closing the mold support unit adjust the compensation system, see procedure "BRM-021. 25- Close the mold support unit manually, see procedure "BSU-001. 26- Bring the next blow station around to your working position using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013. 27- Repeat as above from step 3 until you have replaced all of the compensation seals and rings.

9

8

BEFORE YOU FINISH 28- Re-adjust the compensation system, see procedure "BRM-021. 29- Bring the next blow station around to your working position using the JOG system. 30- Repeat as above from step 28 until you have set up all of the mold suport units. 31- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU -013.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1

1-006458-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: seal and compensation springs (single holding bar) (HR)

BDM-016

4/4

© SIDEL

3

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BDM-017

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: stretching unit bottom thrust

1

GENERAL INFORMATION Replace the shock absorber (1) with an identical shock absorber. Check the references on the absorbers so as not to confuse them with other absorbers on the machine. MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

1-006030-01-xx.svg

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - Shock absorber (1). Specific tools None PROCEDURE Removal Do not activate the low pressure air system in the JOG implementation window. 1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013. 2- Bring the mold support unit around to your working position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013. 3- Purge the stretching cylinder using the button (2).

2 3

The stretching cylinder is no longer blocked in the upposition and the rod can slide freely. The indicator (3) indicates the pressure remaining in the cyclinder.

© SIDEL

4- Lower the slide (4) manually. 5- Remove the counter-nut (5). 6- Remove the nut (6). 7- Remove the absorber (1) on the slide (4). Refit 8- Clean the contact surfaces of the slide (4), the nut (6) and the counter nut (5) using a clean, dry cloth.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-006371-03-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

1

Removal/refit: stretching unit bottom thrust

9- Screw the new absorber (1) fully into the nut (6). 10- Screw the absorber (1)/nut (6) assembly fully into the slide (4). 11- Tighten the lock-nut (5). 12- Connect the JOG to zone "0" on the PCC, see procedure "BCU-013.

Part C BDM-017

2/2

1 4

5

6

1-006506-01-xx.svg

13- Press the (7) key.

The secure low pressure air system of the machine is supplied. The stretching cylinder stops at the up-position. 14- Press the (7) key. The secure low pressure air system of the machine is no longer supplied. 15- If necessary, repeat the previous steps from step 1 until the complete replacement of the dampers (1) of the lower stretch stop

7

1-010349-03-02.svg

BEFORE YOU FINISH 16- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BDM-018

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: upstream feed unit

1

MACHINE STATUS - infeed rail (1) and feed block (2) cleared of preforms, - all machine power and utilities turned off, see procedure "BCU -012. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools None

1-007021-07-xx.svg

PROCEDURE Removal 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 1

4

3

2 1-006216-01-xx.svg

2- If the optional UV rail is fitted, remove the panels (8). 3- Loosen the 2 cross-nuts (3). 4- Remove the 2 locking nuts (4). 5- Remove the bolts (5). 6- Remove the feed block (2). Refit 7- Clean the contact surfaces on the feed block (2) using a clean, dry cloth. 8- Position the feed block (2). 9- Tighten the bolts (5). 10- Tighten the cross-nuts (3 ; 4). 11- Make sure that the feed block (2) is fitted securely.

8

© SIDEL

1-006807-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

1

Removal/refit: upstream feed unit

BEFORE YOU FINISH

2

12- Check the gap at the roller (6), stabilizer rails (7), infeed rail (1) assembly using a preform. · Set the gap between the rails (6), see procedure "BRM -013. · Set the gap at the stabilizer rails (7), see procedure "BRM -017. · Set the infeed rail (1), see procedure "BRM -011.

5

Part C BDM-018

2/2

4

1-006215-01-xx.svg

13- If the optional UV rail is fitted, refit the panels (8). 14- Close the safety doors.

7

6

The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-006217-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BDM-019

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: downstream feed unit

1

MACHINE STATUS - rail and infeed wheel cleared of preforms. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools None 1-006030-10-xx.svg

PROCEDURE Removal 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 3

1

2 1-006218-02-xx.svg

The visual may be different depending on the machine model ad configuration.

3

2- Remove the pipe (1). 3- Remove the bolts (2). 4- Remove the feed block (3). If necessary change the infeed procedure "BDM-020, before refitting.

wheel,

see

1

Refit 5- Clean the contact surfaces on the feed block (3) using a clean, dry cloth. 6- Clean the infeed block (3). Position the infeed block (3) using the guide studs. 2 1-010468-01-xx.svg

© SIDEL

7- Fit the infeed block (3). 8- Tighten the bolts (2). 9- Fit the pipe (1).

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

1

Removal/refit: downstream feed unit

Part C BDM-019

2/2

BEFORE YOU FINISH 10- Close the safety doors.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-020

Removal/refit: preform infeed turntable

1

MACHINE STATUS - all machine power and utilities procedure "BCU-012, - infeed wheel cleared of preforms.

turned

off,

see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools None

1-006030-10-xx.svg

PROCEDURE Removal 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Remove the feed block (1), see procedure "BDM -019. 3- Remove the bolts (4). Move and retain the preform detection assembly (5) without removing it in order to withdraw the wheel (3).

3

2

1

4- Move the preform detection assembly (5).

© SIDEL

1-006084-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

1

Removal/refit: preform infeed turntable

5- Loosen the grip nut (2). 6- Remove the infeed wheel (3). Refit 7- Clean the infeed wheel (3) and its support using a clean, dry cloth.

BDM-020 4

2/2

5

position the wheel (3) using the guide studs. 8- Fit the infeed wheel (3). 9- Tighten the grip-nut (2). 10- Make sure that the infeed wheel is securely fitted. 11- Position the preform detection assembly (5). 12- Tighten the bolts (4). 13- Fit the infeed block (1). BEFORE YOU FINISH 1-007444-01-xx.svg

14- Close the safety doors.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-021

Removal/refit: infeed guide

1

MACHINE STATUS - all machine power and utilities procedure "BCU-012, - infeed wheel cleared of preforms.

turned

off,

see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools None

1-006030-10-xx.svg

PROCEDURE Removal 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Remove the bolts (3). Move and retain the preform detection assembly (4) without removing it in order to withdraw the infeed guide (2). 3- Move the preform detection assembly (4). 4- Loosen the grip nut (1). 5- Remove the infeed wheel (2).

3

4

© SIDEL

1-007444-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

1

Removal/refit: infeed guide

Part C BDM-021

2/2

Refit 6- Clean the infeed guide (2) and its support using a clean, dry cloth. Position the infeed guide (2) using the guide studs. 7- Fit the infeed guide (2). 8- Tighten the grip-nut (1). 9- Make sure that the infeed guide (2) is securely fitted. 10- Position the preform detection assembly (4). 11- Tighten the bolts (3). BEFORE YOU FINISH

1

12- Close the safety doors.

The procedure is now complete.

2

© SIDEL

1-006084-03-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-022

Removal/refit: infeed retractable guide

1

MACHINE STATUS - all machine power and utilities procedure "BCU-012, - infeed wheel cleared of preforms.

turned

off,

see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools None

1-006030-10-xx.svg

PROCEDURE Removal 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Remove the bolts (4).

4

Move and retain the preform detection assembly (5) without removing it in order to withdraw the infeed guide (1).

5

3- Move the preform detection assembly (5). 4- Pivot out the retractable infeed guide (1) manually.

1-007444-01-xx.svg

5- Loosen the grip nut (2). Refit 6- Clean the retractable infeed guide (1) and the mobile support (3) using a clean, dry cloth.

© SIDEL

Position the retractable infeed guide (1) using the guide studs. 7- Fit the retractable infeed guide (1) on the mobile support (3). 8- Tighten the grip-nut (2). 9- Make sure that the retractable infeed guide (1) is securely fitted. 10- Position the preform detection assembly (5). 11- Tighten the bolts (4).

1

2

3 1-006084-04-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

1

Removal/refit: infeed retractable guide

Part C BDM-022

2/2

BEFORE YOU FINISH 12- Close the safety doors.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BDM-023

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: oven wheel infeed turntable

1

GENERAL INFORMATION The oven wheel infeed wheel is composed of 3 sectors each of the same dimension. Each sector is carries a reference at its edge. MACHINE STATUS - all machine power and utilities procedure "BCU-012, - infeed and oven cleared of preforms.

turned

off,

see

1-006030-10-xx.svg

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools None PROCEDURE Removal 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Remove the feed block , see procedure "BDM -019. 3- Remove the infeed wheel , see procedure "BDM -020. 4- Remove the infeed wheel , see procedure "BDM -021.

© SIDEL

Note the order in which the infeed wheel (1) is assembled. 5- Position the first sector on the oven wheel (2) infeed wheel (1) opposite the working position using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU -013. 6- Remove the bolts (3) from the first sector on the infeed wheel (1). 7- Remove the first sector of the infeed wheel (1). Refit 8- Clean the 3 sectors on the infeed wheel (1) using a clean, dry cloth. 9- Clean the mountings on the first sector of the infeed wheel (1) using a clean, dry cloth. 10- Position the first sector on the infede wheel (1) on the oven wheel (2) using the centering pins (4). 11- Insert the bolts (3) into the first sector on the infeed wheel (1) and tighten up. 12- Position the next sector opposite the working position using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU -013. 13- Repeat steps 6 and 12 to replace the second and third sectors on the infeed wheel. 14- Fit the infeed guides, see procedure "BDM -021.

2 3

1 1-006220-01-xx.svg

4 2

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-006219-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

1

Removal/refit: oven wheel infeed turntable

Part C BDM-023

2/2

15- Fit the preform infeed wheel, see procedure "BDM -020. 16- Fit the infeed block , see procedure "BDM -019. BEFORE YOU FINISH 17- Close the safety doors.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-024

Removal/refit: transfer grips

1

GENERAL INFORMATION Eye protection is obligatory. The preform and bottle transfer grips are different; the preform transfer grips are spread further apart than the bottle transfer grips. Do not invert the preform and bottle grips when refitting them. 1-006030-02-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

2

Parts - transfer grips. Consumables - Clean, dry cloths, - light "LOCTITE 222" threadlock. Specific tools None

1 4

5 1-010324-02-xx.svg

PROCEDURE

© SIDEL

Removal 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013. 3- Open the vision system, see procedure "BCU-036. 4- Bring the transfer arm around to your working position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU -013. 5- Hold the right grip (1). 6- Loosen the bolt (2). 7- Remove the grip (1)/screw (2)/washer (3) assembly. 8- Hold the left grip (4). 9- Loosen the bolt (5). 10- Remove the grip (4)/screw (5)/washer (6) assembly. Refit 11- Clean the contact surfaces using clean dry cloths.

5

4

6

1

2 3

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-010323-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

1

Removal/refit: transfer grips

Part C BDM-024

2/2

12- If necessary, fit the screw (2 ; 5) and the washer (3 ; 6) on the grip (1 ; 4). 13- Apply a little light threadlock on the bolts (2 ; 5). 14- Position the right grip and hold it (1). 15- Tighten the bolt (2). 16- Position the left grip and hold it (4). 17- Tighten the bolt (5). 18- Repeat steps 4 to 17 , to replace all of the transfer grips (1 ; 3). 19- Close the vision system, see procedure "BCU-036. BEFORE YOU FINISH 20- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013. 21- Close the safety doors.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-025

Removal/refit: nozzle tip

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Make sure that the mold support unit is secured in the open position before attempting any work on it, see procedure "BSU-001. The following procedure is carried out on cold molds. Some procedures may, however, require an intervention on a hot mold. In these cases always follow the following safety instructions: - Wear protective clothing on the body, hands and face during any work on the mold support unit. 1-006030-01-xx.svg

You do not always need to open and close the mold support unit; that will depend on the height of the nozzle tip (3).

3 1

2

When changing a production article, replace the rim support (9). MACHINE STATUS - cold molds. Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - locking system holding brace , - nozzle seal holding tool (1), - nozzle cylinder piston rod holding tool (2), - spanner wrench (3).

© SIDEL

PROCEDURE

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-010139-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Removal/refit: nozzle tip

Part C BDM-025

2/4

Removal Do not activate the low pressure air system in the JOG implementation window. 1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013. 2- Bring the mold support unit around to your working position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

2

6

3

5

1-010380-01-xx.svg

3- Unlock and open the mold support unit manually, see procedure "BSU-001. 4- Insert the locking system holding brace, see procedure "BSU-001. 5- Hold the piston rod (6) using the nozzle cylinder piston rod holding tool (2). 6- Loosen the nut (5) using the spanner wrench (3).

2

6

1

4

© SIDEL

1-010379-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 3/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-025

Removal/refit: nozzle tip

7- Loosen the nozzle tip (4) using the nozzle tip holding tool (1). 8- Remove the nozzle tip (4). 9- Remove the spring thrust (7). 10- Remove the spring (8). 11- Remove the rim support (9). 12- Remove the nozzle ring (15) and the washer (16), see procedure "BDM-008. Refit 13- Clean the nozzle tip (4), the spring thrust (7), the spring (8) and the rim support (9) using a clean, dry cloth.

2

8

7 12

9 10

11

14 4 16

13 15

17

F Check the O-ring (12). · If the seal (12) is worn replace it. F Check the presence and condition of the spacer (13). · If the spacer (13) is worn, replace it.. 14- Position the washer (17)/nozzle seal (15 )/washer (16 ) assembly on the nozzle tip (4), see procedure "BDM-008. 15- Position the rim support (9). 16- Position the spring (8). 17- Position the spring thrust (7). F Verify that the ring (14) is present. F Make sure that the safety ring is in the correct position on the nozzle (11). F Make sure that the spacer is in the correct position (10).

1-007833-02-xx.svg

9 1-007834-01-xx.svg

The chamfer on the spacer (10) should be facing upwards. 18- Clean the piston rod (6) using a clean, dry cloth. 19- Tighten the nozzle tip (4) by hand. 20- Fit the nozzle tip (4). 21- Hold the piston rod (6) using the nozzle cylinder piston rod holding tool (2). 22- Tighten the nozzle tip (4) using the holding tool (1). 23- Tighten the nut (5) using the spanner wrench (3). 24- Remove the locking system holding brace , see procedure "BSU-001. 25- Close the mold support unit manually. 26- Bring the next blow station around to your working position using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013. 27- Repeat as above, from step 3 for each nozzle tip (4).

© SIDEL

BEFORE YOU FINISH 28- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

10

11

4

1-010381-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: nozzle tip

BDM-025

4/4

© SIDEL

2

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BDM-026

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: stretching rod

1

GENERAL INFORMATION Work to be carried out at height: use the equipment fitted on the machine and always follow current safety regulations. The stretching rod and the process air both pass through the "TORNADO" solenoid valves and the nozzle cylinder. The "TORNADO" solenoid valve assembly and the nozzle cylinder are potential sources of both biological and chemical contamination. 1-006030-18-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS - stretching station in question, in raised position. Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

2 3

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - Clean, dry brush.

1

1-007318-01-xx.svg

PROCEDURE Removal Do not activate the low pressure air system in the JOG implementation window.

© SIDEL

1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU -013. 2- Bring the mold support unit around to your working position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU -013.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

1

Removal/refit: stretching rod

3- Clean the lip seal (5) using a clean, dry brush.

Part C BDM-026

2/2

5

1

1-006698-01-xx.svg

4- Loosen the nut (6). 5- Disconnect the hose (7). 6- Pull the indexing pin (2).

7

The stretching rod (1) is no longer locked on the shaft.

6

Turn and raise the stretching rod manually (1) to extract it from the casing (3). 7- Remove the stretching rod (1). Refit 8- Clean the stretching rod (1) using a clean, dry cloth. 9- Carefully insert the stretching rod (1) into the casing (3).

1 1-007319-01-xx.svg

10- Pull the indexing the pin (2) and insert the stretching rod (1) fully into the casing (3). 11- Release the indexing pin (2). 12- Manually turn the stretching rod (1) until the indexing pin clicks in (2).

2

The stretching rod (1) is now locked. F Check that the indexing pin (2) is up against the nut (4). 13- Reconnect the hose (7). 14- Tighten the nut (6). F Make sure that the stretching rod (1) is securely fitted. 15- Repeat as above from stage 2 until you have replaced all of the stetching rods (1).

4

3

BEFORE YOU FINISH 16- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU -013.

1-007371-01-xx.svg

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/4

BDM-027

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: stretching cam

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Work to be carried out at height: use the equipment fitted on the machine and always follow current safety regulations. This procedure requires the presence of 2 technicians: - the first technician, situated on the upper part of the chassis, disassembles and assembles the stretching cam, - the second technician, situated at the foot of the machine, handles the stretching cam. 1-006030-33-xx.svg

The angular position of the stretching cam depends on the process, and in particular the position of the "P0" and "P10" points, see procedure "BPU-010.

1

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools None

1-010353-04-02.svg

PROCEDURE

© SIDEL

Removal

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Removal/refit: stretching cam

1- Press the (1) key.

The (A) window appears. 2- Press the (2) key. The machine is now supplied with low pressure air. The stretching cylinders stop in raised position.

BDM-027

2/4

A

2

1-010342-02-02.svg

3- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 4- Remove the nut (3) and the washer (4). 5- Disassemble the support (5) / "B13.0" sensor (6). Mark the angular position of the stretching cam (7).

3

6

4

5

6- Remove the fixing bolts (8). 7- Disassemble the cam segment (9). 8- Remove the fixing bolts (10). 9- Disassemble the bracket (11). 10- Remove the fixing bolts (12). 11- Slide the stretching cam (7) to the edge of the chassis (13). 12- Remove the stretching cam (7). Refit 13- Clean the bearing surfaces of the chassis (13) and the stretching cam (7). 14- Position the stretching cam (7) according to the angular position defined by the process. 15- Tighten the fixing bolts (12). 16- Position the bracket (11).

12

9

8

12

7

13

© SIDEL

1-008357-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 3/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-027

Removal/refit: stretching cam

2

17- Tighten the fixing bolts (10). 18- Position the cam segment (9). 19- Tighten the fixing bolts (8). 20- Position the support (5) / "B13.0" sensor (6) assembly. 21- Position the nut (3) and the washer (4). 22- Tighten the nut (3). 23- Load the required production recipe, see procedure "BPU-005. 24- Set points "P0" and "P10", see procedure "BPU-001. 11

BEFORE YOU FINISH 25- Close the safety doors. 26- Close the window(s) and return to the "Welcome" family.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

10 1-007974-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: stretching cam

BDM-027

4/4

© SIDEL

2

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-028

Removal/refit: oven outfeed guide

1

MACHINE STATUS - oven outfeed cleared of preforms. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools None

1-006030-05-xx.svg

PROCEDURE Removal 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Bring the transfer grips around using the JOG system to free the oven outfeed guide (1), see procedure "BCU -013. 3- Loosen the grip nut (2). 4- Remove the oven outfeed guide (1). Refit 5- Clean the oven outfeed guide (1) and the contact surfaces using a clean, dry cloth. 6- Position the oven outfeed guide (1) using the guide pins. 7- Tighten the grip-nut (2). 8- Make sure that the oven outfeed guide (1) is securely fitted. BEFORE YOU FINISH 9- Close the safety doors.

The procedure is now complete.

1

2

© SIDEL

1-006227-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: oven outfeed guide

BDM-028

2/2

© SIDEL

1

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BDM-029

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: stretching cylinder distributer (lower command)

2

GENERAL INFORMATION This procedure applies to equipped cylinders, with lower controls. Removing the stretching cylinder will make removing and refitting the distributer easier, see procedure "BDM-014. Work to be carried out at height: use the equipment fitted on the machine and always follow current safety regulations. MACHINE STATUS

1-006030-18-xx.svg

3

Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

1

4 6

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts - stretching distributer seal (7), - stretching distributer (6). Consumables - Clean, dry cloths, - "LUB 28" grease, supplied with the set of seals. Specific tools - Clean, dry brush, - torque wrench 1 to 5 N.m.

5

2 1-006229-01-xx.svg

6 9

PROCEDURE Removal 1- Advance the desired blowing station until it is opposite the work station using manual rotation, see procedure "BCU-014.

© SIDEL

Turn off the power and utility supplies to the machine, see procedure "BCU-012. 2- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 3- Remove the fixing bolts (1). 4- Remove the control support (2). 5- Remove the * 1 fixing bolts (3). 6- Remove the purge block (4). 7- Loosen the screws (5) but do not remove them.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

7

8 1-006228-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Removal/refit: stretching cylinder distributer (lower command)

8- Remove the stretching cylinder (6). 9- Remove the seal (7). Refit 10- Clean the base (8), the purge block (4) and the control support (2) using a clean, dry cloth. 11- Grease the groove (9) for the stretching distributer seal (7) and the stretching distributer (6) using the "LUB 28" grease. 12- Position the stretching distributer seal (7) in the groove (9) on the stretching distributer (6). 13- Grease the surface of the stretching distributer (7) using the "LUB 28". 14- Position the new distributer (6) on the base (8). 15- Tighten the fixing bolts (5) crosswise to a torque of 4 N.m. 16- Position the purge block (4) on the stretching distributer (6). 17- Tighten the bolts (3) to a torque of 2 N.m. 18- Position the control support (2) on the stretching distributer (6). 19- Tighten the bolts (1) to a torque of 1,5 N.m.

Part C BDM-029

2/2

6

9 7 1-006230-01-xx.svg

BEFORE YOU FINISH 20- Close the safety doors. 21- Control the performance of the stretching cyclinder , see procedure "BPU-006.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1 / 10

BDM-030

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: stretching cylinder seals

3

GENERAL INFORMATION This procedure applies to equipped cylinders, with lower controls. To carry out this operation, remove the cylinder from the machine, see procedure "BDM-014. If you are using a vice, make sure that the jaws are shaped to the cylinder body so as not to damage it. 1-006757-01-xx.svg

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts - set of seals. Consumables - Clean, dry cloths, - "LUB 28" grease, supplied with the set of seals. Specific tools - Clean, dry brush, - thin, non-metallic spatula. - grips for inner elastic rings. - torque wrench 5 to 25 N.m.

1

PROCEDURE

1-006257-01-xx.svg

Removing the cylinder rod 1- Remove the stretching cylinder , see procedure "BDM-029. 2- Disconnect the hose connecting the top and bottom sections of the cylinder. 3- Remove the bolts (1). 4- Loosen the bolts (2).

2

© SIDEL

1-006260-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

3

Removal/refit: stretching cylinder seals

Part C BDM-030

2 / 10

5- Remove the base (3). Do not remove the non-return valve and the silencers from the base (3). 3

25

1-006258-01-xx.svg

6- Remove the counter-nut (4).

6 4

1-006101-01-xx.svg

7- Remove the bolts (5).

5

1-006259-01-xx.svg

8- Remove the holding plate (6) and the end-piece from the cylinder body (7).

7 1-006253-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

© SIDEL

6

Part C 3 / 10

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-030

Removal/refit: stretching cylinder seals

9- Remove the bolts (8).

3

8

9

1-006249-01-xx.svg

10- Remove the base block (9). Do not scratch the rod or the cylinder body.

9 1-006254-01-xx.svg

11- Remove the cylinder rod (10).

10

1-006250-01-xx.svg

Removing the seals 12- Clean the cylinder rod (10) using a clean, dry brush. Never use objects that may damage these parts, especially their ridges and grooves. 13- Remove the supporting segment (11).

13 11

12

© SIDEL

1-006251-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

3

Removal/refit: stretching cylinder seals

Part C BDM-030

4 / 10

14- Remove the 2 lip-seals (12 ; 13) using a fine, non-metallic spatula.

12

1-006255-01-xx.svg

15- Remove the O-ring (14) from the cylinder body end-piece (7). 14

7

1-006252-01-xx.svg

16- Remove the 2 lip-seals (15 ; 16) using a fine, non-metallic spatula.

16 15

7

© SIDEL

1-006256-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 5 / 10

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-030

Removal/refit: stretching cylinder seals

17- Remove the 2 O-rings (17 ; 18) located on the cylinder end-piece (7) on the base block (9).

3 9 17

18 7 1-006241-01-xx.svg

18- Remove the cusioning seal (19) from the base block (9) using a fine, non-metallic spatula. 19

9 1-006245-01-xx.svg

19- Remove the elastic ring (20).

9

20

1-006242-01-xx.svg

20- Remove the flow valve (21). 21- Remove the seal (22) from the flow valve (21).

22 21 9

© SIDEL

1-006246-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

3

Removal/refit: stretching cylinder seals

Part C BDM-030

6 / 10

Fitting the seals Grease the seal grooves, the seals and the cylinder rod (10) applying the grease "LUB 28" with a paintbrush. Do not scratch the rod or the cylinder body. 22- Clean the cylinder rod and the seal grooves using a clean dry cloth.

1-006247-01-xx.svg

1-006243-01-xx.svg

23- Position the lip-seal (12) on the rod (10). Fit the lip-seal (12) into its groove making sure that the lipped sections are facing outwards.

12

© SIDEL

1-006244-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 7 / 10

BDM-030

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: stretching cylinder seals

3

24- Position the supporting segment (11) on the rod (10).

10

11

1-006238-01-xx.svg

25- Insert the rod (10) into the cylinder body (23). 26- Push the rod (10) to the other side of the cylinder body (23) to access (only) the lip-sea; groove (13). 10 23

1-006248-01-xx.svg

27- Position the lip-seal (13) in the groove. 28- Insert the cylinder rod (10) fitted with the 2 lip-seals (12 ; 13) into the cylinder body (23). 23

10

13 1-006234-01-xx.svg

29- Grease the end of the cylinder rod (10) applying the "LUB 28" grease with clean, dry paintbrush. 30- Clean the cylinder body end-piece (7) using a clean dry cloth.

23

10

© SIDEL

1-006239-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

3

Removal/refit: stretching cylinder seals

Part C BDM-030

8 / 10

31- Grease the seal groove (24) using the "LUB 28" grease.

24

7

1-006235-01-xx.svg

32- Position the seal (16) into the groove as shown in the illustration. 16

7

1-006236-01-xx.svg

33- Position the seal (15) into the groove as indicated in the illustration. 34- Clean the cylinder base block (9) using a clean, dry cloth. 35- Grease the base block supports (9) using the "LUB 28" grease. 15 7 1-006240-01-xx.svg

36- Position the cushioning seal (19) in its groove as indicated in the illustration. 37- Position the seal (22) on the flow valve (21). 38- Screw the flow valve (21) into the base block (9) without tightening it.. 39- Position the elastic ring (20). 40- Position the seals (14 ; 17 ; 18 ) on the base block (9) on the cylinder body end-piece (7).

19 9

© SIDEL

1-006237-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 9 / 10

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-030

Removal/refit: stretching cylinder seals

Assembling the various cylinder components 41- Position the base block (9) on the cylinder body (23). 42- Tighten the bolts (8) to a torque of 10 N.m. 43- Fit the cylinder body end-piece (7) and the holding plate (6) on the cylinder body (23).

6

3 7 23 5

The screw-holes (24) on the holding plate (6), the connector (25) on the cylinder body end-piece (7) and the pneumatic connector on the base block (9) should all be lined up with each other.

1-006233-01-xx.svg

44- Lightly screw in the fixing bolts (5). 45- Screw the check nut (4) on the cylinder rod (10). 46- Position the base (3) on the connector (25). 47- Tighten the bolts (2) to a torque of 9 N.m. 48- Tighten the bolts (5) to a torque of 10 N.m. 49- Tighten the bolts (1) to a torque of 9 N.m. 50- Connect the hose (26) connecting the top and bottom sections of the cylinder.

25 24 7

1-006231-01-xx.svg

51- Fit the stretching cylinder , see procedure "BDM-029. BEFORE YOU FINISH Operating checks

F Check the cylinder before fitting it onto the machine - it has not been damaged, - the air purge works properly 7 bar, - the non-return air valve works efficiently 7 bar, - there are no leaks. Adjusting the cylinder damping 52- Tighten up the flow valve (21) as far as it will go. 53- Loosen the flow valve (21) by 2½ two turns. Reset the damping system afer the first few machine operating cycles. Fitting the equipped cylinder on the machine 54- see procedure "BDM -014.

21

26

The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-006232-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: stretching cylinder seals

BDM-030

10 / 10

© SIDEL

3

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-031

Removal/refit: lower stretching thrusts

1

GENERAL INFORMATION Never attempt to run the machine if all of the lower stretching thrusts are not identical. MACHINE STATUS - all machine power procedure "BCU-012.

and

utilities

turned

off,

see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - "LUB A15" grease, - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools None

1-006030-01-xx.svg

PROCEDURE Removal 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Bring the mold support unit around to your working position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013. 3- Raise the lower stretching thrust (1) on the support (2) manually.

The lower thrust is now removed. Refit 4- Clean the contact surfaces on the lower thrust (1) using a clean, dry cloth. 5- Clean the support (2) using a clean, dry cloth. 6- Grease the contact surfaces on the lower stretching thrust (1) using the "LUB A15" grease. 7- Position the lower strtching thrust (1) in the support (2). 8- Check the contact between the contact surfaces on the lower stretching thrust (1) and the support (2). 9- If necessary, reset the lower the stretching thrust (1), see procedure "BRM-009. 10- Repeat steps 2 to 9 until you have replaced all of the lower stretching thrusts.

1

2

1-006200-01-xx.svg

1

BEFORE YOU FINISH 11- Close the safety doors.

The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-006201-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: lower stretching thrusts

BDM-031

2/2

© SIDEL

1

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1 / 18

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-032

Reconditioning nozzle cylinders (4 stroke)

3

GENERAL INFORMATION This procedure applies to cylinders "11279186" and similar. The references used in this procedures do not apply to the cylinder drawing. This procedure assumes that the following units have been removed: - solenoid valve assembly "TORNADO" on base, see procedure "BDM-002, - nozzle tip, see procedure "BDM-025, - nozzle cylinder distributors, see procedure "BDM-036, - nozzle cylinder, see procedure "BDM-015.

1-006757-01-xx.svg

Removing the solenoid valve assembly "TORNADO" from the machine is not obligatory but it does make the procedure and the inspection easier. This procedure does not cover the maintenance of the nozzle seal, see procedure "BDM-008. 2

4

3 1-007661-01-xx.svg

Follow the hygiene precautions. Eye protection is obligatory.

© SIDEL

1-006548-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

3

Reconditioning nozzle cylinders (4 stroke)

Only use recommended products.

14

A

Never use oil or grease when fitting the seals of these parts unless it is specifically recommended. The stretching rod and the process air both pass through the "TORNADO" solenoid valves and the nozzle cylinder. The "TORNADO" solenoid valve assembly and the nozzle cylinder are potential sources of both biological and chemical contamination.

BDM-032 24 ; 25

23

2 / 18

10

18 ; 19

13

26 ; 27

11

34

33

15 ; 16

2

12 46 ; 47 49

20

17

21 ; 22

28 1-007663-01-xx.svg

Never use objects that may damage these parts, especially their ridges and grooves. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

B

39

36 41

45

Parts - 1 set of spare SIDEL seals (A), - the cylinder drawing (see set of drawings supplied with the machine). Consumables - Clean, dry cloths, - light "LOCTITE 222" threadlock, - cleaning agent "NETA03". Specific tools - set of special SIDEL tools for the cylinder (B), - torque wrench 10 to 20 N.m, - grips for inner elastic rings, - plastic mallet, - small box-cutter.

35

44

43 40 48

37

1

42

38 1-007662-01-xx.svg

PROCEDURE Removal 1- Remove the seal (2) from the cylinder (3) using the scriber (1). 2- Remove the 2 fixing bolts (4).

3- Separate the cylinder (3)/piston (5) assembly from the body (6) by gently tapping the piston (5) with the mallet.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

© SIDEL

The bolts (4) are fitted with light "LOCTITE 222" threadlock. You may find some difficulty loosening the fixing bolts (4).

Part C 3 / 18

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-032

Reconditioning nozzle cylinders (4 stroke)

3

4- Remove the cylinder (3)/piston (5) assembly from the body (6).

5

6

3

1-007664-01-xx.svg

5- Remove the piston (5).

5

3

6 1-007665-01-xx.svg

6- Remove the middle piston (7).

3

5

© SIDEL

1-007666-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

3

Reconditioning nozzle cylinders (4 stroke)

BDM-032

4 / 18

7- Remove the elastic ring (8) from the cylinder (3).

3

7 1-007667-01-xx.svg

8- Remove the spacer (9) and the diffuser (10) from the cylinder (3).

3

10

9

8

The diffuser (10) has been tightened on, use a jet if necessary.

1-007668-01-xx.svg

Protect the cylinder (3) during cutting of the upper stop (11). 9- Cut the upper stopper (11) using the box-cutter.

9

8

3 1-007669-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

© SIDEL

10

Part C 5 / 18

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-032

Reconditioning nozzle cylinders (4 stroke)

3

10- Remove the upper stopper (11). 11- Remove the seal (12). The presence of a scraper seal (13) depends on the model of the nozzle cylinder.

11

It is recommended to leave the scraper seal (13) in place whatever its level of wear. Removal of the scraper seal (13) risks damaging its housing and rendering the body (6) useless. 12- Remove the guide belt (14) using the scriber (1).

12

3 1-007670-01-xx.svg

13- Remove the seal (15) and the accompanying O-ring (16) using the scriber (1). 14- Remove the guide (17) from the piston (5). 15- Remove the seal (18) and the accompanying O-ring (19) using the scriber (1).

13

15 ; 16

14

6 1-007672-01-xx.svg

16- Remove the guide (20) from the piston (5). 17- Remove the seals (21) and the accompanying O-rings (22) using the scriber (1).

18 ; 19

17

© SIDEL

1-007674-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

3

Reconditioning nozzle cylinders (4 stroke)

BDM-032

Protect the middle piston (7) while cutting the upper stop (23).

6 / 18

5

18- Cut the upper stopper (23) using the box-cutter.

20

21 ; 22 1-007675-01-xx.svg

19- Remove the upper stopper (23). 20- Remove the seal (24) and the accompanying O-ring (25) using the scriber (1). 21- Remove the seal (26) and the accompanying O-ring (27) using the scriber (1).

23

7

24 ; 25

1-007676-01-xx.svg

22- Remove the middle piston (7) guide bands (28).

27

26

7

© SIDEL

1-007677-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 7 / 18

BDM-032

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Reconditioning nozzle cylinders (4 stroke)

Do not separate the solenoids (29) from their base (30).

3 7

23- Loosen the bolts (31). 24- Remove the cover (32).

28

1-007678-01-xx.svg

25- Remove the guide (33) from the base (30).

29 31 30 32 1-006156-02-xx.svg

26- Remove the scraper seal (34) from the cover (32).

33

30 1-006157-02-xx.svg

Refit Nozzle cylinder 27- Clean the body (6), cylinder (3), piston (5), middle piston (7), spacer (9) and cover (32) using a clean cloth and cleaning fluid "NETA03". Recondition the cylinder (3)

34

32

© SIDEL

1-006159-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

3

Reconditioning nozzle cylinders (4 stroke)

BDM-032

8 / 18

28- Position the upper stopper (11) on the cylinder (3) using the tooling (35).

35

12

2

11

3

10

8

9

1-007679-01-xx.svg

29- Position the O-ring (12).

3

11

35

1-007680-01-xx.svg

The diffuser (10) has been tightened on, use a jet if necessary. 30- Place the diffuser (10) in the cylinder (3). 31- Place the spacer (9) in the cylinder (3). 32- Position the elastic ring (8). Reconditioning the piston (5)

3

12

© SIDEL

1-007681-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 9 / 18

BDM-032

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Reconditioning nozzle cylinders (4 stroke)

33- Position the guides (17 ; 20) in the piston (5). 34- Place the O-rings (22) in the piston (5).

36

3 38

39

Make the seal (21) into a heart shape. 35- Position the seals (21).

37

21 ; 22

5

20

18 ; 19

17

1-007682-01-xx.svg

36- Position the drift (36) in the piston (5).

21

3

1-007683-01-xx.svg

37- Position the O-ring (19). 38- Position the drift (37) on the piston (5). Do not damage the seal (18), position it carefully at the end. 39- Position the seal (18) using the pushing device (38).

5

36

© SIDEL

1-007684-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

3

Reconditioning nozzle cylinders (4 stroke)

BDM-032

10 / 18

40- Remove the chuck (37). 41- Position the calibration sleeve (39) on the piston (5).

38

18

37 19

5

1-007685-01-xx.svg

42- Disassemble the calibration sleeve (39). 43- Remove the chuck (36). Reconditioning the middle piston (7)

18

39

5

36

© SIDEL

1-007686-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 11 / 18

BDM-032

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Reconditioning nozzle cylinders (4 stroke)

44- Place the guide bands (28) in the middle piston (7). 45- Place the O-ring (27) in the middle piston (7).

36

41

3

7

40

42

42 43

Make the seal (26) into a heart shape. 46- Place the seal (26) in the middle piston (7).

24 ; 25

28

26 ; 27

23

1-007687-01-xx.svg

47- Position the O-ring (25). 48- Position the chuck (40) on the middle piston (7). Do not damage the seal (24), position it carefully at the end.

28

49- Position the seal (24) using the pushing device (41). 7 26 ; 27

1-007688-01-xx.svg

50- Remove the chuck (40). 51- Place the calibration sleeve (42) on the middle piston (7) 41 40 25

24

7

© SIDEL

1-007689-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

3

Reconditioning nozzle cylinders (4 stroke)

Part C BDM-032

12 / 18

52- Disassemble the calibration sleeve (42). 53- Position the chuck (43) on the middle piston (7). 54- Position the upper stop (23) on the middle piston (7) using the calibration sleeve (42). 42

7

1-007690-01-xx.svg

55- Remove the chuck (43). 56- Position the chuck (36) in the middle piston (7). Leave the drift (36) in position for the rest of the procedure.

42 23 43 7

1-007691-01-xx.svg

Recondition the body (6)

7

36

© SIDEL

1-007692-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 13 / 18

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-032

Reconditioning nozzle cylinders (4 stroke)

57- Position the guide (14) in the body (6). 58- Place the O-ring (16) in the body (6).

6

3

45

44

Make the seal (15) into a heart shape. 59- Place the seal (15) in the body (6).

15 ; 16

14

35 1-007693-01-xx.svg

60- Position the tool (35) so as to bear on the body (6).

The tooling (35) calibrates the body seals (6).

6

14

15 ; 16 1-007694-01-xx.svg

Assemble the nozzle cylinder 61- Place the body (6) on a hollow support to facilitate the operations. 62- Place the sleeve (44) in the body (6). 63- Place the piston (5) in the body (6).

35

6 © SIDEL

1-007695-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

3

Reconditioning nozzle cylinders (4 stroke)

64- Remove the sleeve (44). 65- Position the sleeve (45) on the body (6). 66- Place the middle piston (7), equipped with the chuck (36), in the body (6).

Part C BDM-032

14 / 18

5 44

6

1-007696-01-xx.svg

67- Remove the sleeve (45). 68- Place the cylinder (3) on the chuck (36). 36 7

45

6

© SIDEL

1-007697-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 15 / 18

BDM-032

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Reconditioning nozzle cylinders (4 stroke)

3

69- Place the cylinder (3) in the pistons (5 ; 7) and the body (6).

The cylinder (3) pushes the drift (36) out of the piston (5).

3 36

6

1-007698-01-xx.svg

70- Remove the chuck (36).

36

Fit the bolts (4) having applied "LOCTITE 222" light threadlock.

5

6

3

71- Tighten the bolts (4) to a torque of 10 Nm.

1-007699-01-xx.svg

72- Position the seal (2) on the cylinder (3).

4

© SIDEL

1-007700-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

3

Reconditioning nozzle cylinders (4 stroke)

"TORNADO" solenoid valve assembly

BDM-032 2

16 / 18

3

1-007701-01-xx.svg

73- Place the O-ring (46) in the guide (33). 33

48 34

49

46 ; 47

1-007702-01-xx.svg

Make the seal (47) into a heart shape. 47

74- Place the seal (47) in the guide (33).

46

33

© SIDEL

1-007703-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 17 / 18

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-032

Reconditioning nozzle cylinders (4 stroke)

75- Position the calibration drift (48) in the guide (33). 76- Position the O-ring (49). 77- Remove the calibration drift (48). 78- Position the guide (33) in the base (30). 79- Position the scraper seal (34) in the cover (27). 80- Position the cover (27) on the base (25).

3

48

49

33 1-007704-01-xx.svg

81- Tighten the fixing bolts (31) crosswise to a torque of 10 Nm. 34

32

1-006180-02-xx.svg

82- Position the protective stopper (50) on the cover (27).

30

31

32 1-006181-02-xx.svg

BEFORE YOU FINISH 83- Check that the piston slides manually. If the cylinder is not being fitted on the machine immediately, insert the stoppers into the cylinder openings to protect it.

50

84- Sign off the operation on the machine's worksheet.

The procedure is now complete.

32

© SIDEL

1-006182-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Reconditioning nozzle cylinders (4 stroke)

BDM-032

18 / 18

© SIDEL

3

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-033

Removal/refit: braking system friction pads

3

GENERAL INFORMATION Always replace all of the brake pads in a braking system when carryng out any operation on it. Use the safety bolt (1) supplied and fitted on the braking system. Never loosen the bolts (2). This procedure requires the presence of 2 technicians. 1-006030-17-xx.svg

The braking system opens pneumatically and is drawn closed by a vacuum (see User manual).

3

Do not inhale the dust from the brake systems.

4

Wear latex gloves.

2

19

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

1-006094-02-xx.svg

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts - friction pads (3 ; 4). Consumables - latex gloves, - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - safety bolt (1), - spring puller , - set of thickness gauges .

6

1-007075-02-xx.svg

PROCEDURE

© SIDEL

Removal 1- Inhibit machine rotation, see procedure "BSU-003. 2- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 3- Remove the fixing bolts from the cover plate (6). 4- Remove the cover plate (6). 5- Remove the bolts (7). 6- Remove the cover plate (8). 7- Remove the cover plate (9). 8- Remove the silencer (10).

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

3

Removal/refit: braking system friction pads

BDM-033

Extreme caution and perfect coordination between the 2 technicians is required for the following operations.

2/4

7

9- The first technician presses the button (11) and keeps it pressed in.

The braking system is now open.

8

Fully tighten the safety bolt (1).

9

Never fit or remove the safety bolt (1) by hand; always use a socket wrench. Do not touch the mobile parts of the braking system.

1-006202-01-xx.svg

10- The second technician positions the safety bolt (1).

11

1-006603-04-xx.svg

15

12

16

13

3

14

4 17

10

1 1-006261-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

© SIDEL

The braking system jaws are secured. 11- When the second technician gives the order, the first technician releases the push-button (11). 12- Remove the spring (12) using the spring puller. 13- Loosen the counter-nut (13) but do not remove it. 14- Loosen the flow valve (14) but do not remove it. 15- Loosen the bolt (15) but do not remove it. 16- Loosen the nuts (16) but do not remove them. 17- Tighten the bolt (17). 18- Pivot the arm (18). The friction pad (3) separates from the brake disc (19). 19- Use a screwdriver as a lever on the metal part of the friction pad (3). 20- Remove the friction pad (3). 21- Loosen the bolt (17). 22- Pivot the arm (20). The friction pad (4) separates from the brake disc (19). 23- Use a screwdriver as a lever on the metal part of the friction pad (4). 24- Remove the friction pad (4). Refit 25- Check the position of the magnet on the magnetic support. 26- Position the friction pad (4). 27- Tighten the bolt (17). 28- Pivot the arm (18). 29- Check the position of the magnet on the magnetic support. 30- Position the friction pad (3). 31- Set the position of the friction pads (3 ; 4), see procedure "BRM-012. 32- Position the spring (12) using the spring puller.

Part C 3/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-033

Removal/refit: braking system friction pads

3

Extreme caution and perfect coordination between the (2) technicians is required for the following operations. 33- The first technician presses the button (11) and keeps it pressed in.

The braking system is now open.

Never fit or remove the safety bolt (1) by hand; always use a socket wrench.

18

Do not touch the mobile parts of the braking system.

3 19

34- The second technician removes the safety bolt (1).

The braking system jaws are now free to move. 35- When the second technician gives the order, the first technician releases the push-button (11). 36- Tighten the silencer (10). 37- Position the safety bolt (1) in the fixing lug on the braking system.

20

4 1-006093-02-xx.svg

For machines fitted with several brake cylinders, repeat as above from step 7 until you have replaced all of the friction pads (3 ; 4).

F Make sure that the brake disc is clean (19) · Clean the disc (19) if necessary, see procedure "BNM-009. 38- Fit the covers (8 ; 9) with the screws (7). 39- Position the cover plate (6). 40- Tighen up the fixing bolts on the cover plate (6). 41- Release machine rotation, see procedure "BSU-003. BEFORE YOU FINISH

1 10

42- Check the gap between the friction pads (3 ; 4) and the brake disc (19), see procedure "BNM-009. 43- Press the button (11) several times to make sure that the brake is working properly. 44- Close the safety doors.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-006262-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: braking system friction pads

BDM-033

4/4

© SIDEL

3

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-034

Removal/refit: exhaust system silencer

1

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005. 1-006030-01-xx.svg

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts - silencer cartridge and brake bolts. Consumables - Clean, dry cloths, - teflon tape. Specific tools - silencer wrench (1), - 3/8" socket wrench 3/8" (supplied). PROCEDURE Removal 1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013. 2- Bring the mold support unit around to your working position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013. 3- Remove the exhaust silencer (2) using the silencer wrench (1). 4- Remove the brake bolts (3) using the hexagonal wrench 3/8". 5- Remove the support (4). 6- Remove the used teflon tape (5) from the support. 7- Removed the silencer cartridge (6).

10

1

© SIDEL

1-006315-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

1

Removal/refit: exhaust system silencer

Refit 8- Clean using a clean, dry cloth: - the body (7), - the supports (4 ; 8), - the grill (9). 9- Fit the new silencer cartridge (6) into the body (7). 10- Assemble the grill (4 ; 8) the supports *2 and the body (7). 11- Tighten the new brake bolts (3) using the socket wrench 3/8". 12- Apply the teflon tape (5) on the threaded part of the support (4).

BDM-034

2/2

2 4

3

5 1-006316-01-xx.svg

13- Clean the tapping on the solenoid valve assemblies "TORNADO"(10). 14- Fit and lightly tighten the exhaust silencer (2) using the silencer wrench (1).

6 4

7 8

BEFORE YOU FINISH 15- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

The procedure is now complete.

3

9

© SIDEL

1-006317-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-035

Removal/refit: mold base safety pin

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Always identify the cause of the safety pin breakage before replacing it. Replace the broken safety pin (1) by 1 original SIDEL part. Never tighten or loosen the bolt (4) as you may weaken the safety pin (1). 1-006030-37-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

5

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts - safety pin (1). Consumables - normal threadlock "LOCTITE 243". Specific tools None

2

3

1

4

1-006585-01-xx.svg

PROCEDURE Removal 1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013. 2- Bring the mold support unit around to your working position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU -013.

1

The bolt (2) should be fitted with normal threadlock "LOCTITE 243". You may have difficulty loosening the bolt (2).

© SIDEL

3- Remove the bolt (2) and the washer (3). 4- Remove the safety pin (1). Refit 5- Fit the new safety pin (1) by positioning the flat part of the pin against the raised section on the mold base support (5). 6- Position the washer (3). Fit the bolt (2) using normal "LOCTITE 243" threadlock

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-006584-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Removal/refit: mold base safety pin

Part C BDM-035

2/2

7- Tighten the bolt (2). BEFORE YOU FINISH 8- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BDM-036

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: nozzle cylinder distributer

2

GENERAL INFORMATION For an intevention on several blow stations, use manual rotation (and not the JOG) in order to protect the lowpressure air circuit. Replace the faulty distributer with an identical one to prevent further malfunction.

1-006030-01-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - JOG not in service, see procedure "BCU-013, - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

2 1 8 7

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts - set of seals, - distributor(s) (1 ; 2). Consumables - Clean, dry cloths, - "LUB A16" grease. Specific tools None

1-010696-01-xx.svg

PROCEDURE Removal 1- Advance the desired blowing station until it is opposite the work station using manual rotation, see procedure "BCU-014. Turn off the power and utility supplies to the machine, see procedure "BCU-012.

© SIDEL

2- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 3- Disconnect the hoses (3). 4- Remove the electrical connectors (4). 5- Remove the bolts (5).

4

7 5

1 3

The seals (6) may fall into the machine.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-010465-02-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Removal/refit: nozzle cylinder distributer

6- Remove the nozzle control distributer (1). 7- Remove the nozzle control distributer (2). 8- Remove the o-ring seals (6). Refit 9- Clean the base (7) using a clean, dry cloth. 10- Clean the base (8) using a clean, dry cloth. 11- Grease the o-ring seals (6) using a cloth and "LUB A16" grease.

8 5

Part C BDM-036

2/2

3 2 4 1-010697-01-xx.svg

12- Position the o-ring seals (6). 13- Position the nozzle control distributer (1). 14- Position the nozzle control distributer (2). 15- Tighten the bolts (5).

5

Observe the correspondence between the electrical connectors (4) and the distributors (1 ; 2). 16- Connect the electrical connectors (4). 17- Reconnect the hoses (3). 1;2

BEFORE YOU FINISH 18- Close the safety doors. 19- Control the performance of the nozzle cyclinder (4), see procedure "BPU-006.

6

1-010466-02-xx.svg

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BDM-037

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: mold base console assembly springs

1

GENERAL INFORMATION Always replace the springs (4) in pairs to avoid stress on the guide system. Never attempt any work on the thrust (10). MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

1-006030-37-xx.svg

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts - springs (5), - upper and lower supports (6 ; 7) as required according to their condition. Consumables - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools None

© SIDEL

PROCEDURE Removal 1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013. 2- Bring the mold support unit around to your working position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU -013. 3- Hold the mold base in the raised position. 4- Hold the nut (1). 5- Unscrew and remove the spring guide (2) using an appropriate tool using the slot (3). 6- Remove the nut (1) and the washer (4). 7- Remove the following parts: - spring (5) with the upper support (6), - lower support (7). 8- Repeat as above, from step 4 to remove the second spring (5). Refit 9- Clean the contact surfaces on the console (8 ; 9) using a clean, dry cloth. 10- Position the upper support (6) in the spring (5). 11- Position the lower support (7) in the console (8).

1 4 9 6 5 7 3 2 8

Publication date : 13/11/2009

10 1-006387-02-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

1

Removal/refit: mold base console assembly springs

Part C BDM-037

2/2

12- Fit the spring (5) with the upper support (6) on the lower support (7) and the console (9). 13- Position the nut (1) and the washer (4). 14- Hold the nut (1). 15- Screw in and tighten the spring guide (2) using the appropriate tool in the slot (3). 16- Repeat as above from step 9 to fit the second spring (5). BEFORE YOU FINISH 17- Make sure that the mold base assembly functions correctly. 18- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BDM-039

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: unscrambler rollers drive belt

2

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings".

see see

PROCEDURE 1-006030-31-xx.svg

Removal 1- Remove the cover (1) using the fixing bolts . 2- Loosen the tensioner arm (3) manually and remove the belt (2). Refit 3- Loosen the tensioner arm (3) and fit the belt (2).

1

F Make sure that the belt (2) is lined up on the tensioner roller (4) on each pulley (5 ; 6). 4- Fit the cover (1) and secure it (1).

1-006509-01-xx.svg

BEFORE YOU FINISH

4

9

3 5 6

2

© SIDEL

1-006508-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Removal/refit: unscrambler rollers drive belt

BDM-039

2/2

5- Turn on the preform feeder, see procedure "BCU-003. 6- Press the (7) key.

The (A) window appears. 7- Press the (8) key. 8- Enter the unscrambler roller rotation setpoint (9).

7 1-010353-13-02.svg

9- Press button (10).

The unscrambler rollers are functioning. F Make sure that the unscrambler rollers (9) rotate properly. 10- Press button (11). The unscrambler rollers are stopped. The procedure is now complete.

A

8 1-010351-04-02.svg

11

10

© SIDEL

1-006375-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/4

BDM-040

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: conveyor belts

2

GENERAL INFORMATION 3 conveyor belts are fitted on the preform feeder: - 1 under the hopper , except on the mini-hopper option , - 1 under the unscrambler rollers (1), - 1 under the elevator column (5). The is no belt in the mini-hopper . The mini-hopper is fitted with a recovery conveyor (9).

1-007021-08-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS - feeder cleared of preforms, see procedure "BCU-017, - all machine power and utilities turned off, see procedure "BCU-012. 1

PROCEDURE Removal/refit: unscrambler roller recovery belt (1) and minihopper recovery conveyor (9) (option)

1-006107-02-xx.svg

1- Open the cover manually (2) to access the belt (1) using the quick-change fittings. · If necessary, bring the belt (1) around by pulling it gently until you can access the clasps (3). 2- Loosen the belt (1), see procedure "BRM-015. 3- Carefully remove the holding rod (4).

The clasps come free (3).

9

© SIDEL

1-006673-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Removal/refit: conveyor belts

4- Staple the new belt (1) to the end of the belt to be removed using the holding rod (4). 5- Carefully pull the old belt (1) by its free end bring the new belt in fully. 6- Unhook the two belts (1).

BDM-040

2/4

2

1-006567-01-xx.svg

7- Hook up the 2 ends of the new belt (1) using the holding rod (4). 8- Close the cover (2) manually. Removal/refit: the slatted elevator belt (5) The removal/refit of the slatted elevator belt (5) is identical for the mini-hopper option.

3

9- Open the safety cover (6) to access the belt (5). · If necessary, bring the belt (5) around by pulling it gently until you can access the clasps (3).

4

You may need to remove the panel (6) to make the operation easier.

1-007299-01-xx.svg

10- Loosen the belt (5), see procedure "BRM-015. 11- Carefully remove the holding rod (4).

5

The clasps come free (3). 12- Staple the new belt (5) to the end of the belt to be removed using the holding rod (4). 13- Carefully pull the old belt (5) by its free end bring the new belt in fully. 14- Unhook the two belts (5). 15- Hook up the 2 ends of the new belt (5) using the holding rod (4).

© SIDEL

1-006568-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 3/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-040

Removal/refit: conveyor belts

16- Close the cover panel (6). Removal/refit: hopper and displaced hopper (option) conveyor belt (10) 17- Open the clearance gate (8) to access the belt (10). · If necessary, bring the belt (10) around by pulling it gently until you can access the clasps (3). 18- Loosen the belt (10), see procedure "BRM-015. 19- Carefully remove the holding rod (4).

The clasps come free (3). 20- Staple the new belt (10) to the end of the belt to be removed using the holding rod (4).

2

5

6 1-006547-02-xx.svg

21- Carefully pull the old belt (10) by its free end bring the new belt in fully. 22- Unhook the two belts (10). 23- Hook up the 2 ends of the new belt (10) using the holding rod (4). 24- Close the clearance gate (8) manually. BEFORE YOU FINISH 25- Set the conveyor belts, see procedure "BRM-015.

The procedure is now complete.

10

8

© SIDEL

1-006694-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: conveyor belts

BDM-040

4/4

© SIDEL

2

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/6

BDM-043

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Draining of the mold body (support and/or shell) hydraulic circuit

2

GENERAL INFORMATION To make interventions easier, T-connectors (not supplied) should be installed on thermoregulator outlets. For more information on how the thermoregulator works, consult the technical documentation delivered with this equipment.. Never attempt to operate the machine without water in the hydraulic circuits. The hydraulic circuit of the mold shells is supplied with oil. The hydraulic circuit of the mold supports is supplied with water. MACHINE STATUS - thermoregulator - cold. Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, procedure "BCU-005, - main electrical circuit under power, procedure "BCU-001, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004.

see see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - Clean, dry cloths, - "LUB 38" oil. Specific tools - large tank, - drum with approx. 200 L capacity. PROCEDURE

valves

on

the

© SIDEL

Hydraulic circuit of the mold shells Drainage 1- Close the distribution circuit thermoregulator.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-006030-66-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Draining of the mold body (support and/or shell) hydraulic circuit

23456-

Open the doors of the external hydraulic module.. Open the valves (1). Place the large tank under the T-connectors . Remove the plug from the supply circuit T-connector . Connect a low-pressure air supply hose to the Tconnector . 7- Remove the plug from the return circuit T-connector . 8- Connect an adapted hose to the T-connector . 9- Position the other end of the hose in the empty drum. 10- Turn on the low pressure air circuit.

Part C BDM-043

2/6

1

F Wait until all of the oil has drained off. 11- Switch off the low pressure air supply. 12- Disconnect the hoses . 13- Install the plugs on the T-connectors . 14- If necessary, clean the assembly using a clean, dry cloth.

The hydraulic circuit of the mold shells has been drained. Work can now be carried out on the circuit. Filling

1-007969-03-xx.svg

Before filling the hydraulic circuit: - clean or replace the external hydraulic module filters, see procedure "BDM-007, - drain the termoregulator.

F Verify that the valves (1) are open. 15- Open the distribution circuit valves on the thermoregulator. 16- Fill the circuit with "LUB 38" oil via the thermoregulator. 17- Start the related thermoregulator(s).. The mold body distribution circuit fills up. F Check the oil level on the thermoregulator. · If necessary, top up the oil. 18- Purge the air in the circuit at the thermoregulator. F Wait until the circuit has been completely purged. 19- Close the external hydraulic module doors. Dispose of the contents of the drum and the tank in accordance with applicable legislation.

© SIDEL

Hydraulic circuit of the shell supports Drainage

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 3/6

BDM-043

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Draining of the mold body (support and/or shell) hydraulic circuit

20- Close the distribution circuit valves on the thermoregulator. 21- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 22- Close the valves (1 ; 2). 23- Connect the drain valves (3 ; 4) to the drain using the specially designed hoses. 24- Open the drain valves (3 ; 4). 25- Close the safety doors. 26- Press the (5) key.

2

1

2

The "Settings" family appears.

4

3

© SIDEL

1-007351-03-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Draining of the mold body (support and/or shell) hydraulic circuit

BDM-043

4/6

27- Press the (6) key.

The (A) window appears. 28- Press the (7) key. The mold body water circuit is open. F Wait until the water has completely drained out. 29- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 30- Disconnect the drain valve (3). 31- Connect the drain valve (3) to an low pressure air hose.

5

6 1-010353-09-02.svg

32- Turn on the low pressure air circuit.

F Wait until the water has completely drained out. 33- Switch off the low pressure air supply. 34- Disconnect the drain valve (3). 35- Close the safety doors. 36- Press the (7) key. The mold body water circuit is closed.

A

7

The hydraulic circuit of the shell supports has been drained. Work can now be carried out on the circuit. Filling 37- Press the (7) key.

The mold body water circuit is open. 38- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 39- Close the drain valve (3). F Make sure that the drain valve (4) is open. 40- Open the distribution circuit valves on the thermoregulator. 41- Open the valve (2) by a 1/3. 42- As soon as the lined has drained close the drain valve (4). 43- Open the valve (2) fully. 44- Open the valve (1). 45- Disconnect the drain valve (4). 46- Close the safety doors. 47- Press the (7) key. The mold body water circuit is closed. 48- Close the window(s) and return to the "Welcome" family.

1-010348-06-02.svg

© SIDEL

BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Check for leaks. Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 5/6

BDM-043

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Draining of the mold body (support and/or shell) hydraulic circuit

49- Stop the thermoregulator(s).

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Draining of the mold body (support and/or shell) hydraulic circuit

BDM-043

6/6

© SIDEL

2

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-045

Removal/refit: locking counter-cam shock absorber

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Replace the shock absorber (1) with an identical shock absorber. Check the references on the absorbers so as not to confuse them with other absorbers on the machine. MACHINE STATUS - all machine power procedure "BCU-012.

and

utilities

turned

off,

see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

1-006030-46-xx.svg

Parts - Shock absorber (1). Consumables - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools None PROCEDURE Removal 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Remove the counter-nut (2). 3- Loosen and remove the shock absorber (1) from the support (3). Refit 4- Clean the support (3) using a clean, dry cloth. 5- Fit the new absorber (1) in the support (3) to obtain the gap X = 10 mm between the body of the absorber (1) and the thrust (4). 6- Tighten the lock-nut (2). 7- Make sure that the mislock detection system functions correctly, see procedure "BNM-004 . BEFORE YOU FINISH 8- Close the safety doors.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

3 1 2

X 4

1-006573-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: locking counter-cam shock absorber

BDM-045

2/2

© SIDEL

2

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-046

Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed wheel

1

MACHINE STATUS - no bottles in the bottle outfeed, - all machine power and utilities procedure "BCU-012.

turned

off,

see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools None

1-006580-01-xx.svg

PROCEDURE Removal 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Remove the bottle outfeed neck guides, see procedure "BDM-048. 3- Remove the bottle outfeed body guides, see procedure "BDM-049. 4- Remove the castle nut (1). 5- Remove the bottle outfeed wheel (2). Refit 6- Clean the bottle outfeed wheel (2) using a clean dry cloth. 7- Position the bottle outfeed wheel (2). 8- Tighten the lock nut (1). 9- Fit the bottle outfeed body guides, see procedure "BDM-049. 10- Fit the bottle outfeed neck guides, see procedure "BDM-048. BEFORE YOU FINISH

1

2

11- Close the safety doors.

The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-006576-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed wheel

BDM-046

2/2

© SIDEL

1

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-047

Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed retractable guide

1

MACHINE STATUS - all machine power procedure "BCU-012.

and

utilities

turned

off,

see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools None

1-006580-01-xx.svg

PROCEDURE Removal 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine.

F Make sure that the transfer arm is not above the retractable guide. · If necessary, rotate the machine or remove the obstructing transfer arm, see procedure "BDM-024. 2- Remove the bolt (2). 3- Remove the bottle outfeed retractable guide (1). Refit 4- Clean the bottle outfeed retractable guide (1) and the support (3) using a clean, dry cloth. Position the bottle outfeed retractable guide (1) using the guide studs. 5- Fit the bottle outfeed retratcable guide (1) on its support (3). 6- Tighten the bolt (2).

1 3

2

F Make sure that the bottle outfeed retractable guide is securely fitted (1). · If necessary, fit the transfer arm head, see procedure "BDM-024. BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006577-01-xx.svg

7- Close the safety doors.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed retractable guide

BDM-047

2/2

© SIDEL

1

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-048

Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed neck guides

1

MACHINE STATUS - no bottles in the bottle outfeed, - all machine power and utilities procedure "BCU-012.

turned

off,

see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - Clean, dry cloths, Specific tools None

1-006580-01-xx.svg

PROCEDURE Removal 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Loosen the cross-nuts (1 ; 2). 3- Remove the bottle outfeed neck guides (3) and the supports (4).

3

1

4

2

If necessary, before refitting, change the bottle outfeed body guides, see procedure "BDM-049. Refit 4- Clean the columns (5) using a clean, dry cloth. 5- Clean the supports (4) and the bottle outfeed neck guides (3) using a clean, dry cloth. The supports (4) must be resting on the column flangings (5). 6- Position the bottle outfeed neck guide (3)/support (4) assembly on the columns (5). 7- Tighten the cross-nuts (1 ; 2). 8- Make sure that the bottle outfeed neck guides (3) are securely fitted. BEFORE YOU FINISH 9- Close the safety doors.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

5 1-006578-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed neck guides

BDM-048

2/2

© SIDEL

1

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-049

Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed body guides

1

MACHINE STATUS - no bottles in the bottle outfeed, - all machine power and utilities procedure "BCU-012.

turned

off,

see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools None

1-006580-01-xx.svg

PROCEDURE Removal 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Remove the locking nuts (1 ; 2). 3- Remove the bottle outfeed body guides (3) and the supports (4). Refit 4- Clean the columns (5) using a clean, dry cloth. 5- Clean the supports (4) and the bottle outfeed body guides (3) using a clean, dry cloth. 6- Position the bottle outfeed body guides (3) and the supports (4). 7- Tighten the cross-nuts (1 ; 2). 8- Make sure that the bottle outfeed body guides (3) are securely fitted.

3

1

BEFORE YOU FINISH

5

4

2 1-006578-02-xx.svg

9- Close the safety doors.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/Refit: bottle outfeed body guides

BDM-049

2/2

© SIDEL

1

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/4

BDM-050

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: seal and compensation springs (holding thrust bar) (HR)

3

GENERAL INFORMATION Visually identifying the type of holding bar : - Standard holding bar (A), follow procedure "BDM-016". - Thrust holding bar (B), follow procedure "BDM-050". Make sure that the mold support unit is secured in the open position before attempting any work on it, see procedure "BSU-001. Do not damage the mold shells. 1-006030-01-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS

A

B

- cold molds. Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005. 1-007335-01-xx.svg

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts - 1 compensation seal (8), - 96 elastic rings (5). Consumables - Clean, dry cloths, - cleaning agent "Net A04". Specific tools - locking system holding brace , - set of thickness gauges , - 2 slings (9) supplied with the set of molds. PROCEDURE

© SIDEL

Removal

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

3

Removal/refit: seal and compensation springs (holding thrust bar) (HR)

1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013. 2- Bring the mold support unit around to your working position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU -013. 3- Unlock and open the mold support unit manually, see procedure "BSU-001. 4- Insert the locking system holding brace, see procedure "BSU-001. 5- Remove the mold base , see procedure "BDM-011. 6- Disconnect the hydraulic lines from the left shell support (1) and the left mold shell (10).

BDM-050

2/4

10

7

1 1-006318-03-xx.svg

7- Remove the nuts (2) and the washers (3). 8- Remove the external boxes (4). 9- Remove the elastic rings (5). 10- Remove the inner boxes (6). 11- Remove the left half-shell support (1) from the support block (7). 12- Remove the compensation seal (8). Refit

6

X

3

2

4

5

Never apply grease when fitting the compensation seal (8). 2 2

7 1-007317-01-xx.svg

© SIDEL

13- Remove the grease from the left half-shell support (1) and the left support block (7) using a cloth dipped in cleaning agent "NET A04". 14- Position the new seal (8) on the left half-shell support (1). 15- Position the slings (9) to hold the seal (8) on the left half shell support (1). 16- Position the left half-shell support (1) in the left support block (7). 17- Position the inner boxes (6). 18- Position the elastic rings (5). 19- Position the outer boxes (4).

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 3/4

BDM-050

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: seal and compensation springs (holding thrust bar) (HR)

20- Position the washers (3). 21- Tighten up the nuts (2) so that the left half shell support (1) is clamped against the left support block (7). 22- Remove the slings (9). Tighten the nuts (2) diagonally to position the left half shell support correctly (1).

3

8 1

23- Tighten the nuts (2) to obtain a gap of X = 1,2 +/-0,05 mm between the inner and outer boxes (6 ; 4). 24- Reconnect the hydraulic lines to the left shell support (1) and the left mold shell (10). 25- Remove the locking system holding brace , see procedure "BSU-001. If there is any resistance when closing the mold support unit adjust the compensation system, see procedure "BRM-023. 26- Close the mold support unit manually, see procedure "BSU-001. 27- Bring the next blow station around to your working position using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013. 28- Repeat as above from step 3 until you have replaced all of the compensation seals and rings.

1-006320-01-xx.svg

9

8

BEFORE YOU FINISH 29- Re-adjust the compensation system, see procedure "BRM-023. 30- Bring the next blow station around to your working position using the JOG system. 31- Repeat as above from step 29 until you have set up all of the mold suport units. 32- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU -013.

The procedure is now complete.

1

© SIDEL

1-006458-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refit: seal and compensation springs (holding thrust bar) (HR)

BDM-050

4/4

© SIDEL

3

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BDM-063

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal / fitting a "TORNADO" solenoid valve

3

GENERAL INFORMATION During the warranty period only the "TORNADO" solenoid valve assembly may be replaced. The "TORNADO" exhaust solenoid valve and its location are fitted with guides to prevent any inversion of the "TORNADO" solenoid valves. Never invert the pilots (upper part) of the "TORNADO" solenoid valves. The pilots of the "TORNADO" solenoid valves are specific to their operation.

1-006030-01-xx.svg

The stretching rod and the process air both pass through the "TORNADO" solenoid valves and the nozzle cylinder. The "TORNADO" solenoid valve assembly and the nozzle cylinder are potential sources of both biological and chemical contamination. Follow the hygiene precautions.

4

Ensure that no foreign bodies are allowed to enter the "TORNADO" solenoid valve assembly or the nozzle cylinder.

2

5 2

10

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

1

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

1-007421-01-xx.svg

Parts - "TORNADO" solenoid valve (7). Consumables - Clean, dry cloths, - Methylated spirit, - "LUB a15" grease. Specific tools - 7 N.m torque wrench (not supplied). PROCEDURE

© SIDEL

Removal

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

3

Removal / fitting a "TORNADO" solenoid valve

1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013. 2- Bring the mold support unit around to your working position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

6

Turn off the power and utility supplies to the machine, see procedure "BCU-012. 3- Remove the stretching rod , see procedure "BDM-026. 4- Block the orifice (1). 5- Disassemble the electrical connections (10) from the coils (2). 6- Remove the union (3). 7- Disconnect the hoses (4 ; 5). 8- Remove the bolts (6). 9- Remove the solenoid valves (7). Refit 10- Clean the seatings (8) of the solenoid valves using a cloth steeped in denaturated alcohol.

BDM-063

2/2

6

6

7 7 3 8 9

F Control the state of the seating surfaces (8) of the solenoid valves.

1-007423-01-xx.svg

If grooving is present, replace the "TORNADO" solenoid valve assembly, see procedure "BDM-002. 11- Grease the o-ring seals (9) using a cloth and "LUB A15" grease. 12- Position the new solenoid valves (7). 13- Tighten the bolts (6) to a torque of 7 N.m. 14- Tighten the connector (3). 15- Reconnect the hoses (4 ; 5).

8

Always follow the references when connecting the electrical connectors to the corresponding solenoid valve functions. The electrical connector references (10) commence with: - "PB" for the preblow solenoid. - "E" for the exhaust solenoid. - "B" for the blowing solenoid.

1-007422-01-xx.svg

Make sure the seals are on the electrical connectors (10). 16- Fit the electrical connections to the coils (2). 17- Fit the stretching rod , see procedure "BDM-026. 18- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013. BEFORE YOU FINISH 19- Test the "TORNADO" solenoid valves cylinder , see procedure "BPU-006.

and the nozzle

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BDM-069

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refitting of an upper stretching stop shock absorber

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Work to be carried out at height: use the equipment fitted on the machine and always follow current safety regulations. Replace the shock absorber (1) with an identical shock absorber. Check the references on the absorbers so as not to confuse them with other absorbers on the machine. MACHINE STATUS

1-006030-18-xx.svg

Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts - Shock absorber (1). Consumables None Specific tools - set of thickness gauges .

© SIDEL

PROCEDURE

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Removal/refitting of an upper stretching stop shock absorber

Removal Activate the low-pressure air in the set-up window of the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

5

4

BDM-069

1

2

1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013. 2- Bring the stretching cylinder (2) onto the horizontal part of the stretching cam (3) using the JOG system. 3- Loosen the check-nut (4). 4- Loosen the screw (5). 5- Loosen and remove the shock absorber (1) from the support (6). Refit "J" represents the gap between the cam follower (8) and the stretching cam (3).

2/2

6

X J

F Check whether the gap (J) is J = 0,2 ±0,1 mm. - If yes. · Go to the next step. - If not. · Adjust the height of the stretching slide (7), see procedure "BDM-014. 6- Fit the new absorber (1) in the support (6) to obtain the gap X = 8,2 +0,4/0 mm between the body of the absorber (1) and the thrust (9). 7- Tighten up the screw (5). 8- Tighten the lock-nut (4).

8

7

3

9 1-007314-01-xx.svg

BEFORE YOU FINISH 9- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BDM-072

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/refitting of the "TORNADO" solenoid valve flow rate limiters

2

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005. 1-006030-01-xx.svg

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts - flow rate limiter (6). Consumables - Clean, dry cloths, - "LUB A15" grease. Specific tools - 7 N.m torque wrench (not supplied). PROCEDURE Removal Do not activate the low pressure air system in the JOG implementation window. 1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013. 2- Bring the mold support unit around to your working position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

1

3

4

8

Turn off the power and utility supplies to the machine, see procedure "BCU-012. 345678-

Remove the bolt (1). Remove the knob (2). Loosen the bolt (3) but do not remove it. Remove the position indicator (4). Remove the fixing bolts (5). Remove the flow rate limiter (6).

2

10

© SIDEL

1-007425-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Removal/refitting of the "TORNADO" solenoid valve flow rate limiters

Refit 9- Clean the axle (7) of the new flow rate limiter (6) using a clean, dry cloth. 10- Clean the bore of the distribution block (8) using a clean, dry cloth.

9

F Check the condition of the distribution block bore (8).

BDM-072

2/2

7

If grooving is present, replace the "TORNADO" solenoid valve assembly, see procedure "BDM-002. 4

1-007424-01-xx.svg

11- Lubricate the distribution block bore (8) using "LUB A15" grease. 12- Fit the new flow rate limiter (6). 13- Tighten the bolts (5) to a torque of 7 N.m. 14- Fit the position indicator (4) using the positioning pin (9). 15- Turn the position indicator (4) knob (10) to the "0,00" value. 16- Tighten the bolt (3). 17- Fit the knob (2). 18- Tighten the bolt (1).

6 5

BEFORE YOU FINISH 19- Check the pre-blow procedure "BPU-013. 20- Close the safety doors.

flow

rate

setting,

see

The procedure is now complete.

7

8

© SIDEL

1-007426-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BDM-075

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Draining of the hydraulic system of the mold base (and neck)

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Never attempt to operate the machine without water in the hydraulic circuits. MACHINE STATUS - thermoregulator - cold. Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, procedure "BCU-005, - main electrical circuit under power, procedure "BCU-001, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004.

see see 1-006030-03-xx.svg

PROCEDURE Drainage 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Close the valves (1 ; 2). 3- Connect the drain valves (3 ; 4) to the drain using the specially designed hoses. 4- Open the drain valves (3 ; 4). 5- Close the safety doors. 6- Press the (5) key.

2

1

The "Settings" family appears. 7- Press the (6) key. The (A) window appears. 8- Press the (7) key. The mold base water circuit is open.

4

© SIDEL

3 1-007351-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Draining of the hydraulic system of the mold base (and neck)

BDM-075

2/2

F Wait until the water has completely drained out. 9- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 10- Disconnect the drain valve (3). 11- Connect the drain valve (3) to an low pressure air hose. 12- Turn on the low pressure air circuit. F Wait until the water has completely drained out. 13- Switch off the low pressure air supply. 14- Disconnect the drain valve (3). 15- Close the safety doors. 16- Press the (7) key. The mold base water circuit is now closed.

5

6 1-010353-09-02.svg

The drainage is now complete. Work can now be carried out on the circuit. Filling 17- Press the (7) key.

The mold base water circuit is open. 18- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 19- Close the drain valve (3). F Make sure that the drain valve (4) is open. 20- Open the valve (1) by a 1/3. 21- As soon as the lined has drained close the drain valve (4). 22- Open the valve (1) fully. 23- Open the valve (2). 24- Disconnect the drain valve (4).

A

7

1-010348-07-02.svg

BEFORE YOU FINISH 25- Close the safety doors. 26- Press the (7) key.

The mold base water circuit is now closed.

27- Close the window(s) and return to the "Welcome" family.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/4

BDM-076

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Draining of the hydraulic system of the oven

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Never attempt to operate the machine without water in the hydraulic circuits. MACHINE STATUS - oven cold, Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, procedure "BCU-005, - main electrical circuit under power, procedure "BCU-001, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004.

see see 1-006030-03-xx.svg

PROCEDURE Drainage

2

1

© SIDEL

1-007351-08-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Draining of the hydraulic system of the oven

BDM-076

1- Close the oven water circuit general inlet. 2- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 3- Close the valves (1 ; 2). 4- Disconnect the water supply hoses from the connectors (3 ; 4). 5- Connect the connector (4) to a sewer drain using an appropriate hose. 6- Connect a low-pressure air supply hose to the Tconnector (3). 7- Close the safety doors. 8- Press the (5) key.

2/4

8

The "Settings" family appears. 9- Press the (6) key. The (A) window appears.

4

3

1-007485-02-xx.svg

10- Press the (7) key.

The oven water circuit is open. 11- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 12- Open the valves (1 ; 2) F Verify that valve (8) is open. 13- Turn on the low pressure air circuit. F Wait until the water has completely drained out. 14- Switch off the low pressure air supply. 15- Disconnect the hoses . 16- Close the safety doors.

5

6

© SIDEL

1-010353-09-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 3/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-076

Draining of the hydraulic system of the oven

2

17- Press the (7) key.

The oven water circuit is closed. The drainage is now complete.

A

Work can now be carried out on the circuit. Filling 18- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 19- Connect connector (3) to the water supply circuit. 20- Open the valve (1) by a 1/3. 21- Open the over water circuit general inlet. 22- Close the safety doors. 23- Press the (7) key.

The oven water circuit is open. 24- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 25- As soon as water flows out, close valve (2). 26- Connect the connector (4) to the water return circuit. 27- Open the valves (1 ; 2). BEFORE YOU FINISH 28- Close the safety doors. 29- Press the (7) key.

© SIDEL

The oven water circuit is closed. 30- Close the window(s) and return to the "Welcome" family. The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

7

1-010348-08-02.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Draining of the hydraulic system of the oven

BDM-076

4/4

© SIDEL

2

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/6

BDM-095

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Reconditioning the oven spindles

3

GENERAL INFORMATION Carry out part or all of the following procedure depending on the required maintenance operation. Fully reconditioning the spindles at 6 000 h is carried out once only. for the second operation, contact SIDEL to carry out a diagnostic on the general condition of the spindle chain. Visually identifying the type of spindles : - Spindle (A), shaft and cylindrical support ring. - Spindle (B), shaft and flattened support ring.

1-006030-21-xx.svg

The maintenance schedule varies according to the type of spindle. Type

Frequency

Spindle (A)

2 000 h / 6 000 h

Spindle (B)

6 000 h

The denominations "upper" and "lower" sprockets designate the sprockets at the oven wheel with the spindle tip pointing downwards.

A

B 1-010327-01-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS

9

14

18

12

10

15

- oven cold. Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

© SIDEL

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts - spring (4), - support ring (5), - bushings (11 ; 13), - elastic rings (2). Consumables - Clean, dry cloths, - cleaning agent NET A03.

1-010306-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

3

Reconditioning the oven spindles

BDM-095

2/6

Specific tools - Clean, dry brush, - outer elastic ring grip, - bushing removal tool (9), - expansible extractor (10), - slide hammer (12), - Ø12,9 mm drift (14), - plastic mallet (15), - Ø12 mm drift (18). PROCEDURE Replacing the spring and the support ring Use a workbench when reconditioning the spindle chain.

3

1

2

4

6

Removal Do not activate the low pressure air system in the JOG implementation window. 1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013. 2- Use the JOG system to bring the spindle up to your working position, see procedure "BCU-013. 3- Remove the spindle tip (1), see procedure "BDM-012. 4- Remove the elastic ring (2). 5- Remove the bayonet ring (3), spring (4) and support ring (5). 6- Disassemble the various parts (3 ; 4 ; 5).

1-010305-01-xx.svg

Refit Never grease the shaft (6), as it is lubricated by the selflubricating bushings. 7- Clean the bayonet ring (3) and the shaft (6) using a clean, dry cloth. For (B)-type spindles, position the support ring (5) according to the flat sections on the shaft (6).

5

4

3 1-010304-01-xx.svg

© SIDEL

8- Position the new support ring (5) on the shaft (6). 9- Position the new ring (4). 10- Position the bayonet ring (3). 11- Position the elastic ring (2). 12- Fit the spindle tip, see procedure "BDM-012. 13- If necessary, repeat as above from step 22 until you have replaced all of the springs and rings. Replacing the sleeve bushings

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 3/6

BDM-095

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Reconditioning the oven spindles

For this operation, you can remove the spindle chain in sections of 10 links. Removal 14- Use the JOG system to bring the spindle fitted with an upper sprocket up to your working position, see procedure "BCU-013. 15- Remove the link(s) (7) from the spindle chain, see procedure "BDM-010. 16- Remove all of the sleeves (8) from the link(s) (7) concerned. 17- Position the bushing removal tool (9) in the vice.

3

8 13

7

17

16

11 1-006193-02-xx.svg

18- Position the expansible extractor (10) under the bushing (11) on the sleeve (8). 19- Position the expansible extractor (10)/sleeve (8) assembly in the tool (9). 20- Fit the slide hammer (12) along with the expansible extractor (10)/sleeve (8) assembly. 21- Remove the bushing (11) from the sleeve (8) using the slide hammer (12).

10

11 8

9

© SIDEL

1-010307-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

3

Reconditioning the oven spindles

22- Remove the slide hammer (12) from the expansible extractor (10). 23- Turn the sleeve over (8).

Part C BDM-095

4/6

12

10 8

9 1-010308-01-xx.svg

24- Remove the second bush (13) using the Ø12,9 mm drift (14) and the plastic mallet (15). 25- Repeat as above from step 18 until you have removed all of the bushings (11 ; 13) from all of the sleeves (8). Cleaning Never clean parts from the spindle chain by soaking them. Never use excessive amounts of solvent in order to preserve the lubrication on the bearings. 26- Clean the parts (7 ; 8 ; 16 ; 17) using a brush, a cloth and the cleaning agent "NET A03".

8

9

1-010332-01-xx.svg

© SIDEL

Refit 27- Position the sleeve (8) in the bush removal tool (9). 28- Position the new bush (11) in the sleeve (8) using the Ø12 mm drift (18) and the plastic mallet (15). 29- Turn the sleeve over (8).

14

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 5/6

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-095

Reconditioning the oven spindles

30- Position the second bush (13) in the sleeve (8) using the Ø12 mm drift (18) and the plastic mallet (15). 31- Repeat as above from step 27 until you have positioned bushes (11 ; 13) in all of the sleeves (8). 32- Assemble the link(s) (7), see procedure "BDM-010. 33- Fit the link(s) (7) on the spindle chain, see procedure "BDM-010.

F Check that the sprockets (16) engage on the spindle drive chain. 34- Repeat as above from step 14 until you have replaced all of the bushes (11 ; 13) in the sleeves (8) on the spindle chain.

3

8

11

13 9

BEFORE YOU FINISH 35- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013. 36- Sign off the operation on the machine's worksheet.

The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-010309-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Reconditioning the oven spindles

BDM-095

6/6

© SIDEL

3

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDM-098

Reconditioning nozzle cylinder distributer

3

GENERAL INFORMATION A full reconditioning of the nozzle cylinder distributer must be carried out at 6 000 h. At 12 000 h, the nozzle cylinder distributer must be replaced.

1-006757-01-xx.svg

The components (1 ; 2 ; 3) must be fitted correctly to avoid serious malfunctions.

A

MACHINE STATUS - all machine power and utilities turned off, procedure "BCU-012, - nozzle cylinder distributer removed, procedure "BDM-036.

see see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts - reconditioning kit (A). Consumables - Clean, dry cloths, - light "LOCTITE 242" threadlock. Specific tools - Clean, dry brush.

1-010569-01-xx.svg

PROCEDURE 1234567-

Remove the bolts (4). Remove the solenoid valve (1). Remove the end-plate (2). Remove the seals (5 ; 6). Clean the components using a clean dry cloth. Position the seals (5 ; 6). Fit the plate (2) and the solenoid valve (1).

5

6

12

11

10

9

7

© SIDEL

Fit the bolts (4) having applied "LOCTITE 242" light threadlock. 8- Tighten the bolts (4). 9- Remove the bolts (7). 10- Remove the end-plate (8). 11- Remove the shock absorber (9). 12- Remove the seal (10). 13- Clean the components using a clean dry cloth.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

4

1

2

3

8

1-010570-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

3

Reconditioning nozzle cylinder distributer

Part C BDM-098

2/2

14- Position the seal (10) and the shock absorber (9) in the plate (8). 15- Remove the spring (11). Use the orifices in the body (3) to extract the drawer (12). 16- Remove the tray (12). Fit the drawer (12) in the correct direction so that you can insert the spring (11) into the drawer. 17- Fit the tray (12). 18- Insert the spring (11). 19- Refit the plate (8). Fit the bolts (7) having applied "LOCTITE 242" light threadlock. 20- Tighten the bolts (7). BEFORE YOU FINISH 21- Fit the nozzle cylinder procedure "BDM-036.

distributer

,

see

© SIDEL

F Check that the nozzle cylnder distributer functions properly when the machine starts. The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BDM-106

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/Refit - silencers on the mold support unit solenoid valve

3

MACHINE STATUS - the machine is stopped, see procedure "BCU-006, - PCC application (not) in Setting mode. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts - 2 silencers (1). Consumables None Specific tools None

1-006030-01-xx.svg

PROCEDURE Removal Do not activate the low pressure air system in the JOG implementation window. 1- Bring the mold support unit around to your working position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013. 2- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 3- Unscrew and remove the silencers (1).

1

1-010742-01-xx.svg

Refit 4- Fit and tighten the silencers (1). 5- Repeat as above, from step 1 until you have replaced all of the silencers (1). BEFORE YOU FINISH 6- Close the safety doors.

The procedure is now complete. 1

© SIDEL

1-010738-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/Refit - silencers on the mold support unit solenoid valve

BDM-106

2/2

© SIDEL

3

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BDM-107

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/Refit - mold support unit compensation solenoid

3

GENERAL INFORMATION For an intevention on several blow stations, use manual rotation (and not the JOG) in order to protect the lowpressure air circuit.

1-006030-01-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS

1

5

8

6

- the machine is stopped, see procedure "BCU-006, - PCC application (not) in Setting mode. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts - (7) solenoid valve . Consumables - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools None

2

4

7

3 1-010738-02-xx.svg

PROCEDURE Removal 1- Advance the desired blowing station until it is opposite the work station using manual rotation, see procedure "BCU-014. Turn off the power and utility supplies to the machine, see procedure "BCU-012. 2- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 3- Remove the bolt (1). 4- Remove the electrical connector (2). 5- Disconnect the hoses (3 ; 4). 6- Loosen the nut (5). 7- Remove the union (6). 8- Hold the solenoid (7) and remove the screws (8). 9- Unscrew and remove the silencers (9). 10- Remove the union (10).

9

10

8

6

© SIDEL

1-010739-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

3

Removal/Refit - mold support unit compensation solenoid

BDM-107

2/2

Refit 11- Clean the support (11) using a clean, dry cloth.

F Check the condition and the position of the seals (12). 12- Fit and tighten the connector (10). 13- Fit and tighten the silencers (9). 14- Position the solenoid (7) on the holes (13) on the support (11). 15- Hold the solenoid (7) and tighten the screws (8).

9

10

12

6 1-010740-01-xx.svg

16- Position the connector (6). 17- Tighten the nut (5). 18- Reconnect the hoses (3 ; 4).

8

F Make sure that the seal (14) is in position on the electrical connector (2). 19- Connect the electrical connector (2). 20- Tighten the bolt (1). BEFORE YOU FINISH

13

11

21- Close the safety doors.

1-010741-01-xx.svg

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

Mechanical operation procedure Adjustment procedure

TABLE OF CONTENTS Setting the mold opening/closing lever

.....................................................................................................

BRM-001

Setting the heights of the transfer arms

...................................................................................................

BRM-002

Setting the tension of the spindle chains

..................................................................................................

BRM-003

Synchronizing the preform infeed/oven

....................................................................................................

BRM-004

Synchronizing the oven wheel/preform transfer Synchronizing the molds/bottle transfer

.......................................................................................

BRM-005

...................................................................................................

BRM-006

................................................................................................

BRM-007

Synchronizing the preform transfer/molds Setting the tensions on the timing belts Setting the stretching bottom thrust

....................................................................................................

BRM-008

..........................................................................................................

BRM-009

Setting the interior and exterior cooling shields Setting the infeed rail

........................................................................................

BRM-010

................................................................................................................................

BRM-011

Setting the positions of the braking system friction pads

.........................................................................

BRM-012

..................................................................................................

BRM-013

Setting the tensions on the conveyor belts

...............................................................................................

BRM-015

Setting the height of the unscrambler unit

................................................................................................

BRM-016

Setting up the stabilization rail assembly

.................................................................................................

BRM-017

Setting the unscrambler roller assembly

Synchronizing the bottle outfeed/bottle transfer

.......................................................................................

Setting the compensation system using single bars (HR) Setting the bottle base outfeed guide

.......................................................................................................

Setting the compensation system using thrust bars (HR)

BRM-018 BRM-021 BRM-022

........................................................................

BRM-023

.......................................................................................................

BRM-044

© SIDEL

Setting the stretching cylinder rollers

........................................................................

Publication date : 13/11/2009

C - 1/2

Part C

© SIDEL

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

C - 2/2

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/4

BRM-001

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the mold opening/closing lever

2

GENERAL INFORMATION This procedure must be carried out with the molds at process temperature where this is greater than 60 °C. If the same opening/closing lever is regularly misadjusted, do not tighten to the highest torque rather check that the shaft and the various assembled parts are correctly greased. This procedure requires the presence of 2 technicians. 1-006030-37-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS

5

- molds at production temperature, - the machine is stopped, Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005, - hydraulic circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

1 3

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables None Specific tools - protective gloves (thermal), - set of thickness gauges , - torque wrench 10 to 50 N.m.

2

PROCEDURE 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Unbolt the button (1) from the support (2). 3- Install the cam (3) in the upper part of the support (2). 4- Bolt the button (1). Extreme caution and perfect coordination between the 2 technicians is required for the following operations.

© SIDEL

5- Bring into position the lever (7) to be adjusted on the cam (3) using manual rotation, see procedure "BCU-014.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-008393-01-xx.svg

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

2

Setting the mold opening/closing lever

BRM-001

2/4

Check that the station to be adjusted is in closed position and locked out. Warning - risk of burns. Wear heat protection gloves. 6- Advance the roller (4) until opposite the mark (5) of the cam (3) using manual rotation, see procedure "BCU-014. 7- Loosen the bolts on the expanding assembler (6) crosswise but do not remove them. In normal use the components of the expanding assembler (6) come apart when the bolts are unscrewed. If you have any difficulty releasing the parts of the assembler (6) use the bolts M10 and the tappings M10 located at the position of the white bolts (9).

7

9

8- Position the roller (4) into contact with the cam (3) and align with mark (5).

F Make sure that the roller (4) rolls freely. F Control play X < 0.05 mm between the roller (4) and the cam (3). F Check the gap Y = 0.05 mm between the connecting rod (7) and the console (8). 9- Tighten up the bolts on the expanding assembler (6) crosswise to a torque of 3,2 daN.m. Tighten in crosswise fashion the bolts of the expanding assembler (6) in the order indicated in the illustration (A).

6 1-006671-02-xx.svg

Tightening up the expanding assembler (6) can modify the gaps X and Y.

A

F Check that the follower (4) rolls freely. F Check the gaps X and Y again. · If the gaps X and/or Y exceed tolerances go to step 7. F Make sure that the bolts on the expanding assembler (6) are not raised above the inner surface of the connecting rod (7). 10- Unbolt the button (1) from the support (2).

12

1

8 5 4 9 10 3 6 2

7 11

© SIDEL

1-006671-03-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 3/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

BRM-001

Setting the mold opening/closing lever

11- Install the cam (3) in the lower part of the support (2). 12- Bolt the button (1). 13- Unlock and open the mold support unit manually, see procedure "BSU-001. · If the mold support unit is difficult to open reset the gap Y.

2 X

8

Y

BEFORE YOU FINISH 14- Close the safety doors.

The procedure is now complete.

7

6

4

3

© SIDEL

1-008390-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the mold opening/closing lever

BRM-001

4/4

© SIDEL

2

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

BRM-002

Setting the heights of the transfer arms

3

GENERAL INFORMATION This procedure must be carried out with the molds at process temperature where this is greater than 60 °C.

A

B

Eye protection is obligatory. C

The reference transfer arm on a wheel is stamped with the lowest number. A bottle transfer arm inspection is carried out in (A).

1-006030-36-xx.svg

A preform transfer arm inspection is carried out in (B). MACHINE STATUS - molds at production temperature, - the machine is stopped, Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005, - hydraulic circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

9

14 13 1

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables None Specific tools - protective gloves (thermal), - dummy grip tooling (1), - grip height tool (2), - set of thickness gauges , - comparator (3) and column, - guide pin (4).

1-010326-01-xx.svg

PROCEDURE 1- Connect the JOG procedure "BCU-013.

to

the

work

zone,

see

© SIDEL

Warning - risk of burns. Wear heat protection gloves.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

3

Setting the heights of the transfer arms

BRM-002

Checking the height of the reference transfer arm 2- Remove the nozzle tip from the blowing station corresponding to the reference transfer arm, see procedure "BDM-025. 3- Remove the mold support unit corresponding to the reference transfer arm, see procedure "BDM-011. 4- Remove the pair of grips (5) from the reference transfer arm , see procedure "BDM-024. 5- Fit the dummy grip (1) on the reference transfer arm using the 2 bolts (6 ; 7).

2/4

2

8 1-006521-01-xx.svg

6- Position the grip height tooling (2) on the shell support (8) for the mold support unit corresponding to the reference transfer arm. - For the preform transfer arm. · Position the speed follower (9) at the marker "FIN" engraved on the cam using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013.

14 13 3 5

4

1-010329-01-xx.svg

F Check the gap "X" between the 2 tools across the length of the dummy grip (1) using a set of thickness gauges. - If the gap is correct. · Refit the pair of transfer grips, see procedure "BDM-024. - If the gap is not correct. · Adjust the height of the transfer arm . Transfer arm Preforms (mm)

Transfer arm Bottles (mm)

X = 1 ±0,05

X = 0,7 ±0,05

Setting the height of the reference transfer arm 7- Loosen the counter-nut (10) but do not remove it. 8- Tighten or loosen the shaft (11) to obtain the measurement "X". 9- Tighten the lock-nut (10).

The height of the transfer arm is set. 10- Remove the grip height tool (2). 11- Remove the 2 bolts (6 ; 7). 12- Remove the dummy grip (1).

10

11

X

2

1

14

12 1-010259-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

© SIDEL

-

The dummy grip (1) positions above the grip height tool (2). For a bottle transfer arm. · Position the speed follower (9) at the marker "DEBUT" engraved on the cam using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013. The dummy grip (1) positions above the grip height tool (2).

Part C 3/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

BRM-002

Setting the heights of the transfer arms

F Make sure that the followers (9 ; 12) are centered on the cam races (13). - If they are not centered. · Set the position of the followers , see procedure "BDM-038. 13- Refit the pair of transfer grips, see procedure "BDM-024. Checking the other transfer arms 14- Position the reference transfer arms (14) to (C) using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013. 15- Position the pin (4) in the grip (5) on the reference transfer arm (14). 16- Fit the comparator (3) and the column above the reference transfer arm (14). 17- Position the sensor on the comparator (3) on the pin (4). 18- Position the needle on the comparator (3) on "0".

3

10

11

14

The comparator (3) must not move. 19- Fit the pin (4) in the transfer arm you wish to check. 20- Position the transfer arm under the comparator (3) using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013.

F Check the position of the needle. - If the needle is not at "0". · Adjust the height of the transfer arm . - If the pin is on "0". · Repeat the previous steps, from step 14 until all the transfer arms have been checked. Setting the other transfer arms 21- Open the vision system, see procedure "BCU-036. 22- Loosen the counter-nut (10) but do not remove it. 23- Tighten or loosen the shaft (11) so that the needle on the comparator (3) is at "0".

7 5

The transfer arm is at the same height as the reference transfer arm. 24- Tighten the lock-nut (10).

The height of the transfer arm is set. F Make sure that the followers (9 ; 12) are centered on the cam races (13). - If they are not centered. · Set the position of the followers , see procedure "BDM-038. - If centring is correct. · Repeat the previous steps, from step 14 until all the transfer arms have been checked. BEFORE YOU FINISH

© SIDEL

25- Close the vision system, see procedure "BCU-036. 26- Fit the nozzle tip , see procedure "BDM-025. 27- Fit the mold on the mold support unit, see procedure "BDM-011. 28- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

6

12

9 1-010324-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the heights of the transfer arms

BRM-002

4/4

© SIDEL

3

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

BRM-003

Setting the tension of the spindle chains

2

GENERAL INFORMATION The tension of the spindle chain needs to be set correctly in order for the preforms to be conveyed correctly through the oven. The spindle chain tension is determined by the compression of the spring (1) on the notched wheel (3) plate (2).

1-006030-21-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

3

PROCEDURE 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013. 3- Tighten or loosen the nut (4).

4

1

2 1-006525-01-xx.svg

The length of the washer and spring (1) assembly is 250 ±30 mm. Use a pin spuller in the holes on the nut (4) to set the tension on the spring (1) more easily.

1

F Check the settings for the oven spindle rotation chains, see procedure "BRM-032. BEFORE YOU FINISH 4- Rotate the machine procedure "BCU-013.

using

the

JOG,

4

© SIDEL

F Make sure that the spindle chain functions correctly. 5- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013. 6- Close the safety doors. The procedure is now complete.

see

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-006526-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the tension of the spindle chains

BRM-003

2/2

© SIDEL

2

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BRM-004

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Synchronizing the preform infeed/oven

3

GENERAL INFORMATION (P) is the meeting point between the preforms and the spindles. Check the general synchronization before attempting any individual synchronization, see procedure "BNM-012.

P

Check the belt tensions, see procedure "BRM-008. Check the torque limiters are in working position.

1-006030-47-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005. PROCEDURE

1

1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013. 2- Loosen the nut (1). 3- Loosen the screws (2) but do not remove them. 4- Pivot the infeed guide (3) manually. 5- Load 3 preforms onto the infeed wheel (4). 6- Bring the preform up to the spindle tip (5) using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013.

The preform is under the spindle tip (5). 7- Set the meeting point (P) manually. 8- Tighten the nut (1). 9- Tighten the bolts (2).

3 1-006084-06-xx.svg

2

© SIDEL

1-006527-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

3

Synchronizing the preform infeed/oven

F Check the synchronization on the next two preforms. - If the synchronization is out. · Go to step 2. 10- Rotate the machine using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013. The preforms are cleared. 11- Remove the preforms.

Part C BRM-004

2/2

5

BEFORE YOU FINISH 12- Check the synchronization of the machine before starting production, see procedure "BNM-012. 13- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

The procedure is now complete.

4

© SIDEL

1-006100-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

BRM-005

Synchronizing the oven wheel/preform transfer

3

GENERAL INFORMATION Eye protection is obligatory. (P) is the meeting point between the preforms with the grips on the preform transfer arms (4).

P

Do not confuse point (P) and the synchronization marker "SYNCHRO" (12) engraved on the transfer cam. 1-006030-38-xx.svg

Check the general synchronization before attempting any individual synchronization, see procedure "BNM-012. Check the belt tensions, see procedure "BRM-008. 11

Check the torque limiters are in working position.

4

1

1-010326-02-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

2

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables None Specific tools - dummy grip tooling (1), - oven wheel dummy sector tool (2), - guide pin (3).

5 1-006528-01-xx.svg

© SIDEL

PROCEDURE

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

3

Synchronizing the oven wheel/preform transfer

1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Remove the oven outfeed guide , see procedure "BDM-028. 3- Remove one of the infeed wheel sectors on the oven wheel, see procedure "BDM-023. 4- Fit the dummy oven wheel sector (2) using the bolts (5). 5- Remove the grip from the preform transfer arm (4) which corresponds to approximately 1 spindle from the bore on the oven wheel sector (2), see procedure "BDM-024. 6- Fit the dummy grip (1) on the transfer arm (4). 7- Remove the preform transfer wheel/oven wheel transmission belt (9). 8- Loosen, but do not remove, the 3 fixing bolts (6) on the fine setting plate (10).

5

1

BRM-005 4

3

2

2/4

5

1-010325-01-xx.svg

8

6

7

10

9

Setting the tension of a belt will change the angular position of the synchronized elements. 14- Position and set the oven wheel/preform transfer wheel transmission belt (9), see procedure "BRM-008. 15- Loosen the screws (6) but do not remove them. 16- Adjust the alignment of the bore on the dummy oven wheel sector (2) with the bore on the dummy grip (1) using the bolts (8) on the fine setting plate (10). 17- Insert the pin (3) in the 2 bores on the tools (1) and (2).

F Make sure that the pin (3) is not obstructed. - The pin (3) is not obstructed. · Repeat steps 16 to 17 . 18- Tighten the bolts (6) on the fine setting plate (10). 19- Tighten up the check nuts (7). The setting position is locked. 20- Remove the pin (3). 21- Remove the dummy sector on the oven wheel (2) using the bolts (5). 22- Fit the oven wheel infeed wheel using the bolts (5), see procedure "BDM-023. 23- Fit the oven outfeed guide, see procedure "BDM-028. 24- Bring the transfer arm (4) around to the working position using the manual rotation system, see procedure "BCU-014. Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-006346-02-xx.svg

11

12

1-006756-01-xx.svg

© SIDEL

9- Loosen the counter nuts (7) but do not remove them. 10- Position the bolts (6) in the middle of the oblong slots on the fine setting plate (10) using the bolts (8). 11- Tighten the bolts (6). 12- Bring the roller (11) on the transfer arm (4) along to the synchronization marker "SYNCHRO"(12) on the transfer cam using the manual rotation system, see procedure "BCU-014. 13- Manually line up the bore on the dummy oven wheel sector (2) with the bore on the dummy grip (1).

Part C 3/4

BRM-005

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Synchronizing the oven wheel/preform transfer

25- Remove the dummy grip (1). 26- Fit the transfer grip , see procedure "BDM-024. BEFORE YOU FINISH 27- Close the safety doors.

© SIDEL

F Check the synchronization of the machine before starting production, see procedure "BNM-012. The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

3

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Synchronizing the oven wheel/preform transfer

BRM-005

4/4

© SIDEL

3

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog /

1/4

BRM-006

Synchronizing the molds/bottle transfer

3

GENERAL INFORMATION Eye protection is obligatory. Check the general synchronization before attempting any individual synchronization, see procedure "BNM-012. Check the belt tensions, see procedure "BRM-008.

P

Check the torque limiters are in working position. Check the centering of the nozzle cylinders, see procedure "BDM-015.

1-006030-50-xx.svg

1

This procedure must be carried out with the molds at process temperature where this is greater than 60 °C. (P) is the meeting point of items with the transfer grips.

1-010238-01-xx.svg

The reference transfer arm on a wheel is stamped with the lowest number. This procedure requires the presence of 2 technicians: - The first technician rotates the machine using the manual rotation system, - the second technician checks the positions of the meeting points.

9

7

1

© SIDEL

1-010326-05-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog /

3

Synchronizing the molds/bottle transfer

BRM-006

2/4

To ensure correct synchronization: - the dummy stretching rod (3) should slide freely through the guide ring (2) on the dummy grip (1), - the reference transfer arm speed roller (9) should position on the reference marking "DEBUT" on the transfer cam (7).

1

2

3 1-010262-01-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS - molds at production temperature, - the machine is stopped, Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005, - hydraulic circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

9

7 1-008638-01-xx.svg

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables None Specific tools - protective gloves (thermal), - dummy grip tooling (1), - ring for dummy arm-head (2), - dummy stretching rod (3), - 3 preforms which have been cut shorter.

1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Remove the pair of grips from the reference transfer arm , see procedure "BDM-024. 3- Fit the dummy grip (1) on the transfer arm . Publication date : 13/11/2009

© SIDEL

PROCEDURE

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog /

3/4

BRM-006

Synchronizing the molds/bottle transfer

3

4- Fit the ring (2) on the false grip (1). Warning - risk of burns. Wear heat protection gloves. 5- Remove the stretching rod on the blowing station no.1. 6- Remove the nozzle tip from blowing station n°1, see procedure "BDM-025. Make sure that the stretching and nozzle cylinders are in the raised position. 7- Bring blowing station no.1 around using the manual rotation system, see procedure "BCU-014.

4

4

5

6

5 1-006367-02-xx.svg

8 7

© SIDEL

The mold shaft on blowing station no.1 is lined up with marker "RDS" on the transfer cam (7). 8- Loosen the 3 fixing bolts (4) on the synchronization device . 9- Loosen the counter nuts (5) but do not remove them. 10- Loosen the screws (6) but do not remove them. The transfer wheel (8) has an angle of clearance. 11- Place the dummy stretching rod (3) in the ring (2). - If a bolt (4 ; 6) is up against the edge. · Remove the dummy stretching rod (3). · Shift the corresponding belt by one notch. · Set the tension of the belt, see procedure "BRM-008. 12- Set the position of the transfer wheel using the fine setting bolts (6) on the synchronization device. The dummy stretching rod (3) should slide freely in the ring (2). 13- Tighten the bolts (4). 14- Tighten the bolts (6). 15- Tighten up the check nuts (5). 16- Remove the dummy stretching rod (3). 17- Fit the stretching rod , see procedure "BDM-026. 18- Remove the dummy grip (1). 19- Refit the pair of transfer grips, see procedure "BDM-024. 20- Fit the nozzle tip , see procedure "BDM-025. 21- Insert the 3 cut preforms into the molds, before the meeting point.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-006369-02-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog /

3

Synchronizing the molds/bottle transfer

BRM-006

4/4

Extreme caution and perfect coordination between the 2 technicians is required for the following operations.

F Check the synchronization using the manual rotation system, see procedure "BCU-014. Setting can then be optimised. At normal production speeds, the play and the inertia of the parts can change the settings. 7

BEFORE YOU FINISH 22- Close the safety doors.

1-006368-02-xx.svg

© SIDEL

F Check the synchronization of the machine before starting production, see procedure "BNM-012. The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog /

1/4

BRM-007

Synchronizing the preform transfer/molds

3

GENERAL INFORMATION Eye protection is obligatory. Check the general synchronization before attempting any individual synchronization, see procedure "BNM-012. Check the belt tensions, see procedure "BRM-008.

P

Check the torque limiters are in working position. 1-006030-29-xx.svg

Check the centering of the nozzle cylinders, see procedure "BDM-015.

1

This procedure must be carried out with the molds at process temperature where this is greater than 60 °C. (P) is the meeting point of items with the transfer grips. The reference transfer arm on a wheel is stamped with the lowest number. This procedure requires the presence of 2 technicians: - The first technician rotates the machine using the manual rotation system, - the second technician checks the positions of the meeting points.

1-010238-01-xx.svg

To ensure correct synchronization: - the dummy stretching rod (3) should slide freely through the guide ring (1) on the dummy grip (2), - the reference transfer arm speed roller (10) should position on the reference marking "FIN" on the transfer cam (8). MACHINE STATUS

© SIDEL

- molds at production temperature, - the machine is stopped, Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005, - hydraulic circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Publication date : 13/11/2009

10 8 1-008637-02-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog /

3

Synchronizing the preform transfer/molds

BRM-007

2/4

Parts None Consumables None Specific tools - protective gloves (thermal), - dummy grip tooling (1), - ring for dummy arm-head (2), - dummy stretching rod (3), - 3 preforms which have been cut shorter. PROCEDURE 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Remove the pair of grips from the reference transfer arm , see procedure "BDM-024. 3- Fit the dummy grip (1) on the transfer arm . 4- Fit the ring (2) on the false grip (1). Warning - risk of burns.

5

Wear heat protection gloves. 5- Remove the stretching rod on the blowing station no. 1, see procedure "BDM-026. 6- Remove the nozzle tip from blowing station n°1, see procedure "BDM-025.

4

Make sure that the stretching and nozzle cylinders are in the raised position.

6

7- Bring blowing station no.1 around using the manual rotation system, see procedure "BCU-014.

The mold shaft on blowing station no.1 is lined up with marker "RDS" on the transfer cam (8). 8- Loosen the 3 fixing bolts (4) on the synchronization device (5). 9- Loosen the counter nuts (6) but do not remove them. 10- Loosen the screws (7) but do not remove them. The transfer wheel (9) has an angle of clearance. 11- Place the dummy stretching rod (3) in the ring (2). - If a bolt (4 ; 7) is up against the edge. · Remove the dummy stretching rod (3). · Shift the corresponding belt by one notch. · Set the tension of the belt, see procedure "BRM-008.

4

7

6 1-006367-01-xx.svg

8

© SIDEL

1-006368-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog /

3/4

BRM-007

Synchronizing the preform transfer/molds

3

the reference transfer arm speed roller (11) should position on the reference marking "RDS" on the transfer cam (8). 12- Set the position of the transfer wheel (9) using the fine setting bolts (7) on the synchronization device.

9

The dummy stretching rod (3) should slide freely in the ring (2).

10 8

1

1-010326-04-xx.svg

13- Tighten the bolts (4). 14- Tighten the bolts (7). 15- Tighten up the check nuts (6). 16- Remove the dummy stretching rod (3). 17- Fit the stretching rod , see procedure "BDM-026. 18- Remove the dummy grip (1). 19- Refit the pair of transfer grips, see procedure "BDM-024. 20- Fit the nozzle tip , see procedure "BDM-025. 21- Insert the cut preforms 3 in the transfer grips, before the meeting point.

9

8

Extreme caution and perfect coordination between the 2 technicians is required for the following operations.

1-006369-01-xx.svg

F Check the synchronization using the manual rotation system, see procedure "BCU-014. Setting can then be optimised. At normal production speeds, the play and the inertia of the parts can change the settings. BEFORE YOU FINISH 22- Close the safety doors.

F Check the synchronization of the machine before starting production, see procedure "BNM-012. The procedure is now complete.

8

11

1

2

3

© SIDEL

1-010262-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog /

Synchronizing the preform transfer/molds

BRM-007

4/4

© SIDEL

3

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

BRM-008

1/2

Setting the tensions on the timing belts

2

GENERAL INFORMATION If the belts lose their tension regularly after the commissioning period check the settings and conditions of the various mechanical parts and replace the belt if necessary. Never adjust the setting bolts (1) for the tensioner (2) positions. Check new belts after several hours of production. 1-006580-02-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS

4

- all machine power procedure "BCU-012.

and

utilities

turned

off,

see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

5

Parts None Consumables None Specific tools - frequency meter (3) and instructions for use. PROCEDURE

Tension (Hz)

Blow wheel notched belt

30 +/-1

5

Preform transfer notched belt

31 +/-2

6

Oven wheel notched belt, SBO 16 / 16 Oven wheel notched belt, SBO 16 / 20 Oven wheel notched belt, SBO 20 / 20 Oven wheel notched belt, SBO 20 / 24

23,6 +1,4/-1,6 18,2 +0,8/-1,2 21,2 +0,8/-1,2 16,4 +0,6/-0,7

Infeed wheel notched belt

77 +/-4

Not present with the Combi connection module (option)

© SIDEL

*

Belt type

4

7

8 12

6 7 1-007487-05-xx.svg

1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Inhibit machine rotation, see procedure "BSU-003. Referenc e

13

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

2

Setting the tensions on the timing belts

Referenc e

Belt type

Tension (Hz)

8

Bottle transfer wheel notched belt

25 +/-1

12

Bottle outfeed belt (option)* Notched fast unloading (option)

16 +/-1

13

3- If need be, remove procedure "BCU-036.

the

belt

Part C BRM-008

2/2

70 +/- 3

electrical

unit,

see

To check the belt tensions with the frequency meter, make the belts vibrate by tapping them with a flat wrench.

F Check the belt tensions using the frequency meter (3) at the position indicated. - If the tension is correct. · Go to step 14 4- Loosen the screws (9) but do not remove them. 5- Loosen the counter nuts (10) but do not remove them. 6- Set the tension of the belt using the tensioner (2) adjustment bolt (11). 7- Tighten up the check nuts (10). 8- Tighten the bolts (9). 9- Repeat steps 4 to 8 until you have set the tensions on all of the belts. The belt tensions are now set. 10- Release machine rotation, see procedure "BSU-003. 11- Rotate the machine using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013. 12- Inhibit machine rotation, see procedure "BSU-003. F Check the belt tensions using the frequency meter (3) at the position indicated. - If the tension is incorrect. · Repeat as above from step 4 . 13- Fit the electrical unit, see procedure "BCU-036.

3 1-006530-01-xx.svg

2 9

11

1

10

BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006532-01-xx.svg

14- Release machine rotation, see procedure "BSU-003. 15- Close the safety doors.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

BRM-009

Setting the stretching bottom thrust

2

GENERAL INFORMATION This procedure must be carried out with the molds at process temperature where this is greater than 60 °C. Set the bottom stretching thrusts (1) following a change to the production item. Never run the machine if any of the bottom thrusts (1) have not been set.

1-006030-01-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS - molds at production temperature, - the machine is stopped, Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005, - hydraulic circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

1 2 3

1-006200-02-xx.svg

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables None Specific tools - protective gloves (thermal), - certified standard preforms for the type of production being carried out, - comparator and the magnetic support. PROCEDURE Do not activate the low pressure air system in the JOG implementation window. 1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013. 2- Bring the mold support unit around to your working position using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

© SIDEL

Warning - risk of burns. Wear heat protection gloves.

1-006372-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

2

Setting the stretching bottom thrust

Part C BRM-009

2/2

3- Loosen the counter-nut (2) but do not remove it. 4- Screw the stretching bottom thrust (1) fully into the thrust (3). 5- Measure the thickness (E) of the bottom of the preform at the injection point. 6- Purge the stretching cylinder (4) using the button (5).

The stretching cylinder (4) is no longer blocked in the upposition and the rod can slide freely. The indicator (6) indicates the pressure remaining in the cyclinder.

7- Lower the slide (7) manually.

The stretching rod (8) is in contact with the bottom of the mold. 8- Position the conparator under the slide (7). The adjustment of the distance "X" between the stretching pin (8) and the base of the mold is process function: - X = 2/3 of the thickness (E) of the preform for items containing a non gaseous liquid. - X = the thickness (E) of the preform for items containing a CSD (Carbonated Soft Drink) liquid. - X = 1 mm for machines fitted with the scavenging system (option).

4

5

6

9- Adjust the position of the lower stretch stop (1), to raise the slide (7) of "X" depending on the process.

1-006371-01-xx.svg

The distance between the stretching rod (8) and the mold base is theoretical and may vary according to the production process. 10- Keep the stretching bottom thrust (1) in position and tighten up the counter nut (2). 11- Note the bottom stretching thrust (1) to be used with this mold on the station. 12- If necessary, repeat the previous steps from step 2 until complete adjustment of the lower stretch stop assembly (1).

7 1 8

2

BEFORE YOU FINISH 13- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-006373-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

BRM-010

Setting the interior and exterior cooling shields

2

GENERAL INFORMATION The inner and simultaneously.

outer

cooling

shields

are

set

This procedure is a base for settings. Settings for the cooling shields will be refined depending on the process and the articles to be produced.

1-006030-09-xx.svg

Settings base for cooling shields and lamps: - for preforms with non-crystalized neck, See Illustration (A), - for preforms with crystalized neck, See Illustration (B).

3 2

MACHINE STATUS - oven cold, - all machine power procedure "BCU-012.

and

utilities

turned

off,

see 1-006075-02-xx.svg

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables None Specific tools - mirror (1), - certified standard preforms for the type of production being carried out.

2

3

1-006076-02-xx.svg

PROCEDURE Setting the inner cooling shield 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. To faciltate tightening, the handles (2 ; 8 ; 10 ; 13) can be disengaged.

© SIDEL

Depending on the configuration of your machine, these elements (2 ; 8 ; 10 ; 13) may vary visually but their functions remain the same. 2- Loosen the handles (2). 3- Carefully tilt out the rack (3) from the oven. 4- Position 3 preforms (P) on the spindle chain opposite at each end and in the middle of the inner cooling shield (4).

Publication date : 13/11/2009

P 1-006183-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

2

Setting the interior and exterior cooling shields

Part C BRM-010

2/4

5- Loosen the counter nuts (5) but do not remove them. 6- Set the distance of the cooling shield (4) from the preform bodies (P) using the screws (6) in order to obtain a value of approx. 1,5 mm.

F Check the gap for each of the preforms (P) using a ruler and a mirror (1).

5 6 4 1-006184-01-xx.svg

Setting the outer cooling shield Depending on the setting to be done, it may be necessary to temporarily remove the preforms (P).

4 P

7- Set the height of the external cooling shield (7) relative to the preform neck-rings (P) using the handles (8) and grip nuts (9), as in Illustration (A) or (B), so as to obtain a value of approx. 1,5 mm. 8- Set the gap between the external cooling shield (7) and the preform bodies (P) using the handles (10) and screws (11) so as to obtain a value of approx. 1,5 mm.

1

1-006185-02-xx.svg

F Check the gap for each of the preforms (P) using a ruler and a mirror (1). 9- Carefully tilt out the rack (3) from the oven. 10- Set the height of the rack (3) using the handles (13) and grip nuts (12): - in Case (A), · relative to the external cooling shield (7). - in Case (B), · relative to the preform neck-rings (P).

A

4

3

7

© SIDEL

1-008445-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 3/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

BRM-010

Setting the interior and exterior cooling shields

11- Set the gap between the rack (3) and the external cooling shield (7) as in Illustration (A) or (B), using the handles (2) and screws (14). 12- Carefully tilt out the rack (3) from the oven. 13- Remove the preforms. 14- Carefully tilt out the rack (3) from the oven. 15- Tighten the handles (2). 16- Repeat steps 1 to 15 , to set all of the outer (7) and inner (4) cooling shields.

2 3

B

BEFORE YOU FINISH 17- Close the safety doors.

The procedure is now complete.

7

4

1-008444-01-xx.svg

11

8

7

3

9

10

2

14

13

12

© SIDEL

1-008443-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the interior and exterior cooling shields

BRM-010

4/4

© SIDEL

2

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

BRM-011

Setting the infeed rail

3

GENERAL INFORMATION First carry out the following operations: - check that the upstream block fitted corresponds to the type of preforms in production. If necessary replace the up-circuit infeed block, see procedure "BDM-018, - check that the downstream block fitted corresponds to the type of preforms in production. If necessary, replace the downstream block, see procedure "BDM-019, - set the unscrambler roller assembly , see procedure "BRM-013, - set the stabilization rail assembly , see procedure "BRM-017.

1-007021-23-xx.svg

One turn of the knob (4) in the clockwise direction separates rails (2 ; 3) by 1 mm. Do the settings on the upper and lower sections of the infeed rail simultaneously. MACHINE STATUS

4

1

- feeder cleared of preforms, see procedure "BCU-017, - all machine power and utilities turned off, see procedure "BCU-012. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables None Specific tools - certified standard preforms for the type of production being carried out, - set of thickness gauges .

X

2

3

5 1-006533-01-xx.svg

PROCEDURE

© SIDEL

1- If necessary, open the cover(s)in the infeed rail. Setting the gap between the rails 2- Loosen the counter nuts (1) but do not remove them. 3- Spread the rails (2 ; 3) using the knobs (4). 4- Pass the preforms (5) through the infeed rail gate and position them on the rails (2 ; 3). 5- Turn the knobs (4) to adjust the rails (2 ; 3) until they come into contact with the preforms below the necks. 6- Set the gap X between the rails (2 ; 3) by turning the knobs (4).

X = Ø under the preform necks + 0,8 mm.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

4 1-006534-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

3

Setting the infeed rail

Part C BRM-011

2/2

The gap X must be constant along the entire length of the infeed rail. 7- Tighten up the check nuts (1). Setting the body-guides (6) The rails (2 ; 3) must be set. 8- Pass the preforms (5) through the infeed rail gate and position them on the rails (2 ; 3). 9- Set the gap Y on the set of guides (6) using the adjustment knobs (7) and the counter-nuts (8).

Y = Ø preform + 2 mm.

The gap Y must be constant along the entire length of the infeed rail.

2

3

5

6

7

7

8

8 Y

1-006533-03-xx.svg

10- Set the height L of the guides (6) using the adjustment knobs(7).

L = 3/4 L1. Setting the rim guide (9)

L1

The rails (2 ; 3) must be set.

L

7

11- Pass the preforms (5) through the infeed rail gate and position them on the rails (2 ; 3).

6 1-006533-04-xx.svg

12- Set the height of the gap Z between the rim guide (9) and the preforms using the knurled rings (10).

Z = 2 mm.

The gap Z must be constant along the entire length of the infeed rail. 10

BEFORE YOU FINISH

Z

13- Remove the preforms. 14- If necessary, close the cover(s) on the infeed rail.

F Observe how the preforms move in production. The procedure is now complete.

5 1-006539-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

© SIDEL

9

Part C 1/4

BRM-012

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the positions of the braking system friction pads

3

GENERAL INFORMATION The braking system is forced open pneumatically and then closes when air is expelled. Never loosen the bolts (1). This procedure requires the presence of 2 technicians: - The first technician presses the push-button (4) to open the brake, - The second technician sets the position of the friction pads (2 ; 3).

1-006030-17-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS

2

Machine isolated except for: - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

3

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

1

Parts None Consumables - Clean, dry cloths, - latex gloves. Specific tools - set of thickness gauges , - spring puller .

1-006094-03-xx.svg

PROCEDURE 1- Inhibit machine rotation, see procedure "BSU-003. 2- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 3- Remove the fixing bolts from the cover plate (6). 4- Remove the cover plate (6). 5- Remove the bolts (7). 6- Remove the cover plate (8). 7- Remove the cover plate (9).

4

Wear latex gloves.

© SIDEL

F Check the condition of the brake pads (2 ; 3) visually. · Replace the pads if they have become soiled by grease or oil, see procedure "BDM-033. F Check the thickness of the brake pads (2 ; 3). · If the thickness of the brake pads (2 ; 3) is less than 7 mm replace them, see procedure "BDM-033.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-006603-05-xx.svg

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

3

Setting the positions of the braking system friction pads

BRM-012

2/4

8- Remove the spring (10) using the spring puller. Extreme caution and perfect coordination between the 2 technicians is required for the following operations. 6

9- The first technician presses the button (4) and keeps it pressed in.

The braking system is now open.

Do not touch the mobile parts of the braking system. 10- The second technician loosens the nuts (11). 11- Set the adjustment screw (12) to obtain a gap of 0,5 +0,1/0 mm between the friction pad (2) and the disc (13). 1-007075-02-xx.svg

12- Tighten the nuts (11). 13- Loosen the nut (14). 14- Loosen the screw (15). 15- Tighten of loosen the screw (16) to obtain a gap of 0,5 +0,1/0 mm between the friction pad (3) and the disc (13). 16- Tighten up the screw (15).

7 8 9

17- Tighten the nut (14). 18- Tighten or loosen the screws (17) to line up the friction pads (2 ; 3) with regard to the disc (13). When the second technician gives the order, the first technician releases the push-button (4). 13

19- Loosen the screw (18) but do not remove it. 20- Position the cam (19) so that it is in contact with the sensor (20).

1-006202-02-xx.svg

The sensor (20) should detect the cam (19) when the brake is closed. 21- Tighten the bolt (18). 22- Position the spring (10) using the spring puller.

F Make sure that the brake disc is clean (13). · Clean the disc (13) if necessary, procedure "BNM-009. 23- Fit the covers (8 ; 9) with the screws (7). 24- Position the cover plate (6). 25- Tighen up the fixing bolts on the cover plate (6).

14

16

10

12

15

see

2 3 11

© SIDEL

1-006374-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 3/4

BRM-012

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the positions of the braking system friction pads

26- Release machine rotation, see procedure "BSU-003.

18

BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Check the gap between the friction pads (2 ; 3) and the brake disc (13), see procedure "BNM-009. 27- Press the button (4) several times to make sure that the brake is working properly. 28- Close the safety doors. The procedure is now complete.

3 10

17

2

19 20

13 3

17

© SIDEL

1-006093-03-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the positions of the braking system friction pads

BRM-012

4/4

© SIDEL

3

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/4

BRM-013

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the unscrambler roller assembly

3

GENERAL INFORMATION Check that the upstream block fitted corresponds to the type of preforms to be produced. If necessary replace the up-circuit infeed block, see procedure "BDM-018.

1-007021-27-xx.svg

Before making any custom settings, make sure that the initial settings are correct: - α = 12° between the unscrambler rollers (1) and the horizontal. α The unscrambler rollers (1) setting modifies the following: - the belt tensions on models not equipped with automatic tensioners, - the settings of the body-guide wires (2), - the settings of the deflectors (3).

1-010447-01-xx.svg

The intermediate bearings are fitted free and adjust automatically when the gap between the unscrambler rollers is being set. The figures used for this procedure are theoretical values. These settings will need to be adjusted according to the characteristics and the performance of the preforms in production.

3

Work to be carried out at height: use the equipment fitted on the machine and always follow current safety regulations.

1

1

2

2

© SIDEL

1-006540-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

3

Setting the unscrambler roller assembly

BRM-013

2/4

A

MACHINE STATUS - all machine power and utilities turned off, see procedure "BCU-012, - feeder cleared of preforms, see procedure "BCU-017. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables None Specific tools - certified standard preforms for the type of production being carried out.

1-008966-04-xx.svg

PROCEDURE 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. Depending on the feeder model, the unsrambler roller assembly is fitted with either an automatic or a manual (A ; B) tensioner. The automatic tensioners do not require any particular adjustments. 2- If there is a tensioner (A) or (B), loosen the transmission belt.

B

Setting the unscrambler rollers (1) 3- If necessary, spread the covers (4) downstream from the rollers (1) as far apart as possible. 4- Position 10 preforms in the unscrambler rollers (1).

1-008939-05-xx.svg

5 4

The rollers (1) must be slightly further apart at the top. 5- Set the gap X between the rollers (1) using the knobs (6).

1-010445-01-xx.svg

© SIDEL

In the zone downstream (1) from the unscrambler rollers, X = Ø preform neck ring - 2 mm. In the zone upstream from the rollers (1), X = Ø preform neck ring - 1 mm.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 3/4

BRM-013

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the unscrambler roller assembly

F Check for the correct positioning of the preforms, with no obstruction, between the rollers (1). - If the preforms are not positioned correctly between the unscrambler rollers (1). · Repeat the stages above, from step 5 , to adjust the settings of the rollers (1) depending on the characteristics of the preforms. 6- If necessary, position the covers (4) as close as possible to the rollers (1) without coming into contact. 7- Tighten the knobs (5).

3 14 6

6 7

1-010446-01-xx.svg

Setting the body-guide wires (2) The body-guide wires help to stabilize the preforms in the unscrambler rollers.

1 2

The body-guide wires can be spread to the maximum in the presence of short-bodied preforms. 8- Position 10 preforms in the unscrambler rollers (1). 9- Remove the gate (7) to access the body-guide wires (2). In the zone upstream from the rollers (1) : 10- Unscrew the nuts (8) (but do not remove) to loosen the wires (2). In the zone downstream (1) from the unscrambler rollers : ( see illustration (C) or (D) depending on the model ) 11- Remove the bolts (9).

12

11

13

8 1-006376-02-xx.svg

12- Set the vertical position of the supports (10).

The body-guide wires are positioned at 3/4 of the length of the preform bodies (below the neck). 13- Fit the bolts (9). 14- Set the horizontal position of the supports (10). The body-guide wires are run 1 mm along each side of the preform bodies. 15- Tighten the bolts (9). In the zone upstream from the rollers (1) : 16- Loosen the nuts (11) but do not remove them.

© SIDEL

17- Set the horzontal and vertical positions of the supports (12).

C

1

2

1

9

9

10

10 1-010448-01-xx.svg

D

The body-guide wires are positioned at 3/4 of the length of the preform bodies (below the neck). The body-guide wires are run 1 mm along each side of the preform bodies. 18- Tighten the nuts (11). 19- Set the position of the tensioner rings (13) using the nuts (8), to tension the body-guide wires (2). 20- Tighten the nuts (8). 21- Fit the gate (7).

Publication date : 13/11/2009

9

10 1-010449-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

3

Setting the unscrambler roller assembly

Part C BRM-013

4/4

F Check for the correct positioning of the preforms, with no obstruction, between the rollers (1). - If the preforms are not positioned correctly between the unscrambler rollers (1). · Increase slightly the gap between the body-guide wires(2). Setting the deflectors (3) Upstream, the deflectors do not require any specific adjustment. Downstream, the deflectors are generally parallel to the unscrambler rollers or slightly tighter to help in correctly positioning the preforms. The spread of the deflectors must be greater than the total length of the preform to prevent them from blocking. 22- Set the spread of the deflectors (3) using the button(s) (14). BEFORE YOU FINISH 23- Remove the preforms. 24- If there is a tensioner (A) or (B), set the tension of the unscrambler roller transmission belt, see procedure "BRM-008. 25- Set the gap for the stabilization rail assembly, see procedure "BRM-017. 26- Close the safety doors. Preform movement and transfer should be fluid and unobstructed.

© SIDEL

F Observe how the preforms move in production. The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/4

BRM-015

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the tensions on the conveyor belts

2

GENERAL INFORMATION The conveyor belts that need to be set are located as follows: - at the preform elevator (1), - under the unscrambler roller assembly (2), - under the hopper (3).

1-006030-44-xx.svg

The form of the drums and the tension settings ensure that the conveyor belt is guided correctly. The motor drums are located in zones (A) and the return drums in zones (B). The adjustment screws (6 ; 7) of the drums are accessible with the cover panels.

2

A

3

B

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - preform feeder switched off.

see see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables None Specific tools - raised platform for workng at heights. PROCEDURE The setting procedure is identical for all of the preform feeder conveyor belts.

© SIDEL

Setting the tensions on the conveyor belts

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1

B 1-006699-01-xx.svg

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

2

Setting the tensions on the conveyor belts

The setting for the conveyor belt should eliminate: - motor drum slipping, - flapping at a slack belt section . 1- Remove the cover panels to check the tension of the slack sections of the belts during the setting procedure.

BRM-015

2/4

B

6

1-006546-01-xx.svg

2- Tighten or loosen the adjustment screws (6) on the return drums (B) to set the tension of the conveyor belts. 3- Fit the cover panels. Centering the conveyor belts If necessary, use the access platform to reach the adjustment screws (7) for the motor drums (A). 4- Turn on the preform feeder, see procedure "BCU-003.

A

7 1-006509-02-xx.svg

To center the conveyor belts, accessing work zones (A) or (B) will allow you to visually observe their movements. 5- Press the (8) key.

The (C) window appears.

8

© SIDEL

1-010353-19-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 3/4

BRM-015

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the tensions on the conveyor belts

6- Press the key for zone (D) corresponding to the conveyor belt to be adjusted.

The numerical keypad appears. 7- Enter the minimum setpoint value, see procedure "BCU-025. 8- Press the key for zone (E) corresponding to the conveyor belt to be adjusted. The conveyor belt needing to be adjused has been selected. Selected elements will only start if the "Preform elevator start/stop" key (9) on the lower display bar PCC is activated.

2

C

D

E

1-010351-08-02.svg

9- Press the (9) key.

9

The conveyor belt to be set must be running. The buttons (10 ; 11) located on the unscrambler roller unit frame have the same function ast the "Preform elevator start/stop" key on the lower display bar of the PCC. The keys (10 ; 11) allow the user to start and stop the various components of the unscrambler rollers selected in the "Feeder test" window in order to observe their performance in contact with the preforms.

F Check the performance of the various components. 10- Tighten or loosen the bolts (6 ; 7) to center the conveyor belt on the drums. 11- Press the key for the zone (E) corresponding to the belt being adjusted. The adjusted belt stops. 12- Repeat the steps above from step 6 until all of the conveyor belts have been centered.

1-006704-03-xx.svg

11

10

BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Observe the movement of the belts in production. The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-006375-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the tensions on the conveyor belts

BRM-015

4/4

© SIDEL

2

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

BRM-016

Setting the height of the unscrambler unit

3

GENERAL INFORMATION First adjust the stabilization rail assembly, see procedure "BRM-017. Set the height of the unscrambler unit when setting up the machine for a new production item. MACHINE STATUS - all machine power procedure "BCU-012.

and

utilities

turned

off,

see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

1-007021-05-xx.svg

Parts None Consumables None Specific tools - certified standard preforms for the type of production being carried out. PROCEDURE 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Loosen the nuts (2) but do not remove them.

2

In production, the preforms must not be obstructed between the vanes on the unscrambler (1) and the rim guide (3).

1

3- Position the unscrambler (1) as close as possible to the infeed rim guide (3).

3

Maintain an angle of 60° between the axis of the vanes on the unscrambler and the axis of the preform movement.

Only preforms which are laid flat or in the correct position should pass under the unscrambler vanes . Any other position will cause the preform to be ejected by the uncramb 4- Set the height of the unscrambler (1) using the upper nut (2).

F Check the movement of a preform laid flat under the unscrambler vanes (1). 5- Tighten the nuts (2). BEFORE YOU FINISH 6- Close the safety doors.

© SIDEL

F Check the unscrambler in production. The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-010461-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the height of the unscrambler unit

BRM-016

2/2

© SIDEL

3

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/6

BRM-017

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting up the stabilization rail assembly

3

GENERAL INFORMATION

1-007021-24-xx.svg

First carry out the settings on the unscrambler roller assembly, see procedure "BRM-013. α

1

1-010447-02-xx.svg

Before making any custom settings, make sure that the initial settings are correct: - α = 15° between the stabilization rail (1) and the horizontal, - X = 1 mm between the preform contact point on the unscrambler rollers (2) and the top of the under-neck guides (3), - Y = 0,5 mm between the unscrambler rollers (2) and the under-neck guide (3), - the axis of the stabilisation rail lined up with the axis of the unscrambler rollers.

2

The angle α may be different for specific preforms.

X

3

© SIDEL

1-010450-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

3

Setting up the stabilization rail assembly

The settings of the under-neck guides (3) modifies the following: - the setting of the neck guides (4), - the settings of the neck guides(5), - the settings of the rim guides (6 ; 7).

Part C BRM-017

2/6

2

Y

The figures used for this procedure are theoretical values. These settings will need to be adjusted according to the characteristics and the performance of the preforms in production. Work to be carried out at height: use the equipment fitted on the machine and always follow current safety regulations.

3

A 1-010451-01-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS - all machine power and utilities turned off, see procedure "BCU-012, - feeder cleared of preforms, see procedure "BCU-017, - up-circuit infeed block fitted, see procedure "BDM-018. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables None Specific tools - certified standard preforms for the type of production being carried out. PROCEDURE 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Remove the covers (8) upstream from the stabilization rail (1) (if present). Setting the under-neck guides (3)

9 8

© SIDEL

1-010445-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 3/6

BRM-017

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting up the stabilization rail assembly

3

3- Unscrew the knobs (10) but do not remove the them.

10

1-010455-01-xx.svg

4- Unscrew the knobs (11) down from each side of the under-neck guides (3) but do not remove them.

3 11

1-010453-01-xx.svg

5- Unscrew the fasteners (12) upstream from each side of the stabilization rail (1) but do not remove them. 6- Place a few preforms in between the under-neck guides (3).

12 5

The stabilization rail (1) is equipped with a type-(D) or type-(E) adjustment system. 16

5 12

© SIDEL

1-010452-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

3

Setting up the stabilization rail assembly

7- Unscrew the fastener(s) (13 ; 14) but do not remove them.

Part C BRM-017

4/6

2

D

3

15 4

13 14

1-010454-01-xx.svg

8- Set the gap (A) between the under-neck guides (3) using the bolts (14).

A = Ø under the preform necks + 0,5 mm.

E

The setting should be identical for each of the underneck guides, such that the axis of the stabilization rail (1) remains lined up with the axis of the unscrambler rollers (2). 9- Tighten the fasteners (13 ; 14). 10- Tighten the fasteners (12). 11- Tighten the knobs (10 ; 11). Setting the body-guides (4)

3

14

In production, if there is an excessive accumulation of preforms, the body guides (4) can be spread to the maximum.

1-010456-01-xx.svg

12- Position 1 preform bewteen the under-neck guides(3). 13- Set the gap (B) on the body-guides (4) using the knobs (15).

B = Ø under the preform necks + 2 mm.

The gap between the body-guides (4) must be set using both of the knobs (15) located along each side of the guides (4).

3 15 4

© SIDEL

1-010459-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 5/6

BRM-017

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting up the stabilization rail assembly

3

The setting must be identical for each of the knobs (15) such that the axis of the body-guides (4) remains lined up with the axis of the stabilization rail (1).

C 5

The gap (B) must be constant along the length of the body-guides (4).

16

Setting the neck-guides (5) 14- Position 1 preform bewteen the under-neck guides(3).

3 4

B 1-010565-01-xx.svg

15- Unscrew the screws (16) along each body-guide (3) but do not remove them. 16- Set the gap (C) on the body-guides (5) with regard to the preform neck ring.

C = Ø preform neck ring + 2 mm. 17- Tighten the bolts (16). Setting the rim guides (6 ; 7) 18- Loosen the screws (17) but do not remove them. 19- Set the support (18) so that the axis of the rim guides (6 ; 7) remains lined up with the axis of the unscrambler rollers (2). 20- Tighten the bolts (17). 21- Unscrew the fasteners (19 ; 20) along the infeed rim guide (6). 22- Unscrew the fasteners (21 ; 22) along the outfeed rim guide (7).

21 ; 22

7

The longitudinal position of the outfeed rim guide (7) is determined by the elements located downstream.

© SIDEL

23- Set the longitudinal position of the infeed rim guide (6) so that it is in contact with the outfeed rim guide (7). 24- Lay a preform down on the infeed rim guide (6). 25- Set the minimum height of the guide with regard to the preform using the knobs (19).

The laid-down preform must pass freely under the rim guide (6). 26- Tighten the nuts (20). 27- Position a preform under the outfeed rim guide (7). 28- Set the minimum height of the guide with regard to the rim on the preform using the knobs (21). The preform must pass freely under the rim guide (7). 29- Tighten the nuts (22). 30- Lay a preform down on the infeed rim guide (6). 31- Push the laid-down preform along manually up to the outfeed rim guide (7).

Publication date : 13/11/2009

17

3

24

19 ; 20

17

18

16

5

6

15

1-010561-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

3

Setting up the stabilization rail assembly

Part C BRM-017

6/6

F Check that the laid-down preform is stopped by the outfeed rim guide (7). - If the preform passes freely under the outfeed rim guide (7). · Repeat as above from step 27 . Setting the stop-pin (23) 32- Remove the cover plate (24). 33- Bring the stop-pin out manually (23). 34- Position a preform near the stop-pin (23). The stop-pin (23) must not extend past the preform movement axis. 35- Set the position of the stop-pin (23) using the screws (25). 36- Fit the casing (24).

25

BEFORE YOU FINISH 37- Set the unscrambler, see procedure "BRM-016. 38- Refit the covers (8) using the knobs (9) (if present). 39- Close the safety doors. 40- Set the gap on the infeed rail , see procedure "BRM-011.

23

1-010464-01-xx.svg

Preform movement and transfer should be fluid and unobstructed.

© SIDEL

F Observe how the preforms move in production. The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

BRM-018

Synchronizing the bottle outfeed/bottle transfer

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Eye protection is obligatory.

P

(P) is the meeting point of the bottles between the transfer grips (1) and the bottle outfeed wheel (2). Check the general synchronization before attempting any individual synchronization, see procedure "BNM-012. Check the belt tensions, see procedure "BRM-008.

1-006580-08-xx.svg

Check the torque limiters are in working position. This procedure requires the presence of 2 technicians: - The first technician rotates the machine using the manual rotation system, - the second technician checks the positions of the meeting points.

4

1

5

2

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

8

PROCEDURE 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Untighten, without removing, the 3 fastenings (3) of the synchronization device. 3- Fit 3 bottles (4) in 3 transfer grips (1). Extreme caution and perfect coordination between the 2 technicians is required for the following operations. 4- Bring the roller (6) using the manual rotation system, see procedure "BCU-014.

1-006581-01-xx.svg

3

The roller (6) on the first transfer grip is lined up with the marker "SORTIE" (7) on the bottle transfer wheel (5). 5- Set the meeting point (P) between the bottle (4) with the notches (8) on the bottle outfeed wheel (2) manually.

© SIDEL

1-006579-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

2

Synchronizing the bottle outfeed/bottle transfer

6- Tighten the fixing bolts (3) on the synchronization device. 7- Check the synchronization on the 3 following bottles (4) by turning the bottle transfer wheel (5) using the manual rotation system, see procedure "BCU-014. 8- Remove the 3 bottles (4).

6

BRM-018

2/2

7

BEFORE YOU FINISH 9- Close the safety doors. 10- Check the synchronization of the machine before starting production, see procedure "BNM-012.

The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-006582-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/4

BRM-021

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the compensation system using single bars (HR)

3

GENERAL INFORMATION Visually identifying the type of holding bar : - Standard holding bar (A), follow procedure "BRM-021". - Thrust holding bar (B), follow procedure "BRM-023". Make sure that the mold support unit is secured in the open position before attempting any work on it, see procedure "BSU-001. There is a risk of splashing of fluids at high temperature and pressure. Wear protective clothing on the body, hands and face during any work on the mold support unit.

1-006030-01-xx.svg

A

B

Protective equipment must be in accordance with the stipulated risks. Hot metal, risk of burns. This procedure must be carried out with the molds at process temperature where this is greater than 60 °C. MACHINE STATUS - molds at production temperature, Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005, - hydraulic circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables None Specific tools - protective gloves (thermal), - set of thickness gauges , - 4 thickness gauges 0,15 mm, - locking system holding brace .

© SIDEL

PROCEDURE

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-007335-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

3

Setting the compensation system using single bars (HR)

Warning - risk of burns.

Part C BRM-021

3 1;2

Wear heat protection gloves. 1- Remove the mold base procedure "BDM-011.

2/4

on the station concerned, see

3

Check the gap Y = 0,15 +0,1/+0 mm at points (10) between the mold shells (6) outside of the vent areas.

F Check if the gap X = 1,2 +/-0,05 mm and the gap Y = 0,15 +0,1/+0 mm. - If yes, Go to step 19 . - If not, Continue with the procedure. 2- Loosen the counter nuts (1) but do not remove them. 3- Loosen the bolts (2). Tighten the nuts (3) diagonally to position the left half shell support correctly (4). 4- Tighten up the nuts (3) so that the left half shell support (4) is clamped against the left support block (5). 5- Unlock and open the mold support unit manually, see procedure "BSU-001. 6- Insert the locking system holding brace, see procedure "BSU-001. 7- Position the 4 0,15 mm thickness gauges on the half-mold (6) at points (10).

1;2 3

2

1 7

4

8

5

9

F Make sure that the gauges are out of the vent zone.

X

1-007324-01-xx.svg

Grease the gauges to insert them more easily. 8- Remove the locking system holding brace , see procedure "BSU-001. 9- Close the mold support unit manually, see procedure "BSU-001. 10- Loosen the nuts (3).

5

The elastic rings (7) come free. 11- Manually screw in the bolts (2) into the left shell (4) support. 12- Tighten up the check nuts (1). 13- Tighten the nuts (3) to obtain a gap of X = 1,2 +/-0,05 mm between the inner and outer boxes (8 ; 9). 14- Unlock and open the mold support unit manually, see procedure "BSU-001.

4

6

© SIDEL

1-006314-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 3/4

BRM-021

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the compensation system using single bars (HR)

15- Insert the locking system holding brace, see procedure "BSU-001. 16- Remove the 4 0,15 mm thickness gauges. 17- Remove the locking system holding brace , see procedure "BSU-001.

unit

manually,

10

6

Locking should take place without obstruction. 18- Close the mold support procedure "BSU-001.

10

3

see

F Check the gap Y = 0,15 +0,1/+0 mm at points (10) between the mold shells (6) outside of the vent areas.

10 10

BEFORE YOU FINISH 19- Remount the mold base on the blowing station concerned, see procedure "BDM-011.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-007327-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the compensation system using single bars (HR)

BRM-021

4/4

© SIDEL

3

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

BRM-022

Setting the bottle base outfeed guide

1

MACHINE STATUS - all machine power procedure "BCU-012.

and

utilities

turned

off,

see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables None Specific tools - 1 certified acceptable bottle (1).

1-006580-01-xx.svg

PROCEDURE 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Position 1 certified acceptable bottle (1) on the neck guides (2). 3- Remove the trunnion nut (3). 4- Position the bottle outfeed base guide (4) to obtain the clearance "X" = 5 mm between the bottle outfeed base guide (4) and the base of the certified bottle (1).

2

1

Tighten up the nut (3) onto the flat-section on the shaft (5). 5- Remove the certified bottle (1) from the neck guides (2). BEFORE YOU FINISH

4

X

6- Close the safety doors.

The procedure is now complete. 5

3

© SIDEL

1-006589-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the bottle base outfeed guide

BRM-022

2/2

© SIDEL

1

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/4

BRM-023

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the compensation system using thrust bars (HR)

3

GENERAL INFORMATION Visually identifying the type of holding bar : - Standard holding bar (A), follow procedure "BRM-021". - Thrust holding bar (B), follow procedure "BRM-023". Make sure that the mold support unit is secured in the open position before attempting any work on it, see procedure "BSU-001.

© SIDEL

1-006030-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

3

Setting the compensation system using thrust bars (HR)

Wear protective clothing on the body, hands and face during any work on the mold support unit.

A

BRM-023

2/4

B

Protective equipment must be in accordance with the stipulated risks. Hot metal, risk of burns. There is a risk of splashing of fluids at high temperature and pressure. This procedure must be carried out with the molds at process temperature where this is greater than 60 °C. MACHINE STATUS

1-007335-01-xx.svg

3

- molds at production temperature, Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005, - hydraulic circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

1;2

3 1;2 3

2

1

Parts None Consumables None Specific tools - protective gloves (thermal), - set of thickness gauges , - 4 thickness gauges 0,05 mm, - locking system holding brace .

7 4

8

5

9 X

PROCEDURE 1-007324-01-xx.svg

Warning - risk of burns. Wear heat protection gloves. 1- Remove the mold base procedure "BDM-011.

on the station concerned, see

F Check if the gap X = 1,2 +/-0,05 mm and the gap Y = 0,05 +/-0,02 mm. - If yes. Publication date : 13/11/2009

© SIDEL

Make sure that the gap is Y = 0,05 +/-0,02 mm at points (10) between the 4 holding bars (6).

Part C 3/4

-

BRM-023

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the compensation system using thrust bars (HR)

3

Go to step 19 .

If not.

Continue with the procedure. 2- Loosen the counter nuts (1) but do not remove them. 3- Loosen the bolts (2). Tighten the nuts (3) diagonally to position the left half shell support correctly (4). 4- Tighten up the nuts (3) so that the left half shell support (4) is clamped against the left support block (5). 5- Unlock and open the mold support unit manually, see procedure "BSU-001. 6- Insert the locking system holding brace, see procedure "BSU-001. 7- Position the 4 0,05 mm thickness gauges on the holding bars (6) at points (10).

5

4

X

X

Y

Grease the gauges to insert them more easily. 8- Remove the locking system holding brace , see procedure "BSU-001. 9- Close the mold support unit manually, see procedure "BSU-001. 10- Loosen the nuts (3).

The elastic rings (7) come free. 11- Manually screw in the bolts (2) into the left shell (4) support. 12- Tighten up the check nuts (1). 13- Tighten the nuts (3) to obtain a gap of X = 1,2 +/-0,05 mm between the inner and outer boxes (8 ; 9). 14- Unlock and open the mold support unit manually, see procedure "BSU-001. 15- Insert the locking system holding brace, see procedure "BSU-001. 16- Remove the 4 0,05 mm thickness gauges. 17- Remove the locking system holding brace , see procedure "BSU-001.

6 1-006753-01-xx.svg

10 6

10 6 10

10

Locking should take place without obstruction. 18- Close the mold support procedure "BSU-001.

unit

manually,

see

F Make sure that the gap is Y = 0,05 +/-0,02 mm at points (10) between the 4 holding bars (6). BEFORE YOU FINISH 19- Remount the mold base on the blowing station concerned, see procedure "BDM-011.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-007268-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the compensation system using thrust bars (HR)

BRM-023

4/4

© SIDEL

3

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BRM-044

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the stretching cylinder rollers

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Work to be carried out at height: use the equipment fitted on the machine and always follow current safety regulations. This procedure must be carried out with the molds at process temperature where this is greater than 60 °C. MACHINE STATUS - molds at production temperature, - the machine is stopped, Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - JOG not in service, see procedure "BCU-013, - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005, - hydraulic circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

1-006030-18-xx.svg

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables None Specific tools - set of thickness gauges. PROCEDURE 1- Advance the stretching cylinder (1) in question on the horizontal part of the stretching cam (2), using manual rotation, see procedure "BCU-014. 2- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 3- Loosen the nut (1). "J" represents the gap between the cam follower (2) and the stretching cam (3).

5

4 1

© SIDEL

1-008059-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

2

Setting the stretching cylinder rollers

4- Tighten or loosen the stretching cylinder (5) rod (4) to set the gap J = 0,2 ±0,1 mm, using a thickness gauge to measure it. 5- Hold the rod (4) using the pipe wrench and tighten the nut (1).

BRM-044

2/2

5

BEFORE YOU FINISH 2

J

F Check the setting of the upper stretching cylinder stop shock absorber (6), see procedure "BDM-069. 6- Close the safety doors. The procedure is now complete.

3 1-008057-03-xx.svg

6

© SIDEL

1-008058-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

Mechanical operation procedure Greasing procedure

TABLE OF CONTENTS Greasing the transfer arm guides

.............................................................................................................

Greasing the spindle rollers and the turnover ramps

...............................................................................

BGM-001 BGM-005

Greasing the toothing on the oven wheel drive ring

.................................................................................

BGM-006

Greasing the toothing on the blow wheel drive ring

.................................................................................

BGM-007

................................................................................................................

BGM-008

Greasing the stretching guides

Greasing the mold base support assembly guides Changing the oil in the reducer motor Greasing the molds (cavities)

..................................................................................

BGM-009

......................................................................................................

BGM-010

...................................................................................................................

Greasing the cylindrical GUPM mold support units Greasing the coder wheel gear

..................................................................................

................................................................................................................

BGM-011 BGM-013 BGM-014

Greasing the blow wheel drive ring movements

......................................................................................

BGM-015

Greasing the oven wheel drive ring movements

......................................................................................

BGM-017

..................................................................................................

BGM-018

Greasing the oven wheel shaft bearings

Greasing the mold support unit locking system Greasing the preform ejection cams Greasing the nozzle raise safety cam Transfer cam lubrication

.......................................................................................

BGM-020

......................................................................................................

BGM-021

...........................................................................................................................

Lubrication of the unlocking and locking cams of the mold-support units Greasing the blowing function cams

................................................

........................................................................................................

Piloted automatic greaser: replacing a cartridge

BGM-030 BGM-031 BGM-032

......................................................................................

BGM-033

........................................................................................................

BGM-035

© SIDEL

Greasing the reducer motor bearing

BGM-019

........................................................................................................

Publication date : 13/11/2009

C - 1/2

Part C

© SIDEL

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

C - 2/2

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BGM-001

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

Greasing the transfer arm guides

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Eye protection is obligatory. Never exceed the recommended amount of grease as this may cause permanent damage to the parts being greased. 1cm3 of "LUB A13" grease corresponds to 1 shots from the greae gun. The new rails are factory pre-greased and do not need to be greased when they are assembled for the first time.

1-006030-02-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

1 2

Parts None Consumables - "LUB A13" grease, - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools None

1-010330-01-xx.svg

PROCEDURE Do not activate the low pressure air system in the JOG implementation window. 1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, procedure "BCU-013. 2- If need be, open the vision system, procedure "BCU-036.

see see

F Check the condition of the guides (1). F Check the gap at the rail (2) with regard to the guide (1). 3- Inject 1,6 cm3 of "LUB A13" grease into the greasing nipple (3) using the grease gun. 4- Remove any excess grease using a clean, dry cloth. © SIDEL

3

Apply the same procedure to the accessible preform and bottle transfer arms.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

2 5- Rotate the machine procedure "BCU-013.

Greasing the transfer arm guides using

the

JOG,

Part C BGM-001

2/2

see

The following transfer arms are opposite the working position. 6- Repeat the previous steps, from step 3 , until all the guidances (1) of the transfer arms have been greased. 7- Close the vision system, see procedure "BCU-036. BEFORE YOU FINISH 8- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BGM-005

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

Greasing the spindle rollers and the turnover ramps A

GENERAL INFORMATION

2 B

The spindle rollers are greased in 2 stages: - first the outer rollers (1) on the oven wheel (A), - then the inner rollers (2) on the tensioner wheel (B).

1-006030-34-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS

A

Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005, - oven cold.

1

1-006381-01-xx.svg

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - "LUB A15" grease, - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - Clean, dry brush.

© SIDEL

PROCEDURE

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

2

Greasing the spindle rollers and the turnover ramps

Greasing the outer spindle rollers 1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013. 2- Wipe the grease off the outer rollers (1) using a clean, dry cloth. 3- Apply the "LUB A15" grease to the outer rollers (1) using a paintbrush.

Part C BGM-005

2/2

B

Area to be greased

4- Rotate the machine procedure "BCU-013.

using

the

JOG,

see

The following rollers are at your working position. 5- Repeat as above from step 3 until you have greased all of the outer rollers (1). 6- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013. Greasing the inner spindle rollers 7- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013. 8- Wipe the spent grease off the inner rollers (2) using a clean, dry cloth. 9- Apply the "LUB A15" grease to the inner rollers (2) using a paintbrush. 10- Rotate the machine using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013. The following rollers are at your working position. 11- Repeat as above from step 8 until you have greased all of the inner rollers (2). 12- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013. Greaseing the turnover ramps 13- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 14- Wipe the spent grease off the turnover ramps (3) using a clean, dry cloth. 15- Apply the "LUB A15" grease to the turnover ramps (3) using a paintbrush. 16- Close the safety doors.

2 1-006382-01-xx.svg

3

BEFORE YOU FINISH 17- Turn the machine a few times using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013. Never wipe the grease off the movement surfaces of the spindle rollers (1 ; 2).

1-006383-01-xx.svg

18- Wipe off any grease splashes using a clean, dry cloth. 19- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BGM-006

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

Greasing the toothing on the oven wheel drive ring

2

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005. 1-006030-93-xx.svg

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - "LUB 40" grease, - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - Clean, dry brush. PROCEDURE Do not activate the low pressure air system in the JOG implementation window. 1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, procedure "BCU-013. 2- Inhibit machine rotation, see procedure "BSU-003.

see

Depending on the type of machine and accessibility, remove the elements (1 ; 2) or (2 ; 3 ; 4).

1

© SIDEL

1-008402-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

2

Greasing the toothing on the oven wheel drive ring

BGM-006

3- Clean the various components removed, using a clean, dry cloth. 4- Wipe the spent grease off the toothing on the oven wheel drive ring (5) using a clean dry cloth.

2/2

2

3

1-008401-03-xx.svg

5- Grease the accessible section of the drive ring (5) using a paintbrush and the "LUB 40" grease. Area to be greased

6- Release machine rotation, see procedure "BSU-003. 7- Rotate the machine using the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

The next section of the drive ring (5) is accessible.

3

4 1-008423-04-xx.svg

8- Repeat as above from step 2 until you have greased all of the drive ring toothing (5). 9- Turn the machine a few times using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013. Do not remove the grease from the drive ring toothing (5). 10- Wipe off any grease splashes using a clean, dry cloth. 11- Install the different elements that have been removed.

5

BEFORE YOU FINISH 12- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-006384-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog /

1/2

BGM-007

Greasing the toothing on the blow wheel drive ring

2

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005. 1-006030-01-xx.svg

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - "LUB 40" grease, - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - Clean, dry brush. PROCEDURE 1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013. 2- Wipe the spent grease off the toothing on the oven wheel drive ring (1) using a clean dry cloth. 3- Grease the accessible section of the drive ring (1) using a paintbrush and the "LUB 40" grease. Area to be greased

The toothing on the drive gear (2) is inaccessible and will be greased by contact with the drive ring (1). 4- Rotate the machine procedure "BCU-013.

using

the

JOG,

see

1

The next section of the drive ring (1) is accessible. 5- Repeat as above from step 3 until you have greased all of the drive ring toothing (1).

2

BEFORE YOU FINISH 6- Turn the machine a few times using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013. Do not remove the grease from the drive ring toothing (1). 7- Wipe off any grease splashes using a clean, dry cloth. 8- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-006385-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog /

Greasing the toothing on the blow wheel drive ring

BGM-007

2/2

© SIDEL

2

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

BGM-008

Greasing the stretching guides

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Never exceed the recommended amount of grease as this may cause permanent damage to the parts being greased. 1 cm3 of "LUB A13" grease corresponds to 1 shot from the "ALGI" grease gun. The new rails are factory pre-greased and do not need to be greased when they are assembled for the first time. MACHINE STATUS

1-006030-01-xx.svg

3

Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - "LUB A13" grease, - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - "ALGI" grease gun.

1

2

PROCEDURE Do not activate the low pressure air system in the JOG implementation window.

© SIDEL

1- Connect the JOG to the work procedure "BCU-013. 2- Check the condition of the guides (1).

zone,

see

F Check the gap between the slide (2) and the rail (4). 3- Wipe off the grease nipples (3) using a clean dry cloth. 4- Inject 2 cm3 of "LUB A13" grease into each nipple (3) using the grease gun "ALGI". 5- Wipe off the grease nipples (3) using a clean dry cloth. 6- Clean off excess grease. 7- Bring the next blow station around to your working position using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013. 8- Repeat as above from step 2 until you have greased all of the stretching guides (1).

4

3

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-006386-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

2

Greasing the stretching guides

Part C BGM-008

2/2

BEFORE YOU FINISH 9- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BGM-009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

Greasing the mold base support assembly guides

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Never exceed the recommended amount of grease as this may cause permanent damage to the parts being greased. 1 cm3 of "LUB A13" grease corresponds to 1 shot from the "ALGI" grease gun. The new rails are factory pre-greased and do not need to be greased when they are assembled for the first time. MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - "LUB A13" grease, - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - "ALGI" grease gun.

© SIDEL

PROCEDURE

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-006030-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

2

Greasing the mold base support assembly guides

1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013. 2- Check the condition of the guides (1). 3- Check the gap at the guide (1) with regard to the rail (2). 4- Clean the greasing nipple (3) using a clean, dry cloth. 5- Inject 1 cm3 of "LUB A13" grease into the nipple (3) using the "ALGI" grease gun. 6- Clean the greasing nipple (3) using a clean, dry cloth. 7- Clean off excess grease. 8- Bring the next blow station around to your working position using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013. 9- Repeat as above from step 2 until all of the guides (1) on the mold base support assemblies have been greased.

Part C BGM-009

2/2

2 1

3

BEFORE YOU FINISH 10- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-006387-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

BGM-010

Changing the oil in the reducer motor

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Always follow current legislation when disposing of the used oil. MACHINE STATUS - all machine power and utilities turned procedure "BCU-012, - reducer motor cold or preferably warm.

off,

see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

1-006030-17-xx.svg

Parts None Consumables - "LUB 37" oil, - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - oil pump, - a container for the used oil. PROCEDURE 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Position the container for the used oil under the drain plug (1). 3- Remove the filler cap (2). 4- Remove the drain plug (1).

F 56789-

The oil drains from the reducer motor. Wait until all of the oil has drained off. Fit the drain plug (1). Inject 4,2 L of "LUB 37" oil into the reducer motor using the oil pump. Fit the filler cap (2). Remove the oil container. Clean the reducer motor using a clean, dry cloth.

1

1-006906-02-xx.svg

BEFORE YOU FINISH 10- Close the safety doors.

2

The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-006997-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

Changing the oil in the reducer motor

BGM-010

2/2

© SIDEL

2

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

BGM-011

Greasing the molds (cavities)

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Make sure that the mold support unit is secured in the open position before attempting any work on it see procedure "BSU -001. MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

1-006030-01-xx.svg

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - cleaning agent "NET A03", - "LUB A15" grease, - clean, dry, non-abrasive cloth. Specific tools - locking system holding brace , - Clean, dry brush. PROCEDURE 1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013. 2- Unlock and open the mold support unit manually, see procedure "BSU -001. 3- Insert the locking system holding brace, see procedure "BSU -001. 4- Wipe the spent grease off the guide studs (1) and the guide slots (2), the wear washers (3) and the wear ring (4) using a clean, non-abrasive dry cloth.

1

5

If necessary, moisten the cloth with "NET A03". 5- Use a clean, dry, non-abrasive cloth to wipe the guide studs (1) and slots (2), the wear washers (3) and the wear ring (4).

© SIDEL

1-006389-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

2

Greasing the molds (cavities)

6- Clean the cavities (5) in the half-molds using a clean, dry, non-abrasive cloth. 7- Grease the guide studs (1) and slots (2), the wear washers (3) and the wear ring (4) with the "LUB A15" grease and a paintbrush.

Part C BGM-011

2/2

2

5

Area to be greased

8- Remove the locking system holding brace procedure "BSU -001.

, see

9- Close the mold support unit manually. 10- Bring the next blow station around to your working position using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU -013. 11- Repeat as above from step 2 until you have greased all of the molds on the machine, BEFORE YOU FINISH

3 1-006388-01-xx.svg

3

3

5

4

12- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-006390-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

BGM-013

Greasing the cylindrical GUPM mold support units

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Make sure that the mold support unit is secured in the open position before attempting any work on it see procedure "BSU -001. 1 cm3 of "LUB 29" grease corresponds to 1 shot from the "ALGI" grease gun.

1-006030-01-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

3

1

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - "LUB 29" grease, - clean, dry, non-abrasive cloth. Specific tools - locking system holding brace , - "ALGI" grease gun.

2

4

PROCEDURE 1- Connect the JOG procedure "BCU-013.

1-006392-01-xx.svg

to

the

work

zone,

see

2- Wipe off the grease nipples (1 ; 2) using a clean dry cloth. 3- Inject 11 cm3 of "LUB 29" grease into each nipple (1 ; 2) using the grease gun "ALGI". 4- Wipe off the grease nipples (1 ; 2) using a clean dry cloth. 5- Wipe off the grease nipples (3 ; 4) using a clean dry cloth. 6- Inject 3 cm 3 of "LUB 29" grease into each nipple (3 ; 4) using the grease gun "ALGI".

1

2

© SIDEL

1-006393-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

2

Greasing the cylindrical GUPM mold support units

7- Wipe off the grease nipples (3 ; 4) using a clean dry cloth. 8- Bring the next blow station around to your working position using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU -013. 9- Repeat as above from step 3 until you have greased all of the mold support units.

3

Part C BGM-013

2/2

4

BEFORE YOU FINISH 10- Turn the machine a few times using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013. 11- Unlock and open the mold support unit manually. 12- Insert the locking system holding brace, see procedure "BSU -001. 13- Wipe off any grease splashes using a clean, dry cloth. 14- Remove the locking system holding brace , see procedure "BSU -001. 15- Close the mold support unit manually. 16- Bring the next blow station around to your working position using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU -013. 17- Repeat as above from step 13 until you have cleaned all the mold support units. 18- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

1-006394-01-xx.svg

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

BGM-014

Greasing the coder wheel gear

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Work to be carried out at height: use the equipment fitted on the machine and always follow current safety regulations. MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

1-006030-18-xx.svg

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - "LUB 29" grease, - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - Clean, dry brush. PROCEDURE 1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013. 2- Bring the coder wheel around to your working position using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013. 3- Wipe the grease from the rings (1) using a clean, dry cloth. 4- Grease the rings (1) with "LUB 29" grease using the paintbrush.

1

Area to be greased

BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-006395-01-xx.svg

5- Turn the machine a few times using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013. Do not wipe off the grease already present on the crown rings (1). 6- Wipe off any grease splashes using a clean, dry cloth. 7- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

Greasing the coder wheel gear

BGM-014

2/2

© SIDEL

2

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BGM-015

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

Greasing the blow wheel drive ring movements

2

GENERAL INFORMATION 1 cm3 of "LUB 29" grease corresponds to 1 shot from the "ALGI" grease gun.

1-006030-35-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS - machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001, TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - "LUB 29" grease, - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - "ALGI" grease gun. PROCEDURE

1

1- Wipe off the grease nipples (1) using a clean dry cloth. 2- Key in a rate instruction of 10 % the nominal rate, see procedure "BPU-004. 3- If the application PCC is in "Automatic" mode, press key (2).

© SIDEL

The application PCC is now in "Manual" mode.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-008408-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

2

Greasing the blow wheel drive ring movements

Part C BGM-015

2/2

4- Press key (3) for 2 seconds.

The alarm will sound until the button (3) changes status. 5- Release the button (3). The brake opens and the machine begins to turn. Change the greaser every 3 shots from the grease gun to ensure that the grease is applied evenly. 6- Inject 13 cm3 of "LUB 29" grease into each nipple (1) using the grease gun "ALGI". 7- Wipe off the grease nipples (1) using a clean dry cloth. BEFORE YOU FINISH 8- Press the (3) key.

rate.

see 2 1-006403-18-02.svg

3 1-006704-04-xx.svg

© SIDEL

The machine stops. 9- Enter the production output procedure "BPU-004. The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog /

1/2

BGM-017

Greasing the oven wheel drive ring movements

2

GENERAL INFORMATION 1 cm3 of "LUB 29" grease corresponds to 1 shot from the "ALGI" grease gun.

1-006030-05-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS - machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001, TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - "LUB 29" grease, - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - "ALGI" grease gun. PROCEDURE

1

1- Wipe off the grease nipples (1) using a clean dry cloth. 2- Key in a rate instruction of 10 % the nominal rate, see procedure "BPU-004. 3- If the application PCC is in "Automatic" mode, press key (2).

© SIDEL

The application PCC is now in "Manual" mode.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-008417-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog /

2

Greasing the oven wheel drive ring movements

BGM-017

2/2

4- Press key (3) for 2 seconds.

The alarm will sound until the button (3) changes status.

2 1-006403-18-02.svg

5- Release the button (3).

The brake opens and the machine begins to turn. Change the greaser every 3 shots from the grease gun to ensure that the grease is applied evenly.

3

6- Inject 7 cm3 of "LUB 29" grease into each nipple (1) using the grease gun "ALGI". 7- Wipe off the grease nipples (1) using a clean dry cloth.

1-006704-04-xx.svg

BEFORE YOU FINISH 8- Press the (3) key.

The machine stops.

9- Enter the production procedure "BPU-004.

output

rate.

see

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BGM-018

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

Greasing the oven wheel shaft bearings

2

GENERAL INFORMATION 1 cm3 of "LUB 29" grease corresponds to 1 shot from the "ALGI" grease gun.

1-006030-05-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS

1

- machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001, TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - "LUB 29" grease, - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - "ALGI" grease gun. PROCEDURE 1- Wipe off the grease nipples (1) using a clean dry cloth. 2- Key in a rate instruction of 10% the nominal rate, see procedure "BPU-004. 3- If the application PCC is in "Automatic" mode, press key (2).

© SIDEL

The application PCC is now in "Manual" mode.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-008419-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

2

Greasing the oven wheel shaft bearings

Part C BGM-018

2/2

4- Press key (3) for 2 seconds.

The alarm will sound until the button (3) changes status. 5- Release the button (3). The brake opens and the machine begins to turn. Change the greaser every 2 shots from the grease gun to ensure that the grease is applied evenly. 6- Inject 8 cm3 of "LUB 29" grease into each nipple (1) using the grease gun "ALGI". 7- Wipe off the grease nipples (1) using a clean dry cloth. BEFORE YOU FINISH 8- Press the (3) key.

rate.

see 2 1-006403-18-02.svg

3 1-006704-04-xx.svg

© SIDEL

The machine stops. 9- Enter the production output procedure "BPU-004. The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BGM-019

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

Greasing the mold support unit locking system

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Make sure that the mold support unit is secured in the open position before attempting any work on it, see procedure "BSU -001. The frequencies with which the locking pin and the holding lock are different. For further information, please refer to chapter "Maintenance schedule" chapter in the User manual. MACHINE STATUS

1-006030-01-xx.svg

Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings", - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - "LUB A18" grease, - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - locking system holding brace , - Clean, dry brush, - "44. 30 x 32" thin flat-head wrench.

© SIDEL

PROCEDURE

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

2

Greasing the mold support unit locking system

Part C BGM-019

2/2

Greasing the mold support unit locking pins Do not activate the low pressure air system in the JOG implementation window. 1- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013. 2- Unlock and open the mold support unit manually. 3- Insert the locking system holding brace, see procedure "BSU -001. 4- Loosen the nut (1). 5- Remove the cover plate (2). 6- Clean the locking components using a clean, dry cloth. 7- Use a paintbrush to apply the "LUB A18" grease to the shaft (3), the anti-torque guide (4), the locking pins (5) and the bores (6).

7 1

2

1-006688-01-xx.svg

3

Area to be greased

8- Position the cover plate (2). 9- Tighten the nut (1). 10- Remove the locking system holding brace , see procedure "BSU-001. 11- Close the mold support unit manually. Greasing the mold support unitlocking system holding lock 12- Remove the box (7). 13- Remove the spring (8). 14- Remove the holding lock (9). 15- Use a paintbrush to apply the "LUB A18" grease to the box (7), thespring (8) and the holding lock (9). 16- Position the holding lock (9). 17- Position the spring (8). 18- Fit the box (7). 19- Bring the next blow station around to your working position using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013. 20- Repeat as above from step 2 until you have greased all of the mold support unit locking systems.

6 5

4

1-006687-01-xx.svg

8 7

BEFORE YOU FINISH 21- Turn the machine a few times using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013. Make sure that the mold support unit is secured in the open position before attempting any work on it, see procedure "BSU -001. 22- Wipe off any grease splashes using a clean, dry cloth. 23- Disconnect the JOG, see procedure "BCU-013.

9 1-006501-01-xx.svg

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

BGM-020

Greasing the preform ejection cams

2

MACHINE STATUS - all machine power procedure "BCU-012.

and

utilities

turned

off,

see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - "LUB A15" grease, - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - Clean, dry brush.

1-006030-05-xx.svg

PROCEDURE 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Wipe the spent grease of the cam races (1) using a clean, dry cloth. 3- Grease the cam races (1) using a paintbrush and the "LUB A15" grease. Area to be greased

BEFORE YOU FINISH Do not wipe the cam races (1).

1

4- Wipe off the excess grease using a clean, dry cloth. 5- Close the safety doors.

The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-006507-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

Greasing the preform ejection cams

BGM-020

2/2

© SIDEL

2

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

BGM-021

Greasing the nozzle raise safety cam

2

MACHINE STATUS - all machine power procedure "BCU-012.

and

utilities

turned

off,

see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - "LUB 29" grease, - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - Clean, dry brush.

1-006030-37-xx.svg

PROCEDURE 1- Clean the spent grease off the cam race (1) using a clean, dry cloth. 2- Grease the cam race (1) using a paintbrush and the "LUB 29" grease. Do not wipe the cam race (1). 3- Wipe any excess grease off the cam (1). Area to be greased

BEFORE YOU FINISH 4- Close the safety doors.

The procedure is now complete.

1

© SIDEL

1-007162-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

Greasing the nozzle raise safety cam

BGM-021

2/2

© SIDEL

2

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BGM-030

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

Transfer cam lubrication

2

GENERAL INFORMATION 1 cm3 of "LUB 29" grease corresponds to 1 shot from the "ALGI" grease gun. The grease distributor distributes partial doses of grease to the preform (A) and bottle (B) transfer wheel cams.

1-006030-35-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS - machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - "LUB 29" grease, - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - "ALGI" grease gun.

B

1

A 1-008061-01-xx.svg

PROCEDURE 1- Clean the greasing nipple (1) using a clean, dry cloth. 2- Key in a rate instruction of 10 % the nominal rate, see procedure "BPU-004. 3- If the application PCC is in "Automatic" mode, press key (2).

© SIDEL

The application PCC is now in "Manual" mode.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

2

Transfer cam lubrication

Part C BGM-030

2/2

4- Press key (3) for 2 seconds.

The alarm will sound until the button (3) changes status. 5- Release the button (3). The brake opens and the machine begins to turn. 6- Inject 12 cm3 of "LUB 29" grease into the nipple (1) using the "ALGI" grease gun. 7- Clean the greasing nipple (1) using a clean, dry cloth. BEFORE YOU FINISH 8- Press the (3) key.

rate.

see

2 1-006403-18-02.svg

3 1-006704-04-xx.svg

© SIDEL

The machine stops. 9- Enter the production output procedure "BPU-004. The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BGM-031

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

Lubrication of the unlocking and locking cams of the mold-support units

2

MACHINE STATUS - all machine power procedure "BCU-012.

and

utilities

turned

off,

see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - "LUB A29" grease, - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - Clean, dry brush.

1-006030-05-xx.svg

PROCEDURE 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Wipe the spent grease of the cam races (1 ; 2) using a clean, dry cloth.

1

1-007709-01-xx.svg

3- Grease the cam races (1 ; 2) using a paintbrush and the "LUB A29" grease. Area to be greased

2

BEFORE YOU FINISH 4- Turn the machine a few times using the JOG system, see procedure "BCU-013. Do not wipe the cam races (1 ; 2).

1-007710-01-xx.svg

5- Wipe off the excess grease using a clean, dry cloth. 6- Close the safety doors.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

Lubrication of the unlocking and locking cams of the mold-support units

BGM-031

2/2

© SIDEL

2

Part C

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BGM-032

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

Greasing the blowing function cams

2

GENERAL INFORMATION 1 cm3 of "LUB 29" grease corresponds to 1 shot from the "ALGI" grease gun. The grease distributor distributes partial doses of grease to: - stretching cam (A), - mold opening/closing cam (B), - Mold base raise/lower cam (C). 1-006030-35-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS

A

C

- machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - "LUB 29" grease, - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - "ALGI" grease gun. PROCEDURE 1- Clean the greasing nipple (1) using a clean, dry cloth. 2- Key in a rate instruction of 10% the nominal rate, see procedure "BPU-004. 3- If the application PCC is in "Automatic" mode, press key (2).

© SIDEL

The application PCC is now in "Manual" mode.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1

B 1-008062-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

2

Greasing the blowing function cams

Part C BGM-032

2/2

4- Press key (3) for 2 seconds.

The alarm will sound until the button (3) changes status. 5- Release the button (3). The brake opens and the machine begins to turn. 6- Inject 8 cm3 of "LUB 29" grease into the nipple (1) using the "ALGI" grease gun. 7- Clean the greasing nipple (1) using a clean, dry cloth. BEFORE YOU FINISH 8- Press the (3) key.

rate,

see

2 1-006403-18-02.svg

3 1-006704-04-xx.svg

© SIDEL

The machine stops. 9- Enter the production output procedure "BPU-004. The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog /

1/2

BGM-033

Piloted automatic greaser: replacing a cartridge

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Replace the grease cartridge (1) when replacing the control unit (2). If anomalies occur with the piloted automatic greaser, the corresponding fault is displayed on the JOG.

1-006030-32-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS - all machine power procedure "BCU-012, - oven cold.

and

utilities

turned

off,

see 4

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts - grease cartridge (1), - control unit (2) if necessary. Consumables - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools None

8

1-008403-02-xx.svg

PROCEDURE Removal 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Unclip the electrical connector (3) by pulling on its axle. 3- Loosen and remove the automatic greasing unit (4) manually. 4- Remove the cover (5) manually. 5- Remove the control unit (2).

3 5

2

Dispose of the grease cartridge (1) in accordance with applicable legislation. Refit 6- If the control unit (2) is defective replace it. 7- Fit the control unit (2) on the new grease cartridge (1). 8- If the control unit has been replaced, position the switches (6) in the same way as on the old control unit. 9- Fit the cover (5) and screw it on manually.

1

7

© SIDEL

1-007964-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog /

2

Piloted automatic greaser: replacing a cartridge

10- Clean the area around the automatic greasing unit (4) using a clean dry cloth. 11- Remove the plug (7).

BGM-033

2/2

2

Never screw on the greaser a second time lest you ruin the auto-seal of the threads. 12- Screw the automatic greaser (4) lightly onto its base (8).

6

Observe the positioning of the electrical connector pins (3). 13- Clip on the electrical connector (3). BEFORE YOU FINISH 1-007965-01-xx.svg

14- Close the safety doors.

© SIDEL

F Check the greasing system in production. The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part C 1/2

BGM-035

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

Greasing the reducer motor bearing

2

GENERAL INFORMATION 1 cm3 of "LUB 29" grease corresponds to 1 shot from the "ALGI" grease gun. This procedure requires 6 cm3 of "LUB 29" grease

1-006030-77-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS -

machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001. the machine is stopped, see procedure "BCU-006 PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004 PCC application set to "Settings",

- machine empty. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - "LUB 29" grease, - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - "ALGI" grease gun.

2

1-010734-00-xx.svg

PROCEDURE 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Connect the JOG to the work zone, see procedure "BCU-013 3- Clean the greasing nipple (1) using a clean, dry cloth. Never exceed the recommended amount of grease as this may cause permanent damage to the parts being greased To ensure a uniform distribution of grease, carry out the operation 2 times.

© SIDEL

1

4- Inject 3 cm3 of "LUB 29" grease into the nipple (1) using the "ALGI" grease gun. 5- Turn the machine 1 time uusing the JOG. 6- Inject 3 cm3 of "LUB 29" grease into the nipple (1) using the "ALGI" grease gun. 7- Clean the greasing nipple (1) using a clean, dry cloth. 8- Clean off excess grease Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Greasing procedure

2

Greasing the reducer motor bearing

Part C BGM-035

2/2

BEFORE YOU FINISH

© SIDEL

9- Disconnect the JOG. see procedure "BCU-013 10- Close the safety doors.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

GENERAL PRESENTATION USER PROCEDURE MECHANICAL OPERATION PROCEDURE ELECTRICAL OPERATION PROCEDURE

Part A Part B Part C Part D

TABLE OF CONTENTS INSPECTING / CLEANING PROCEDURE Checking the electrical connections

BNE

..........................................................................................................

BNE-001

Inspection/cleaning: fan filters

...................................................................................................................

BNE-002

Cleaning an infrared camera

.....................................................................................................................

BNE-003

Cleaning the photo-electric sensors Checking the beacon stack

..........................................................................................................

BNE-004

.......................................................................................................................

BNE-005

Checking the speed controller parameters

...............................................................................................

REMOVAL / REFIT PROCEDURE Removal / refit - plc batteries

BNE-006 BDE

....................................................................................................................

Removal / refit - plc memory card

BDE-001

.............................................................................................................

BDE-003

Removal / refit: striker fuses

.....................................................................................................................

BDE-004

Removal / refit - UPS battery

....................................................................................................................

BDE-005

................................................................................................................................

BDE-006

Removal / refit - UPS

Removal / refit - power controller box Removal / refit - oven lamps

.......................................................................................................

BDE-007

.....................................................................................................................

BDE-009

...................................................................................................................

BDE-010

Removal/Refit - UV rail lamps ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

BRE

Setting the inductive detectors

..................................................................................................................

Setting the preform detection system at the machine infeed Adjusting the aim of an infrared camera

....................................................................

BRE-001 BRE-002

...................................................................................................

BRE-003

Configuring an infrared camera

................................................................................................................

BRE-004

Synchronizing preform loading

.................................................................................................................

BRE-005

........................................................................................................................

BRE-009

Setting the air conditioning

Setting the torque limiter sensors

.............................................................................................................

Setting the sensor cells on the infeed rail

.................................................................................................

Setting the sensor cells on the feeder stabilization rail

.............................................................................

Setting the sensor cells on the feeder unscrambler rollers

BRE-014 BRE-015

.......................................................................

BRE-016

.....................................................................................

BRE-018

© SIDEL

Setting the sensor cells on the hopper assembly

BRE-010

Publication date : 13/11/2009

D - 1/2

Part D

© SIDEL

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

D - 2/2

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

Electrical operation procedure Inspecting / cleaning procedure

TABLE OF CONTENTS ..........................................................................................................

BNE-001

Inspection/cleaning: fan filters

Checking the electrical connections

...................................................................................................................

BNE-002

Cleaning an infrared camera

.....................................................................................................................

BNE-003

Cleaning the photo-electric sensors Checking the beacon stack

..........................................................................................................

BNE-004

.......................................................................................................................

BNE-005

...............................................................................................

BNE-006

© SIDEL

Checking the speed controller parameters

Publication date : 13/11/2009

D - 1/2

Part D

© SIDEL

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

D - 2/2

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

BNE-001

Checking the electrical connections

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Checking the electrical connections: - when installing the machine, - during a technical shutdown or at least once a year. The first inspection should be made before the end of the manufacturer's warranty period. MACHINE STATUS - all machine power and procedure "BCU-012, - mains power switch, open.

utilities

turned

off,

see

PROCEDURE 1- Check and systematically tighten up all of the screws holding the electrical connections in position in the various electrical boxes and the electrical cabinet. 2- Check and tighten up the autotransformer connections if the machine is fitted with one. BEFORE YOU FINISH 3- Sign off the operation on the maintenance schedule.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-006030-00-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

Checking the electrical connections

BNE-001

2/2

© SIDEL

2

Part D

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

BNE-002

Inspection/cleaning: fan filters

1

GENERAL INFORMATION The fan filters are located as follows: - next to the control station (1), - next to the PCC(2), - on the front the hopper electrical cabinet (3), - unscrambler rollers electrical cabinet front (4), - on the on-board cabinets (5) in the mobile section. This procedure requires the presence of 2 technicians: - the first activates manual rotation, - the second controls the access to the on-board cabinets (5).

1-006030-27-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

1

PROCEDURE Fixed section filters 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Remove the filter from its support using a screwdriver.

F Check the condition of the filter. · If the filter is soiled go to step 3 . · If the filter is worn replace it and go to step 5 . 3- Rinse the filter with water.

1-006349-01-xx.svg

4- Dry the filter. 5- Fit the filter on the support. 6- Repeat steps 2 to 5 .

The filters are clean.

2

© SIDEL

1-006347-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

1

Inspection/cleaning: fan filters

BNE-002

2/2

Filters on the mobile section 7- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. Extreme caution and perfect coordination between the 2 technicians is required for the following operations. 8- Use the manual rotation system to bring the on-board cabinets (5) into an accessible position, see procedure "BCU-014. 9- Open the door to the cabinet (5). 10- Remove the filter from its support using a screwdriver.

F Check the condition of the filter. · If the filter is soiled go to step 11 . · If the filter is worn replace it and go to step 13 .

3 1-008518-01-xx.svg

11- Rinse the filter with water. 12- Dry the filter. 13- Fit the filter on the support. 14- Close the door to the cabinet (5). 15- Repeat steps 8 to 14 .

4

The filters are clean.

BEFORE YOU FINISH 16- Close the safety doors.

The procedure is now complete.

1-008520-01-xx.svg

5

© SIDEL

1-006348-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

BNE-003

Cleaning an infrared camera

1 1;2;3

GENERAL INFORMATION Camera 1 2 3 4

Controls the temperature of the preform bodies at oven outfeed Controls the temperature of the preform necks at oven outfeed (option) Controls the temperature of the preform bases at oven outfeed (option) Controls the temperature of the items at mold outfeed (option)

4

1-006030-72-xx.svg

The number of cameras varies depending on the process and the options available on the machine. The cleaning procedure is identical for each camera. Do not alter the position of the components when cleaning them. MACHINE STATUS - all machine power procedure "BCU-012.

and

utilities

turned

off,

see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - Clean, dry cloths, - optical cleaning solution. Specific tools None PROCEDURE 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Clean the sensor (1) lens (5) with a cloth dipped in the cleaning solution. 3- Wipe the lens (5) on the sensor using a clean, dry cloth.

5

BEFORE YOU FINISH 4- Close the safety doors.

The procedure is now complete. 1

© SIDEL

1-006068-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

Cleaning an infrared camera

BNE-003

2/2

© SIDEL

1

Part D

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

BNE-004

Cleaning the photo-electric sensors

1 7

GENERAL INFORMATION Sensor 1

Unscrambler rollers and elevator column stoppage

2

Unscrambler roller exit

3

Upper count cell

4

Unscrambler roller anticipated start sensor

B102.1 (D1) B102.0 (D3) B105.0 (D5) B103.3 (D4)

5

Detection of preforms at top of rail

B10.5

6

Detection of preforms at bottom of rail

B10.6

7

Detection of preforms at machine infeed

B32.1

8

Bottle blockage detection in chute (option)

B13.1

8 6 5 4

2

1 1-006030-06-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS - all machine power procedure "BCU-012.

3

10

and

utilities

turned

off,

see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - Clean, dry cloths, - optical cleaning solution. Specific tools None PROCEDURE 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Clean the photo-electric cells (9) and the reflectors (10) using a cloth dipped in the optical cleaning solution. 3- Wipe the photo-electrical cells (9) and the reflectors (10) using a clean, dry cloth. BEFORE YOU FINISH 4- Close the safety doors.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

9 1-006762-04-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

Cleaning the photo-electric sensors

BNE-004

2/2

9

1-006072-01-xx.svg

© SIDEL

1

Part D

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

BNE-005

Checking the beacon stack

1

GENERAL INFORMATION The order of the lamps on the beacon stack (2) is, from top to bottom; red, yellow, green and blue.

1-006030-07-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, procedure "BCU-002, - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - PCC application set to "Settings".

see see

PROCEDURE 1- Press the (1) key.

The lamps in the beacon stack (2) light up one by one and the sequence is completed with an alarm siren (3). 2- Replace fault lamps by turning the collars (4) a quarter turn.

1

BEFORE YOU FINISH

1-010353-23-02.svg

3- Sign off the operation on the maintenance schedule.

The procedure is now complete.

4 3

2

© SIDEL

1-006073-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

Checking the beacon stack

BNE-005

2/2

© SIDEL

1

Part D

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

BNE-006

Checking the speed controller parameters

1

GENERAL INFORMATION Access to electrical areas is restricted to qualified and authorized personnel only. The procedure is solely for checking the parameters of the speed controllers. List of parameters to be checked : This list is intended as an example and is by no means exhaustive. See the real list in the machine's electrical file. 1-006030-08-xx.svg

Operation / Display 0.01

Language

0.40

Key on LCP Load / motor

1.20

Motor Power

1.22

Motor Voltage

1.23

Motor Frequency

1.24

Motor Current

1.25

Motor Nominal Speed References / Ramps

3.03

Maximum Reference

3.41

Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time

3.42

Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time Limits / Warnings

4.10

Motor speed Direction

4.13

Motor Speed High Limit Analog In/Out

5.40 (0)

Function Relay (1)

5.40 (1)

Function Relay (2) Comm. and Options

8.01

Control Site Profibus

9.16

PCD Read Configuration

9.22

Telegram Selection

Not all of the parameters may need to be checked, depending on the controller. MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit procedure "BCU-002.

under under

power,

see

power,

see

© SIDEL

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Inspecting / cleaning procedure

1

Checking the speed controller parameters

Part D BNE-006

2/2

Parts - controller setting sheet (see electrical file). Consumables None Specific tools None PROCEDURE 1- Open the door to the electrical cabinet. 2- Press the (1) key.

the "menu" page appears. 3- Press keys (2). The required menu is selected. 4- Press the (3) key. The selected menu appears. 5- Check the configuration against the setting sheet for the corresponding controller.

1

If the readings do not match, contact SIDEL. 6- Press the key (4) to return to the previous menu. BEFORE YOU FINISH

4 2

3

7- Close the door to the electrical cabinet.

The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-006074-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

Electrical operation procedure Removal / Refit procedure

TABLE OF CONTENTS Removal / refit - plc batteries

....................................................................................................................

Removal / refit - plc memory card

BDE-001

.............................................................................................................

BDE-003

Removal / refit: striker fuses

.....................................................................................................................

BDE-004

Removal / refit - UPS battery

....................................................................................................................

BDE-005

................................................................................................................................

BDE-006

Removal / refit - UPS

Removal / refit - power controller box Removal / refit - oven lamps

BDE-007 BDE-009

...................................................................................................................

BDE-010

© SIDEL

Removal/Refit - UV rail lamps

.......................................................................................................

.....................................................................................................................

Publication date : 13/11/2009

D - 1/2

Part D

© SIDEL

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

D - 2/2

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDE-001

Removal / refit - plc batteries

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Access to electrical areas is restricted to qualified and authorized personnel only. Misuse of lithium batteries may cause fire or explosion. Never bring the batteries into contact with water of flame. Never expose the batteries to sources of heat greater than 100 °C. Never place batteries or cells in ordinary household waste. Wrap each battery indvidually in a thick plastic bag and send them to a waste treatment center.

1-006030-13-xx.svg

1

PLC data is saved by lithium batteries. When a battery is flat, the red lamp "BAF" (1) on the corresponding power module will light up, indicating a battery fault.

5

If any one of the batteries is faulty, SIDEL recommends that you replace all of the batteries.

2

Replace the batteries with the plc switched On (switch on power modules to "I"). MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit procedure "BCU-001, - plc On.

3

under

power,

see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - Lithium batteries "AA - 3,6 V". Specific tools None

1-007067-01-xx.svg

© SIDEL

PROCEDURE

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Removal / refit - plc batteries

Removal 1- Open the door to the electrical cabinet. 2- Set the switches (2) on all of the power modules to position "I". 3- Open the cover (3). 4- Remove the batteries (4) from their housing by pulling the plastic strap. Refit 5- Insert the batteries (4) into the housing on the power module.

Part D BDE-001

2/2

4

Make sure that the battery poles are inserted the right way around and that the plastic flanges are fitted correctly. 6- If the red "BAF" lamp (1) comes on, turn the "FMR" (Failure Message Reset) switch (5) on the power supply module. - If the battery fault lamp goes out. · · ·

3

The batteries are now functional.

If the battery fault lamp (1) remains lit: Remove the batteries (4) from their housing by pulling the plastic strap. Short-circuit the batteries for 3 second maximum. Re-insert the batteries. - If the battery fault lamp (1) remains lit.

The batteries are faulty. Repeat as above from step 4 with new batteries (4). 7- Fit the cover (3).

1-007068-01-xx.svg

·

BEFORE YOU FINISH 8- Close the door to the electrical cabinet.

The procedure is now complete.

4

© SIDEL

1-006113-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDE-003

Removal / refit - plc memory card

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Access to electrical areas is restricted to qualified and authorized personnel only. Never remove a memory card when the plc is switched on. The memory card used here is an "EEPROM FLASH". The "EEPROM FLASH" card is able to conserve data without requiring an external power supply.

1-006030-13-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS

1

- the machine is stopped, - machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001.

6

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts - "EEPROM FLASH" (1) memory card. Consumables None Specific tools None

4

3

2

PROCEDURE Removal 1- Open the door to the electrical cabinet. 2- Set the main switch (2) to "STOP". 3- Set the power module (4) standby switch (3) to position "OFF". 4- Remove the "EEPROM FLASH"(1) memory card. Refit 5- Line up the guides (5) and insert the new card (1) as far as it will go. 6- Set the power module (4) standby switch (3) to position "I".

© SIDEL

The "STOP"(6) lamp flashes slowly and the CPU carries out a general deletion. The full erase resets the CPU memories.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-007067-03-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Removal / refit - plc memory card

7- Set the main switch (2) to "RUN".

Part D BDE-003

2/2

5

BEFORE YOU FINISH 8- Close the door to the electrical cabinet.

The procedure is now complete.

1

© SIDEL

1-006118-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDE-004

Removal / refit: striker fuses

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Access to electrical areas is restricted to qualified and authorized personnel only. Replace the fuses when the striker pin has struck. Before attempting any work make sure that the power is off. The primary electrical circuit uses orange wires. 1-006030-13-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS - all machine power procedure "BCU-012.

and

utilities

turned

off,

1

2

4

3

see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts - striker fuses.

1

Consumables None Specific tools None PROCEDURE

1-008534-01-xx.svg

Removal 1- Open the mains power supply switch. 2- Open the door to the electrical cabinet. 3- Remove the screws (1) from the protectve cover (2) on the main switch (3). 4- Remove the protective cover (2). Make sure that there is no power at the input terminals (5).

© SIDEL

5- Open the safety cover (4). 6- Remove the fuse (6) fixing screws 6.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Removal / refit: striker fuses

The fixing screws are not present on all models. 7- Remove the faulty fuses (6). Refit 8- Fit the new fuses (6), with the pin (7) facing upwards. 9- Close the safety cover (4). 10- Fit the protective cover (2) using the screws (1). 11- Close the door to the electrical cabinet. 12- Close the mains machine power supply switch.

Part D BDE-004

2/2

5

7 6

BEFORE YOU FINISH 13- Turn on the machine, see procedure "BCU-001.

The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-006119-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDE-005

Removal / refit - UPS battery

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Never place batteries or cells in ordinary household waste. Wrap each battery indvidually in a thick plastic bag and send them to a waste treatment center. The battery will reach full charge in 8 hours.

1-006757-01-xx.svg

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

1

Parts - UPS battery. Consumables None Specific tools None

2

PROCEDURE

1-006122-01-xx.svg

Removal 1- Remove the UPS (1), see procedure "BDE-006. 2- Set the UPS (1) down flat. 3- Remove the cover (2) from the battery compartment (3). 4- Remove the battery (3). 5- Disconnect the wires from the terminals (4). Refit 6- Connect the wires to the terminals (4) on the new battery. 7- Insert the battery (3) into the compartment. · Connect the black wire to the earthing terminal. · Connect the red wire to the positive terminal. 8- Slide the battery compartment (3) cover (2) into the grooves on the UPS (1) as far as it will go.

3

4

BEFORE YOU FINISH 1-006121-01-xx.svg

9- Fit the UPS (1), see procedure "BDE-006.

3

The procedure is now complete.

4

© SIDEL

1-006123-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal / refit - UPS battery

BDE-005

2/2

© SIDEL

2

Part D

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDE-006

Removal / refit - UPS

2

GENERAL INFORMATION The battery will reach full charge in 8 hours. MACHINE STATUS - the machine is stopped. PROCEDURE Removal 1- Turn off the PCC, see procedure "BCU-009. 2- Open the door (1) on the control station. 3- Turn off the UPS (2) by pressing the button (3). 4- Remove the UPS (2) from the control station. 5- Disconnect the wires (4 ; 5 ; 6 ; 7) from the UPS. 6- Take the UPS (2) out of the control station.

1-006030-14-xx.svg

1 2

1-006278-04-xx.svg

Refit 7- Place the UPS (2) near the control station. 8- Connect the wires (4 ; 5 ; 6 ; 7) to the UPS. 9- Place the UPS (2) inside the control station. 10- Press the button (3) to turn on the UPS (2).

The "Power on"(8) lamp comes on.

2 8 3

© SIDEL

1-006124-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Removal / refit - UPS

Part D BDE-006

11- Turn on the PCC, see procedure "BCU-004.

2/2

2

BEFORE YOU FINISH 12- Close the door (1) on the control station.

7

The procedure is now complete.

4

5

6

© SIDEL

1-006126-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDE-007

Removal / refit - power controller box

2

MACHINE STATUS - all machine power and procedure "BCU -012.

utilities

turned

off,

see

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts - electrical wiring box. Consumables None Specific tools None

1-006030-15-xx.svg

PROCEDURE Removal 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Disconnect the connectors (1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4) from the box (5) you wish to remove.

5 2 1 3

4 1-006127-01-xx.svg

3- Unscrew and remove the nuts (6).

6

6

© SIDEL

1-006130-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Removal / refit - power controller box

4- Unscrew and remove the bolt (7). 5- Remove the electrical box (5).

Part D BDE-007

2/2

7

5 1-006131-01-xx.svg

6- Loosen and remove the bracket (8) and the rubber stopper (9) assembly from the box (5). 7- Open the box (5). 8- Note down the profibus (10) address on the box (5). Refit 9- Open the box again (5). 10- Set the address profibus (10) to the same as that on the removed box by turning the inner arrow (11) using a small screwdriver. 11- Set the circuit breaker (12). 12- Fit the bracket (8) and the rubber stopper (9) on the box (5). 13- Fit the box (5) on the oven frame. 14- Insert the fixing screws (7) and tighten up. 15- Insert the nuts (6) and tighten up. 16- Refit the connectors (1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4).

5

9

8

1-006132-01-xx.svg

12

BEFORE YOU FINISH 17- Close the safety doors.

The procedure is now complete.

11 10

© SIDEL

1-006128-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 1/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDE-009

Removal / refit - oven lamps

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Access to electrical areas is restricted to qualified and authorized personnel only. Always hold the lamps by their ends. Never touch the lamps with your fingers. Always wear clean, dry gloves. 1-006030-09-xx.svg

Check the power of the lamps you wish to replace (2500 W, 3000 W). The shim stacks (7) allow you to adjust the position of the lamps (1) on the rack (3). Always follow the position of the shims (7) when replacing the lamps (1).

3 2

MACHINE STATUS - all machine power procedure "BCU-012, - oven cold.

and

utilities

turned

off,

see 1-006075-02-xx.svg

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts - lamp (1). Consumables None Specific tools None PROCEDURE Removal 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. To faciltate tightening, the handles (2) can be disengaged. Depending on the configuration of your machine, these elements (2) may vary visually but their functions remain the same.

4

2- Loosen the handles (2).

© SIDEL

1-006337-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Removal / refit - oven lamps

Part D BDE-009

2/4

3- Carefully tilt out the rack (3) from the oven. 4- Disconnect the lamp (1) from the connector (4) using a screwdriver. 3

5 1-006338-01-xx.svg

5- Pivot the cover lugs (5) by a 1/2 turn. 6- Remove the covers (6).

6 1

1-006339-02-xx.svg

7- Removing/refitting the shim(s) (7). If a lamp is broken, clean the whole area thoroughly with an aspirator. Dispose of any articles present and make sure any electrical components are disposed of according to specific procedures. 8- Remove the lamp (1).

7

1

1-008536-02-xx.svg

Refit 9- Position the lamp (1) in the supports . 10- Fit the shim(s) (7) making sure they are in their original position.

6 1

© SIDEL

1-006341-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 3/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDE-009

Removal / refit - oven lamps

2

11- Position the covers (6). 12- Pivot the cover lugs (5) by a 1/2 turn.

5 1-006342-01-xx.svg

13- Connect the lamp (1) to the connector (4) using a screwdriver. 14- Carefully tilt out the rack (3) from the oven. 15- Tighten the handles (2). BEFORE YOU FINISH

2

3

16- Close the safety doors.

The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-006076-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal / refit - oven lamps

BDE-009

4/4

© SIDEL

2

Part D

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 1/4

BDE-010

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/Refit - UV rail lamps

2

GENERAL INFORMATION Access to electrical areas is restricted to qualified and authorized personnel only. Never touch the lamps with your fingers. Never obstruct the upper ventilation grill as this may reduce the bactericidal effects of the lamps.

1-008758-10-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS

10

4

1

- infeed rail clear of preforms, see procedure "BCU-017, - all machine power and utilities turned off, see procedure "BCU-012, - infeed rail cold. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts - lamps . Consumables None Specific tools - cotton gloves.

11

2

3 1-008970-02-xx.svg

PROCEDURE Removing the UV lamps from the upper part of the rail 1- Open the upper cover (1) using the butterfly catch (2). 2- Remove the screen from the back panel (3) by loosening the 1/4-turn fixings . 3- Remove the cover plate (4). 4- Disconnect the connector (5) from the bottom of the lamp.

8

9

5

© SIDEL

1-008971-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

2

Removal/Refit - UV rail lamps

5- Open the clips (6).

The flap (7) is now open. 6- Unclip the lower lamp cap from the lower lamp support (8). 7- Remove the lamp from the upper support (9). 8- Repeat steps 4 to 7 until you have removed all of the lamps you need to replace. Removing the UV lamps from the lower part of the rail 9- Open the bottom cover (10) using the butterfly nut (11).

BDE-010

2/4

18

7

6 1-008972-01-xx.svg

10- Disconnect the connector (12) from the upper lamp cap.

15

12 1-008973-01-xx.svg

11- Open the clips (13).

The flap (14) is now open. 12- Unclip the upper lamp cap from the upper lamp support (15). 13- Remove the lamp from the lower support (16). 14- Repeat steps 10 to 13 until you have removed all of the lamps you need to replace. Fitting the UV lamps Always wear protective cotton gloves when handling the lamps .

14

17

13

F If the lamps are dirty, clean them using a clean dry cloth. 1-008974-01-xx.svg

© SIDEL

Never use cleaning agents.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 3/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

BDE-010

Removal/Refit - UV rail lamps

Lower part of the rail 15- Position the new lamp between the neck guides (17). 16- Position the lower lamp cap in the lower lamp support (16). 17- Clip the upper lamp cap onto the upper lamp support (15). The clip lamp.

16

must not be in contact with the glass of the

F If the clip is touching the glass of the lamp, check the position of the lower lamp cap in the lower lamp support (16). 18- Reconnect the connector (12) onto the lamp making sure that the polarity is correct. 19- Repeat steps 15 to 18 until you have refitted all of the lamps. 20- Close the flap (14) using the catches (13). 21- Close and lock the lower cover (10) using the butterfly nut (11). Upper part of the rail 22- Position the new lamp between the neck guides (18). 23- Position the upper lamp cap in the upper lamp support (9). 24- Clip the lower lamp cap into the lower lamp support (8). The clip lamp.

2

must not be in contact with the glass of the

F If the clip is in contact with the glass of the lamp, check the position of the upper lamp cap in the upper lamp support (9). 25- Reconnect the connector (5) onto the lamp making sure that the polarity is correct. 26- Repeat steps 22 to 25 until you have refitted all of the lamps. 27- Close the flap (7) using the catches (6). 28- Close and secure the upper cover (1) using the butterfly catch (2). 29- Fit the casing (4). 30- Fit the back cover (3) using the 1/4-turn fixing . BEFORE YOU FINISH 31- Turn on the power supplies to the machine, see procedure "BCU-001. 32- Test the UV rail lamps to make sure that they function properly, see procedure "BPU-008.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-008975-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Removal / Refit procedure

Removal/Refit - UV rail lamps

BDE-010

4/4

© SIDEL

2

Part D

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

Electrical operation procedure Adjustment procedure

TABLE OF CONTENTS Setting the inductive detectors

..................................................................................................................

Setting the preform detection system at the machine infeed Adjusting the aim of an infrared camera

....................................................................

BRE-001 BRE-002

...................................................................................................

BRE-003

Configuring an infrared camera

................................................................................................................

BRE-004

Synchronizing preform loading

.................................................................................................................

BRE-005

........................................................................................................................

BRE-009

Setting the air conditioning

Setting the torque limiter sensors

.............................................................................................................

Setting the sensor cells on the infeed rail

.................................................................................................

Setting the sensor cells on the feeder stabilization rail

.............................................................................

Setting the sensor cells on the feeder unscrambler rollers

BRE-014 BRE-015

.......................................................................

BRE-016

.....................................................................................

BRE-018

© SIDEL

Setting the sensor cells on the hopper assembly

BRE-010

Publication date : 13/11/2009

D - 1/2

Part D

© SIDEL

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Table of Contents

D - 2/2

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

BRE-001

Setting the inductive detectors

2

GENERAL INFORMATION An inductive proximity detector detects objects made from electrically conductive materials without the need for contact. The gaps indicated on the table are theoretical. Depending on the environment and the kinematics of the parts, the true values may need to be adjusted.

1-006030-00-xx.svg

1;2 1-010594-01-xx.svg

3;4 1-010595-01-xx.svg

5

© SIDEL

1-010587-01-xx.svg

N°

SIDEL reference

Reference indicated

Ø (mm)

Output normally open

Output normally closed

Recommende d gap (mm)

Gap range (mm)

1

30493

XS1M08PC410D Telemecanique

8

X

-

0,4

0 - 1,2

2

117071

IE5318 IFM

8

X

-

0,4

0 - 1,6

3

117076

IGS204 IFM

18

X

-

2

0 - 6,5

4

117077

IGS206 IFM

18

-

X

2

0 - 6,5

5

128580

IE5288 IFM

8

X

-

0,4

0 - 3,25

MACHINE STATUS

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

2

Setting the inductive detectors

BRE-001

2/2

- the machine is stopped, - machine energized, see procedure "BCU-001. PROCEDURE Inductive sensor 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Position the part to be detected in front of the sensor . 3- Loosen the nut and the counter nut (1). 4- Set the range (2) of the sensor according to the figures shown on the table.

The lamp on the sensor changes state. 5- Tighten the nut and the counter nut (1). 6- Position the part in a position where it should not be detected. The lamp on the sensor changes state. BEFORE YOU FINISH

1

7- Close the safety doors.

2 1-006352-10-xx.svg

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 1/2

BRE-002

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the preform detection system at the machine infeed

2

GENERAL INFORMATION The "B32.1" sensor (1) is a direct reflection photoelectric cell. It detects preforms at the machine infeed. This procedure requires the presence of 2 technicians: - the first activates manual rotation, - The second monitors the functioning of the sesnor (1).

1-006030-10-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit procedure "BCU-002.

1

under under

power,

see

power,

see

3

2

PROCEDURE 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Pivot the infeed guide (2) manually. 3- Place a preform on the infeed wheel. 4- Position the infeed guide (2) manually. 5- Place a preform in front of the sensor (1) using the manual rotation system, see procedure "BCU-014. 6- Loosen the nut (3) and the counter nut (4). 7- Position the sensor (1) level with a position between the neck and half way down the length of the preform. 8- Position the sensor (1) at a range of between 1 cm and 2 cm from the body of the preform.

The sensor lamp (1) lights up. 9- Tighten the nut (3) and the counter nut (4). 10- Pivot the infeed guide (2) manually. 11- Place several preforms on the infeed wheel. 12- Position the infeed guide (2) manually. 13- Use the manual rotation system to check that the sensor (1) functions correctly, see procedure "BCU-014. The lamp on the sensor (1) lights up when preforms pass in front of it. 14- Remove the preforms.

1-006281-01-xx.svg

1

4

BEFORE YOU FINISH 15- Close the safety doors.

The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-006282-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the preform detection system at the machine infeed

BRE-002

2/2

© SIDEL

2

Part D

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 1/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

BRE-003

Adjusting the aim of an infrared camera

2

GENERAL INFORMATION

1;2;3 Camera

1 2 3

Controls the temperature of the preform bodies at oven outfeed Controls the temperature of the preform necks at oven outfeed (option according to model) Controls the temperature of the preform bases at oven outfeed (option according to model)

The number of cameras varies depending on the process and the options available on the machine.

1-006030-116-xx.svg

This procedure applies to the camera (1) controlling the temperature of the preform bodies. The adjustment procedure is the same for each camera. The infrared sensor is fitted with a laser guide to enable it to be lined up. Never point the laser towards the eyes as you may cause permanent damage. This procedure requires the presence of 2 technicians: - the first activates manual rotation, - the second technician checks the value at the PCC. The minimum quantity of preforms to load onto the infeed wheel is 8 preforms. MACHINE STATUS - oven cold. Machine isolated except for: - PCC switched on, see procedure "BCU-004, - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - low pressure air circuit open, see procedure "BCU-005.

8

© SIDEL

PROCEDURE

Publication date : 13/11/2009

5

10

9

6

4 1-007626-05-02.svg

Part D

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

2

Adjusting the aim of an infrared camera

BRE-003

2/4

1- If the application PCC is in "Automatic" mode, press key (4), see procedure "BCU-015. 234-

5-

The application PCC is now in "Manual" mode. Press the (5) key. The "Options" family appears. Press the (6) key. The (A) window appears. If the "Forced loading" mode is not active, press the key (7). Forced loading is active. Close the window(s) and return to the "Welcome" family.

7

A 1-010390-03-02.svg

6- Press key (8) for 3 seconds.

8

The brake opens and the machine begins to turn. F Wait for the rate setpoint to be reached. 7- Press the key (9) while the 8 preforms are loading and then press the key (9) again to stop loading. 8- Press key (8) before the preforms reach the turnover ramp at the oven outfeed. The machine stops. 9- Press the (10) key. The "Alarms" family appears. 10- Press the (11) key. The (B) window appears.

9

4

1-006704-12-xx.svg

8

10

9

4

11

© SIDEL

1-006948-04-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 3/4

BRE-003

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Adjusting the aim of an infrared camera

2

11- Press the (12) key.

The (C) window appears. 12- Press the (13) key. B The keyboard appears. 13- Enter the "DB30.DBB150" variable using the keypad and then confirm. 14- Press the (14) key. The value "00000000" of variable "DB30.DBB150" 12 displays in the zone (D).

1-007616-03-02.svg

15- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 16- Use manual rotation to bring the preforms forward until the value "11111111" in the zone (D) is reached, see procedure "BCU-014. 17- Loosen the bolts (15). 18- Press button (16).

The laser guide (1) is on.

C

D

13

14

1-007581-03-02.svg

19- Set the support (17) so that the laser (1) falls on the preform bodies.

18

The sensor laser (1) needs to read a continuous line of preforms in order to provide a stable and uniform temperature reading.

1

20- Tighten the bolts (15). 21- Loosen the bolts (18).

16

17

15

© SIDEL

1-006284-05-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

2

Adjusting the aim of an infrared camera

22- Set the bracket (19) to position the sensor laser (1) on the middle of the preform bodies.

BRE-003 1

4/4

17

The height of the point at which the temperature is read depends on the size of the preform and has an effect on the bottle production set up. 23- Tighten the bolts (18). 24- Press button (16).

The sensor laser beam (1) is switched off. 25- Advance the spindle chain using manual rotation to clear the preforms, see procedure "BCU-014. 26- Remove the preforms.

1-006285-03-xx.svg

BEFORE YOU FINISH 27- Press the (5) key.

The "Options" family appears. 28- Press the (6) key. The (A) window appears. 29- Press the (7) key. Forced loading is disactivated. 30- Close the window(s) and return to the "Welcome" family. 31- Press key (4) to select "Automatic" mode, see procedure "BCU-006. 32- Close the safety doors. The procedure is now complete.

19 1

© SIDEL

1-006286-03-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

BRE-004

Configuring an infrared camera

2 1;2;3

GENERAL INFORMATION Camera 1 2 3 4

Controls the temperature of the preform bodies at oven outfeed Controls the temperature of the preform necks at oven outfeed (option according to model) Controls the temperature of the preform bases at oven outfeed (option according to model) Controls the temperature of the items at mold outfeed (option according to model)

4

1-006030-72-xx.svg

The number of cameras varies depending on the process and the options available on the machine. The adjustment procedure is the same for each camera. Never point the laser towards the eyes as you may cause permanent damage.

1 6

5

MACHINE STATUS - all machine power procedure "BCU-011, - oven cold.

and

utilities

turned

off,

see

PROCEDURE

1-006284-04-xx.svg

1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Loosen the screws (5) but do not remove them. 3- Remove the cover (6). 4- Position the jumper (7) to 0,5 s. 5- Position the coder (8) to "9". 6- Position the coder (9) to "0".

The emission factor is set to a value of 0,90. 7- Fit the cover (6) along with its fixing screws (5) on the body of the sensor (1) making sure that the pin (10) is inserted. 8- Tighten the bolts (5).

8

9

10

BEFORE YOU FINISH 9- Close the safety doors.

The procedure is now complete. 7

© SIDEL

1-006287-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Configuring an infrared camera

BRE-004

2/2

© SIDEL

2

Part D

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 1/6

BRE-005

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Synchronizing preform loading

3

GENERAL INFORMATION The prefrom loading indexing system requires very precise settings and synchronization, 2 operations are required: - mechanical setting of the position/orientation of the loading stop jack-cylinder (1), - synchronization of the prefrom loading wheel (2) with the retraction and extension of the jack-cylinder (1). The setting values for the synchronization are part of the recipe.

1-006030-10-xx.svg

According to the differences between the preforms used in the previous production run and the current one, the cylinder (1) setting may not always be necessary. Each setting is specific to the machine according to the following parameters: - the preform diameter, - the distance between the rim and the neck ring, - the length and slope of the infeed rail, - the momentum of the preforms, - the machine production rate, - the pneumatic assistance (air jet) at the infeed (according to model). PROCEDURE Setting the loading stop jack-cylinder (1) 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. 2- Separate the 5 first preforms on the infeed rail by pushing the others to the top. 3- Insert a screwdriver into the rail to stop them sliding back down. 4- Position the jack (1) using the brace (3)/bolt (4) and the brace (5)/bolt (6) assemblies.

4 1 3

© SIDEL

The pin (7) of the jack (1) in the extended position should be on an imaginary line Y running from the neck ring to the edge of the rim and lcoated at one third of the diameter of the preform neck. The pin (7) should have an angle α = 30° - 40° with regard to the retractable infeed guide (8). With the jack (1) in the extended position, the gap between the preform and the edge of the preform infeed wheel (2) should be X = 3 mm.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

5 6

1-006354-01-xx.svg

Part D

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

3

Synchronizing preform loading

BRE-005

2/6

Line the pin (7) up on a smooth part on the preform neck to ensure that it functions consistently. The position of the pin (7) at a third of the preform neck allows rapid feeding. 5- Press the (9) key.

The "Settings" family appears.

6- Close the safety doors. 7- Press the (10) key.

The (A) window appears.

2

8

7

1 1-006084-05-xx.svg

8- Press the (11) key.

The machine is now supplied with low pressure air. 9- Press the (12) key. The jack (1) is in the retracted position. The jack (1) pin (7) in the retracted position should not obstruct preform movement in any way.

7

1-006355-01-xx.svg

10- Press the (12) key.

2

The jack (1) is in the extended position.

7

The pin (7) of the jack (1) should not be obstructed when extending. 11- Remove the screwdriver from the infeed rail. 12- Close the window (A).

© SIDEL

1-006356-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 3/6

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

BRE-005

Synchronizing preform loading

3

Synchronizing the preform infeed wheel (2) with the loading stop jack (1) 13- Set to Supervisor mode, see procedure "BCU-021.

9

10 1-010353-24-02.svg

14- Press the (14) key.

The "Options" family appears.

A

11

12

© SIDEL

1-010348-10-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

3

Synchronizing preform loading

BRE-005

4/6

15- Press the (15) key.

The (B) window appears. 16- Press the (16) key. The (C) window appears.

15

14

1-007626-04-02.svg

17- Enter the synchronization value between the preform infeed wheel (2) and the retraction of the loading stop jack (1) using the keys (17). 18- Enter the synchronization value between the preform infeed wheel (2) and the extension of the loading stop jack (1) using the keys (18).

B

16

20

Begin at 50 %. The percentage 100 % corresponds to the total number of coder points in one machine pitch. 19- Start the machine cycle, see procedure "BCU-006.

F Make sure preform feeding is synchronized and no error messages appear at the PCC. - If a "torque tripped or strss on guide" message appears. · Correct and cancel the fault. · Correct the percentages. · Repeat steps 13 to 20 . - If not. · Go to step 21 . 20- Stop the machine, see procedure "BCU-006. 21- Close the window (C). BEFORE YOU FINISH

C 17

18

1-010391-02-02.svg

© SIDEL

F Make sure that: - preforms are fed to the required mold, - the preforms load into the notches on the infeed wheel (2) correctly, - every time there is a stoppage, the jack pin (7) is between two preforms. 22- Press the (20) key. The (D) window appears.

1-010390-04-02.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 5/6

BRE-005

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Synchronizing preform loading

3

23- Press the (21) key.

D 21 22

© SIDEL

Loading on one mold is active. 24- Enter mold N°1 using the key (22). 25- Start the machine cycle, see procedure "BCU-006. 26- Make sure that the preform enters mold N°1. 27- Stop the machine, see procedure "BCU-006. 28- Press the (21) key. Loading on one mold is disactivated. 29- Close the window(s) and return to the "Welcome" family. 30- Save the recipe, see procedure "BPU-005. The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-010416-01-02.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Synchronizing preform loading

BRE-005

6/6

© SIDEL

3

Part D

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

BRE-009

Setting the air conditioning

1

GENERAL INFORMATION This procedure allows you to select the unit of measurement for the air conditioning temperature display. The air conditioning is set by SIDEL for optimal operation. Certain parameters may be modified by the SAV SIDEL for specific requirements. PROCEDURE 1-006030-13-xx.svg

1- Press simultaneously on the "ENTER" button (1) and the button (2) for 10 s on the front of the air conditioning unit. 2345-

3

The number "1" appears on the display (3). Press the key (2) 2 times. The number "3" appears on the display (3). Press the key "ENTER"(1). The setpoint unit setting mode is active. Select the unit of temperature using the key (2). Press the key "ENTER"(1). The unit of temperature is confirmed. The unit of temperature lamp (4) lights up. The number "4" appears on the display (3).

BEFORE YOU FINISH 6- Press the key (2) to return to the original status.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

4

1

2

1-006137-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the air conditioning

BRE-009

2/2

© SIDEL

1

Part D

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 1/2

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

BRE-010

Setting the torque limiter sensors

2

GENERAL INFORMATION The procedure for setting the sensors on all of the torque limiters is identical. The transmission system on the preform interior decontamination system is fitted with a torque limiter. Make sure that the sensor (1) is mounted in the correct direction with regard to the control disc (2). The control disc (2) moves towards the rings (3) if there is over-torque. Never attempt to modify the torque limiter tares.

1-007205-08-xx.svg

3

2

6

1

MACHINE STATUS - all machine power and utilities turned off. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables None Specific tools - set of thickness gauges . 4

1- Position the detection pin (4) horizontally using the bolt (5). 2- Loosen the bolts (6). 3- Position the sensor (1) such that you obtain X = 1,5 mm and Y = 0,5 mm between the detection pin (4) and the control disc (2). 4- Tighten the bolts (6). 5- Tighten or loosen the bolt (5) to obtain Y = 0,5 mm between the detection pin (4) and the control disc (2). BEFORE YOU FINISH

Y

PROCEDURE

2

X

5 1-007118-01-xx.svg

6- Check that the torque limiters function correctly, see procedure "BNM-002.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the torque limiter sensors

BRE-010

2/2

© SIDEL

2

Part D

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 1/4

BRE-014

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the sensor cells on the infeed rail

3

GENERAL INFORMATION First carry out the settings on the infeed rail, see procedure "BRM-011. The sensors (1 ; 2) on the infeed rail are direct reflection photo-electric cells. 1 2

Detection of preforms at the bottom of the rail Detection of preforms at the top of the rail

B10.6 B10.5 1-007021-23-xx.svg

Use a sheet of white paper to show the beam from the sensor cells (1 ; 2). Where there are several production runs with preforms of differing opacities, use the most transparent preforms when carrying out the cell settings. The figures used for this procedure are theoretical values. These settings will need to be adjusted according to the characteristics and the performance of the preforms in production.

A

1

2 6

Work to be carried out at height: use the equipment fitted on the machine and always follow current safety regulations. 1-010424-01-xx.svg

MACHINE STATUS - feeder cleared of preforms, see procedure "BCU-017, Machine isolated except for: - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - preform feeder switched on, see procedure "BCU-003. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - certified standard preforms for the type of production being carried out, - ladder and footplate supplied with the machine.

© SIDEL

PROCEDURE 1- If necessary, open the cover(s)in the infeed rail. Setting the preform sensor (1) at the bottom of the rail Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

3

Setting the sensor cells on the infeed rail

BRE-014

2/4

2- Clean the emitter (3) and the reflector (4) on the (1) cell using a clean, dry cloth. 3- Loosen the screws (5) but do not remove them. The sensor (1) must be positioned in zone (A) of the rail. The force of gravity from the preforms located down from the sensor (1) must be sufficient for there not to be a loading fault on the infeed wheel. The heavier the weight of the preforms the closer the sensor (1) is to the loading pin (6).

5

9 60°

7

8

3

9

Maintain an angle of 60° between the sensor beam (1) and the axis along which the preforms travel.

4

4- Set the positions of the rings (7 ; 8) in zone (A) according to the weight of the preforms. 5- Tighten the bolts (5). 6- Position a preform on the axis of the emitter (3)/reflector (4) via the access flap on the infeed rail. 7- Loosen the nuts (9) but do not remove them. If there is a UV infeed rail, the sensors (1 ; 2) are set to detect the body of the preform. The beam from the sensors (1 ; 2) must fall between the under-neck guides (10) and the body guides (11).

1-010425-01-xx.svg

3

X

10

8- Set the height of the supports so that the emitter (3) and the reflector (4) are aligned and that the beam from the emitter (3) is at X = 11 mm below the rim of the preform.

F Check that the lamp on the emitter (3) lights up when preforms pass in front. 9- Remove the preform. F Check that the lamp on the emitter (3) goes out. 10- Tighten the nuts (9). Setting the sensor (2) at the top of the preform rail 11- Clean the emitter (3) and the reflector (4) on the (2) cell using a clean, dry cloth. 12- Loosen the screws (5) but do not remove them.

11 1-010427-01-xx.svg

© SIDEL

The distance Y must be sufficient so that when production restarts, the clearance time for preforms located between the photoelectric sensors (1 ; 2) is greater than the arrival time for new preforms of the infeed rail.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 3/4

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

BRE-014

Setting the sensor cells on the infeed rail

The theoretical distance Y between the ring (7) on the sensor (2) and the end of the tube (12) varies depending on the length of the infeed rail: - Y = 1,35 m for a 1,5 m infeed rail. - Y = 2,60 m for a 3 m infeed rail. - Y = 4 m for a 4,5 m infeed rail. Maintain an angle of 60° between the sensor beam (2) and the axis along which the preforms travel.

3

Y

7 12

13- Set the rings (7 ; 8) on the sensor (2). 14- Repeat steps 5 to 10 to set the preform sensor at the top of the infeed rail (2). BEFORE YOU FINISH 15- If necessary, close the cover(s) on the infeed rail.

© SIDEL

The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-010422-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the sensor cells on the infeed rail

BRE-014

4/4

© SIDEL

3

Part D

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 1/4

BRE-015

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the sensor cells on the feeder stabilization rail

3

GENERAL INFORMATION First adjust the stabilization rail assembly, see procedure "BRM-017. The sensors "D4 ; D3" on the stabilization rail are direct reflection photoelectric cells. D4

Unscrambler roller anticipated start sensor

B103.3

D3

Unscrambler roller exit

B102.0

D5

Upper count cell

B105.0 1-007021-24-xx.svg

The cells "D4 ; D3" are fitted with 3 indicator lamps: - the green lamp indicates that the power is on, - the yellow lamp indicates that the cell has detected an object, - the red lamp indicates that the cell is at its switching limit.

D4

D5

D3

Use a sheet of white paper to show the beam from the sensor cells "D4 ; D3". The sensor cell "D5" on the stabilization is a fiber optic cell.

1-010426-01-xx.svg

The cell "D5" is fitted with 2 lamps: - the yellow lamp indicates that the cell is on and has not detected any object, - the red lamp indicates that the cell is locked. The beam from the cell "D5" is not visible. The arrow (1) indicates the direction of the beam from the cell "D5". Where there are several production runs with preforms of differing opacities, use the most transparent preforms when carrying out the cell settings. Work to be carried out at height: use the equipment fitted on the machine and always follow current safety regulations.

D5

1

MACHINE STATUS

© SIDEL

- feeder cleared of preforms, see procedure "BCU-017. Machine isolated except for: - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - preform feeder switched on, see procedure "BCU-003. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-010428-01-xx.svg

Part D

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

3

Setting the sensor cells on the feeder stabilization rail

BRE-015

2/4

Parts None Consumables - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - certified standard preforms for the type of production being carried out. PROCEDURE 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. Setting the "D4" sensor cell 2- Clean the emitter (2) and the reflector (3) on the "D4" cell using a clean, dry cloth.

F Check that the emitter (2) and the reflector (3) are lined up. F Check that the beam on the cell has not been cut by any object. F Check that the yellow lamp is out when there are no preforms. - If the yellow lamp is on. · Press the button (4) for 10 s. The yellow lamp on the cell "D4" goes out. The switching mode for the "D4" cell is set. 3- Set the sensitivity of the cell "D4", see above. 4- Unscrew the bolts (5) but do not remove them. 5- Lower the support (6) until the sensor cell "D4" detects the stabilization rail (7). The yellow lamp on the cell "D4" lights up. 6- Raise the support (6) until the cell "D4" no longer detects the stabilization rail (7). The yellow lamp on the cell "D4" goes out. 7- Tighten the bolts (5). 8- Pass 10 preforms in front of the cell "D4". F Make sure that the yellow lamp on the cell "D4" lights up when the preforms pass and that the red lamp does not light up, even slightly. - If the yellow lamp stays off or if the red lamp comes on. · Repeat as above from step 3 . Setting the "D3" sensor cell 9- Repeat the steps "Setting the "D2" cell" from step 2 to set the "D3" cell. Setting the sensitivity of a photoelectric cell

3

7

D4

5

6

2 1-010429-01-xx.svg

D3

10- Press the button (4) for 2 s until the red lamp flashes.

The red lamp goes out.

1-010430-01-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

© SIDEL

Do not press the button (4) for too long 10 s. This action will invert the cell switching mode. For the preform feeder to function correctly, the green and yellow lamps on the "D4 ; D3" cells must be lit when preforms are present.

Part D 3/4

BRE-015

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the sensor cells on the feeder stabilization rail

The yellow lamp and the green lamp flash alternately. The cell is in programming mode. 11- Position one/some of the preform(s) in front of the cell. 12- Press button (4). The yellow lamp and the green lamp for 1 s. The yellow lamp and the green lamp flash alternately. 13- Remove the preform(s). 14- Press button (4). The yellow and green lamps go out. After 3 s the green lamp lights up. The cell has been set and is in operating mode.

3

4

If the red lamp flashes immediately after setting the sensitivity, the setting has failed. Setting the "D5" sensor cell 15- Unscrew the bolts (8) but do not remove them. 16- Position a preform at the "D5" cell. 17- Set the height of the suppport (9) so that the beam from the cell "D5", as shown by the arrow (1), falls half way between the neck of the preform and the rim. 18- Tighten the bolts (8).

1-010431-01-xx.svg

The cell "D5" and the support (9) can be fitted under the stabilisation rail (7), if the neck of the preform does not allow correct detection. 19- Remove the preform from the optic beam.

F Check that the red lamp is out. - If the red lamp is lit. · Press the "+" (10) and "-" (11) buttons simultaneously for 3 s. The "D5" cell is unlocked. F Check that the yellow lamp is continuously lit. - If the yellow lamp stays off. · Pass your hand 1 time in front of the "D5" cell. - If the yellow lamp lights. · Press the "+" (10) and "-" (11) buttons simultaneously for 6 s. The red lamp lights for 3 s. The yellow lamp lights after 6 s. The switching mode for the "D5" cell is set. - If the yellow lamp stays off. · Press the "+" (10) button until the yellow lamp lights. The sensitivity of the cell "D5" has been increased. During the settings, the beam of the cell "D5" is directed according to the diameter of the preform (maximum transparency zone) in order to obatain a single signal.

© SIDEL

20- Pass a preform slowly in front of the "D5" cell.

F Check that the yellow lamp goes out when the preform passes. - If the yellow lamp stays lit, or only slightly goes out.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

D5

9

11 10 8

7

1-010434-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

3 ·

Setting the sensor cells on the feeder stabilization rail

Part D BRE-015

4/4

Press the "-" (11) button until the yellow lamp goes out in the a preform is present.

The sensitivity of the "D5" has been reduced. 21- Pass 10 preforms in front of the cell "D5". F Check that the yellow lamp goes out when each preform passes in front. - If the yellow lamp stays lit. · Repeat as above from step 15 . 22- Press the "+" (10) and "-" (11) buttons simultaneously for 3 s. The "D5" cell is locked. BEFORE YOU FINISH 23- Remove the preforms. 24- Close the safety doors.

© SIDEL

F Unscrambler roller assembly power on. The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 1/4

BRE-016

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the sensor cells on the feeder unscrambler rollers

3

GENERAL INFORMATION First carry out the settings on the unscrambler roller assembly, see procedure "BRM-013. The sensors "D7 ; D2 ; D1" on the unscrambler rollers are direct reflection photo-electric cells. D7 D2 D1

Blockage detection at the unscrambler roller exit (option according to model) Unscrambler roller regulation sensor (option according to model) Unscrambler rollers and elevator column stoppage

B99.2 B126.0 B102.1

The cells "D7 ; D2 ; D1" are fitted with 3 indicator lamps: - the green lamp indicates that the power is on, - the yellow lamp indicates that the cell has detected an object, - the red lamp indicates that the cell is at its switching limit. Use a sheet of white paper to show the beam from the sensor cells "D7 ; D2 ; D1". Where there are several production runs with preforms of differing opacities, use the most transparent preforms when carrying out the cell settings. The figures used for this procedure are theoretical values. These settings will need to be adjusted according to the characteristics and the performance of the preforms in production. Work to be carried out at height: use the equipment fitted on the machine and always follow current safety regulations. MACHINE STATUS - feeder cleared of preforms, see procedure "BCU-017. Machine isolated except for: - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - preform feeder switched on, see procedure "BCU-003.

© SIDEL

TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - Clean, dry cloths.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-007021-25-xx.svg

D7

D2

D1

1-010435-01-xx.svg

Part D

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

3

Setting the sensor cells on the feeder unscrambler rollers

BRE-016

2/4

Specific tools - certified standard preforms for the type of production being carried out. PROCEDURE 1- Open the safety doors at the relevant zone on the machine. Setting the "D7" sensor cell (option according to model) The "D7" sensor detects possible blockages at the exit to the unscrambler rollers. For optimum operation of the preform feeder, the "D7" sensor must never be masked. 2- Clean the emitter (1) and the reflector (2) on the "D7" cell using a clean, dry cloth. 3- Unscrew the bolts (3) but do not remove them. 4- Position the support (4) for the "D7" sensor on the tube (5) at 50 mm before the unscrambler roller exit. 5- Tighten the bolts (3).

3

4

2

1

8 1-010438-01-xx.svg

© SIDEL

F Check that the emitter (1) and the reflector (2) are lined up. F Check that the beam on the cell has not been cut by any object. F Check that the yellow lamp is out when there are no preforms. - If the yellow lamp is on. · Press the button (6) for 10 s. The yellow lamp on the cell "D7" goes out. The switching mode for the "D7" cell is set. 6- Set the sensitivity of the cell "D7", see above. 7- Position 1 preform on the unscrambler rollers (7), level with the sensor "D7". 8- Unscrew the bolts (8) but do not remove them. 9- Lower the emitter (1) until the yellow lamp lights up. 10- Raise the emitter (1) until the yellow lamp goes out. 11- Tighten the bolts (8). 12- Position several preforms in a tight group such that their necks are raised in front of the sensor "D7". F Check that the yellow lamp is lit. Setting the "D2" sensor cell (option according to model)

5

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 3/4

BRE-016

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the sensor cells on the feeder unscrambler rollers

13- Clean the emitter (9) and the reflector (10) on the "D2" cell using a clean, dry cloth. 14- Unscrew the bolts (11) but do not remove them. 15- Position the support (12) on the sensor "D2" on the last third of the tube (5). 16- Tighten the bolts (11).

F Check that the emitter (9) and the reflector (10) are lined up. F Check that the beam on the cell has not been cut by any object. F Check that the yellow lamp is out when there are no preforms. - If the yellow lamp is on. · Press the button (6) for 10 s. The yellow lamp on the cell "D2" goes out. The switching mode for the "D2" cell is set. 17- Set the sensitivity of the cell "D2", see above. 18- Position 10 preform on the unscrambler rollers (7), level with the sensor "D2". 19- Unscrew the bolts (13) but do not remove them. 20- Set the incline of the emitter/reflector assembly to make an angle of 30° with regard to the vertical axis of the preforms. 21- Set the axial position of the support (12) so that the beam from the sensor cell "D2" passes between the unscrambler rollers (7). 22- Tighten the bolts (13). F Check that the yellow lamp is lit. - If the yellow lamp is out. · Repeat as above from step 17 . Setting the "D1" sensor cell

3

13 11

5

9

7 12 10

1-010442-01-xx.svg

The sensor support "D1" is positioned as far up the tube (5) as possible. 23- Repeat the steps "Setting the "D2" cell" from step 13 to set the "D1" cell. Setting the sensitivity of a photoelectric cell Do not press the button (6) for too long 10 s. This action will invert the cell switching mode. For the preform feeder to function correctly, the green and yellow lamps on the "D7 ; D2 ; D1" cells must be lit when preforms are present.

6

© SIDEL

24- Press the button (6) for 2 s until the red lamp flashes.

The red lamp goes out. The yellow lamp and the green lamp flash alternately. The cell is in programming mode. 25- Position one/some of the preform(s) in front of the cell. 26- Press button (6). The yellow lamp and the green lamp for 1 s. The yellow lamp and the green lamp flash alternately. 27- Remove the preform(s). 28- Press button (6). The yellow and green lamps go out. Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-010431-03-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

3

Setting the sensor cells on the feeder unscrambler rollers

Part D BRE-016

4/4

After 3 s the green lamp lights up. The cell has been set and is in operating mode. If the red lamp flashes immediately after setting the sensitivity, the setting has failed. BEFORE YOU FINISH 29- Remove the preforms. 30- Close the safety doors.

© SIDEL

F Unscrambler roller assembly power on. The procedure is now complete.

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 1/3

BRE-018

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the sensor cells on the hopper assembly

3

GENERAL INFORMATION The sensors (1 ; 2 ; 3) on the hopper are capacitor-type sensors. 1

Detection at the hopper low level

B72.2

2

Detection at the hopper highlevel

B72.3

3

Detection of supply to the elevator column

B78.3

1-007021-26-xx.svg

The height of thee sensor (3) is correctly set when the number of preforms between each lath on the elevator belt is constant. If the hopper is fed either by a tipper or manually, the sensor (2) will determine the minimum required level of preforms before filling up. If the hopper is fed by a conveyor, the sensor (2) will determine the maximum required level of preforms before the conveyor stops. In cases here the hopper cannot be fed with preforms, use, where possible, 2 joined preforms to ensure the adjustments are carried out without detection of your hand.

2

3

1

MACHINE STATUS - hopper filled with preforms. Machine isolated except for: - primary electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-001, - main electrical circuit under power, see procedure "BCU-002, - preform feeder switched on, see procedure "BCU-003. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Parts None Consumables - Clean, dry cloths. Specific tools - certified standard preforms for the type of production being carried out.

© SIDEL

PROCEDURE

Publication date : 13/11/2009

1-008537-01-xx.svg

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

3

Setting the sensor cells on the hopper assembly

1234-

Clean the detection surface of the sensors (1 ; 2). Loosen the nuts (4) but do not remove them. Position the sensor (2) at the required height. Position the sensor (2) at a distance of 1 to 2 mm from the body of the hopper (5). 5- Tighten the nuts (4).

Part D BRE-018

2/3

2 4

5

1-008523-02-xx.svg

6- Loosen the screws (6) but do not remove them. 7- Position the sensor (1) at a distance of 1 to 2 mm from the body of the hopper (5). 8- Tighten the bolts (6).

5

1 6

1-008524-02-xx.svg

9- Slightly unscrew the fastener (7). 10- Position the sensor (3) at the required height. 11- Tighten the fastener (7). 3

7

© SIDEL

1-008525-02-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009

Part D 3/3

BRE-018

SBO 20/24 Servicing Procedure Catalog / Adjustment procedure

Setting the sensor cells on the hopper assembly

12- Set the potentiometer (8) for the sensors (1 ; 3) to obtain the detection threshold.

8

3 9

The lamp (9) on the sensors (1 ; 3) lights up when preforms are detected. 13- Set the potentiometer (8) on the sensor (2) to obtain the detection threshold. The lamp (9) on the sensor (2) goes out when preforms are detected. BEFORE YOU FINISH

F Unscrambler roller assembly power on. The procedure is now complete.

© SIDEL

1-007370-03-xx.svg

Publication date : 13/11/2009